LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

THE WORKING CLASS IDEOLOGY IN SATURDAY NIGHT AND SUNDAY MORNING

Dr. P. Augustine Mathew Research Guide in English, Deva Matha College, Kuravilangad, Kottayam Dist.

ABSTRACT Alan Sillitoe has been hailed as the most powerful working class novelist to come out of England with the publication of his novel Saturday Night and Sunday Morning (1958). The collection of short stories, The Loneliness of the long-Distance Runner, published the following year confirmed the opinion that an important new writer had arrived in England. This paper attempts to examine the working class ideology in Alan Silliotoe’s famous novel.

The fifties was a period in which writers for the first time raised their voice against the clash between the middle class and the working class. The World Wars and their effects on society changed the existing hierarchical order of the communities. Certain values relating to gender roles, youth education, marriage and sex together with social and individual approaches to their values, took new shapes. As it was the labouring class which had suffered most from the economic inequality, the projection of those values especially on the younger generations of the proletariat was more obvious than it had been among the middle class. The fact remains, however, that until Sillitoe no writer in English fiction had given or had been able to give a detailed and informed picture of the English working class living in a period of seemingly stable prosperity, and thus the two books retain the prominence reserved for the first in the field. Though, as has been mentioned, these first books were and still are included in the Angry Young men/working-class fiction groupings of the 1950s/early 1960s. There are several aspects which differentiate them from other works of the same period with which they are often associated and indeed differentiate them from most others before or since. These differences lie mainly in the areas of the depiction of the way of life of the characters and in their beliefs and attitudes, which is to say their ideology which could be summarized in the word “culture”. To show that there is such a phenomenon as working class, and that this class has its own culture was something new. This culture is different from, and in many ways opposed to, the “high” artistic culture of the elite, but is in no way a culture of lack, as in “lack of culture”, or “lack of education”, it is rather a creation of the working class themselves and serves as a positive force in their lives, which are again different from and frequently opposed to the lives of the upper and 1 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 middle classes. Furthermore, although political and economic factors are important in the creation and definition of this culture, they are by no means the only factors. Look at the role of work in the lives of Sillitoe’s characters, seeking to demonstrate that this plays an important role, not always necessarily a positive one, and that this activity has been consistently neglected in English literature, at least as regards the working class. Sillitoe’s work however, reflects the illnesses of the modern era and illuminates cultural forms of persuasion that stunt human development in its infantile stages. Sillitoes’s writing is a continuation of the tradition begun in the fifties by England’s group of writers commonly known as the “angry young men”. His world view is formulated out of an ideological perspective which often blocks vision and limits insight into the broader context of the human condition in post war western societies. The working man must be given some means of self identification that will restore in him a sense of dignity and provide him with a feeling of individuality. Those of the proletariat who are not afraid to read books suffer from a problem uncommon to any other social class. They find that they are not represented in novels or, if they are, that the novels they read were written by authors of the Right who simply pass on the old values because they are not familiar enough with the workingman to know the real attitudes of the proletariat. Consequently, Sillitoe with his own working class background- intends to create a body of literature that accurately conveys the workers way of life from a workers point of view. In Saturday Night and Sunday Morning, Arthur finds his work in a Nottingham bicycle factory quite pleasant. Also he can keep his money for his own pleasures including drinking, gambling and women; he does not care about education at all. In his work he escapes from the monotony of the daily routine to another monotony. He finds space to daydream and forget any troubles. This is another way of contrasting working class people who are involved in manual work with the middle in bureaucratic work, in terms of psychological states. In the novel, Sillitoe shows us working class men of all ages, going to the local pub for a drink and also to play darts, billiards, cards or dominoes. On Sundays, the family, that is the husbands and wives together, come to the pub. Actually the activity can be regarded as a social issue. This offers people an escape from the harsh aspects of working class life and a reinforced sense of belonging to a particular social group. The club clientele in novel are most of the time family men. They are regular pub goers; it is a place where they can leave their responsibilities aside for a while after family life becomes settled and the couples face the difficulties of married life. The people in Sillitoe’s trilogy often appear almost paralyzed by what they know of themselves and the world. The crisis is a crisis of a subject without a self, a subject who has become the object of his society through a technological mechanics of repression and control that has become so penetrating and encompassing that it has eradicated much of the space needed for the development of a self with some autonomy. There is a clear depiction of external reality in Sillitoe’s works; his novels reveal that we have become the important objects of external forces which cannot be viewed as anything other than monopolistic and fatally anti-human.

2 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

CONCLUSION The novels explore the attempts of an English factory worker who feels himself caught in domestic and repetitive routine as well as ideological abstractions, to break free of the oppressive structures which determine his living and thinking. References Barker, Debra Stones. “Sillitoe, Alan”. ReferenceGuide to English literature. ed. D.L. Kirkpatrick vol 2. Chicago and London: St. James press, 1991. Hanson, Gillian Mary.Understanding Alan Sillitoe. Columbia, South Carolina: University of South Carolina Press, 1999. Hitchcock, Peter. Working- Class Fiction in Theory and Practice a Reading of Alan Sillitoe. Ann Arbor umi Research Press, 1989. Sillitoe, Alan. Saturday Night and Sunday Morning. London: W. H. Allen, 1958; New York: Knopf, 1959. — .The Loneliness of the Long-Distance Runner. London: W. H. Allen, 1959; New York: Knopf, 1960. Stevenson, Randall. The British Novel since the Thirties. London: B.T. Bats Ford, 1986.

3 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

ENTRAPMENTS OF THE IDEAL: MYTH HISTORY AND HUMANITY

Athira Ramachandran Assistant Professor, Department of English, S. V. N. S. S. College, Wadakanchery

ABSTRACT This paper focuses on the three elements; 1. The relation between myth and History, 2. Ramayana as a collective unconscious 3. The traps of the Ideal. The two literary works, analyzed in this paper have drawn inspiration from the same Indian Epic Ramayana. These works are exactly half a century apart and the authors come from two different time periods, cultures, and experiences. The texts are Kanchana Sita by C N Sreekandan Nair and Sita Sings the Blues by Nina Paley. This study is an attempt reading these texts as offspring’s of the same ideology that has served as a yardstick of moral conduct in a country abounded by myth.

A myth according to the oxford pocket dictionary is a tale that might not be true. So the very definition itself puts the idea of the word in a shaky position. None the less mythology is part of national culture and a part of the history of the culture is weaved around mythology. Now ‘history’ itself contains a story. The credibility of this story depends on the authenticity of the relic that serves as the initiation/instigation for the story. Before dismissing them as the works of an over-active imagination one need to understand that there is a thread of reality in every story. Therefore reality and story contribute history. Myth does play part in history and in turn history justifies the need for myth, a symbiotic relationship that has managed to sustain human fantasy from running out of plots. But human fantasy is a fleeting entity and needs more than simple plots to keep it afloat. And what better way than religion, the single most powerful influential force to unite diverse people under a common divine instinct, to solidify a myth reinforced by history. The result, holy texts that serve as moral guides. Once the divine aura is attributed to these texts questioning them becomes unacceptable. But as time changes attitudes do too, and taboos become open fields for those wanting to explore varied dimensions of restriction. Thus all holy texts become subjects of interpretations and reinterpretations giving rise to new epics. Epics the arsenal of myths are a favorite source material for those wanting to reap newer construal. India a country that thrives in the glory of its epic past, its two classic epics with their roots in the very foundation of the nation’s beliefs happens to be a hub of these interpreters. Ramayana and Mahabharata are two of the epics interpreted worldwide. Ramayana, the first of the two epic in chronological sequencing, is the source for the two

4 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 texts taken for reflection in this study. Valmiki, a saint who lived in some unspecified part of BC is ascribed the authorship of the first version of this grand epic. Experts have yet to come to an agreement regarding the exact time frame of the epic The versions of Ramayana available today, even the version titled the Valmiki Ramayana, is said to differ significantly from the ‘original’ text that was written by the sage. The original version has undergone considerable amounts of tampering leading to distortions in the so-called original plot, if there had been one. It is said that in the text that was written by the Sage Valmiki the first Kanda (roughly books) and the last Kanda were absent/different for the popular versions of today. The final chapter of the epic the Uttara Kanda that contains the most controversial episode in the Ramayana, Sita Parityaga (the abandoning of Sita) that eventually leads to Sita Thirodana, (disappearance of Sita/ Sita returns to the womb of Mother Earth). In this book Sita is forced into a second exile by her husband, following the allegations on her chastity. A pregnant Sita takes refuge in the hermitage of Valmiki the supposed narrator of the epic, and gives birth to her twins and raises them there. Many experts on the epic believe that this final part was a later addition and that it was never a part of the original plot of the author. A text that was to serve as a model for society was adorned with a divine aura to permeate its authority. Ramayana is a classic because it has continues to fascinate hundreds of people beyond the limits of human limitations. Over time the Ramayana has been subjected to a number of interpretations each giving rise to new Ramayana’s. The Truth of the epic seems to be a farfetched Idea, what we have are versions of the same story and the more convincingly narrated version wins. It is a relief that no one has so far managed to come up with a single convincing version of the epic, thereby leaving scope for stranger retellings. The final book of the Ramayana is one of the most intriguing episodes in the whole epic whether its credibility is valued or not. This paper hopes to analyze two variations of the epic written by two different people, from two diverse cultures and two very distinctive time periods and what they perceive as the meaning of Ramayana. The two texts taken for consideration are Kanchana Sita by the popular Malayalam dramatist C N Sreekandan Nair and the animated movie Sita Sings the Blues by Nina Paley an American artist/Animator. Now curious facts about the texts; Kanchana Sita was first published in 1958, Sita Sings the Blues came out in 2008, exactly fifty years apart. Nair wrote the play for the stage within a deadline, while Paley was intrigued by the epic during a post divorce trauma and started an extensive research on it. C N Sreekandan Nair is one of the pioneers of modern Malayalam theatre. Nair’s Kanchana Sita is one of the plays in his Ramayana trilogy. This collection titled Natakathrayam includes three episodes from the Epic, titled Saketham, Langalakshmi and Kanchana Sita. In the order of the narration Saketham is the first part of the story narrating the tragic fate of King Dasharadha (Ram’s Father), who adhering to his Dharma had to keep his promise. Dasharadha unwillingly forced Ram into the exile that marks the beginning of the ayanam /journey. Lankalakshmi brings to the foreground the hitherto unheard stories of the Demon dynasty of Lanka. Mandodari, Ravana’s chief queen consort, grabs the attention of the reader; at several instances she appears more powerful than anyone in the entire epic. Kanchana Sita follows the events of Uttara Kanda. Although last in the series Kanchana Sita was the first play Nair wrote. Kanchana Sita or Golden

5 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Sita, refers to the golden idol of Sita, that King Ram had used while he conducted the Aswamwdha Yagna. The significance of the idol is relevant as it points to one of the center themes of this paper. Nair might have hoped for a cathartic climax for all three of his plays. Their significance rest on the fact that they have actually brought to the foreground some characters, who were relegated to the backstage or pushed into oblivion during the unraveling of the main plots in previous retellings. In the original/official epic (the first version attributed to Valmiki) the fate of these characters are left to the imagination of the reader. These characters appear larger than life in these plays with or without their divine auras. Their hubris/fatal flaw come from their adherence to their dharma despite their better judgments. Every major character in these plays is bound to his or her Dharma, which eventually leads to their defeat. Kanchana Sita portrays Ram as a man caught between his duty as a king and his responsibility as a son, a brother, a husband, a father and a man. He remains in a state of indecision for most part of the play making the reader question the integrity of the ideal he represents. The two characters who take center stage in this play are Urmila, the wife of Ram’s devoted brother Lakshmana and Bharat, Ram’s brother, who chose to serve as protector of his brother’s kingdom during Ram’s exile .They are prominent characters in Ramayana, but the epic don’t offer them scope for character development. Another prominent figure is Kausalya Ram’s mother who sympathies with her son’s predicament but is disappointed in his lack of clarity in judgment. Nair presents them as a foil to the confused and self defeated Rama. These characters are sure of their truths, and warn Rama that a blind submission to one’s dharma is foolish and any dharma that deprives a man of his peace should be abandoned. Like every epic character, Ram fall a victim to his own perfection and ideals, thus constituting to his final defeat. Sita, though the central character has a very short stage appearance, yet she dominates the play with her sublime presence. Another episode in this play deals with the slaying of Shambuga, a dalit who tries to do penance to gods and is killed by Rama to maintain the proper order of the cast system. The play also shows the hypocrisy of cast system and the upper caste Brahmins who are always afraid of losing their position in society. These fear and insecurities are portrayed through the character of Vasishta, the royal saint and teacher of the Raguvamsha. Nair establishes the time old bramana-kshatrya power struggle through this character. The next text is an animated movie by the American cartoonist Nina Paley. It came out in 2008 followed by a number of controversies and devotees screaming blasphemy. It contains the tale of Ramayana told in a humorous way by three Indian shadow puppets, songs by the American Jazz singer Annette Hanshaw, and the break up story of the artist herself. The puppets tell the story in a very light manner but they voice some of the chief concerns of the epic that has been puzzling readers and devotees alike for centuries. The inspiration for this movie comes from the artist’s reading of the Ramayana after her divorce. After her divorce Paley found solace in the epic that helped her cope with her relationship issues. Serendipity brought Paley to Ramayana, but the artist has done her homework with details. A bold and experimental move, the film gained Paley the recognition and infamy beyond her wildest dreams. The narration of the story of the epic takes place through the puppets and the ‘performances’ takes place on an animated theatre, performed by animated characters. (An intermission scene shows the characters taking breaks from the set.) The shadow puppets are the Vidushaks of the traditional Sanskrit play. Paley 6 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 manages to race the curiosity of the audience just as much as Nair, and put across the exact thoughts he is trying to voice, although through light hearted punch lines. The animation, the songs and all the right- misconceptions about India makes it all the more vivid. Some religious critics and organizations accused Paley of trying to draw parallels between herself and the Hindu goddess Sita, and that she had insulted the holy text by reducing it to a break up story typically catered for the western audience. But as a literary text Sita Sings the Blues is a considerable addition to the large culture of Ramayana retellings. Blasphemy or not, the attention this text has been receiving speaks for itself. Two different authors and two different reasons for writing the same story, but the intriguing factor is that both of them have managed to ask the same questions and comes up with literally the same answers beyond the boundaries of time, place, nationality and language. Across the veil of cultural barriers two distinctive voices have found similar connotation for a text that seems to have exhausted all opportunities for interpretations but always provide meanings for those wishing to seek it. More than a religious text Ramayana is a piece of excellent literature that originated from a deep understanding of the human nature. It is not a single text, but a culture that provide insights to humanity for coping with a strange and turbulent world. Ramayana in a way is an open ended text not only in its story line but also at every juncture of its vast narrative. It leaves the reader with a large number of questions and desire to prod into the mental realms of the original Creators of the Epic. It is this very nature that fascinates humanity and the reason for writers going back to it. Each version of the Ramayana is an individual attempt at finding answers to the questions that seems to exceed the comprehension of ‘normal’ human understanding. So what made these two completely different individuals draw the same conclusions from this epic? The easiest answer is commonality in source. But can the common source influence the imagination of individuals to a degree that they, without ever coming into contact with each other, are identical. In “The Significance of Constitution and Heredity in Psychology” (November 1929), Jung wrote: And the essential thing, psychologically, is that in dreams, fantasies, and other exceptional states of mind the most far-fetched mythological motifs and symbols can appear autochthonously at any time, often, apparently, as the result of particular influences, traditions, and excitations working on the individual, but more often without any sign of them. These “primordial images” or “archetypes,” as I have called them, belong to the basic stock of the unconscious psyche and cannot be explained as personal acquisitions. Together they make up that psychic stratum which has been called the collective unconscious. If Ramayana is attributed the collective unconscious status, it’s easier to understand the common thread that connects these writers despite their seeming disparities. The human psyche works in strange ways as it draws sustenance from the Jungian collective unconscious. Ramayana is a mythology so powerful, in the Indian culture outlook, as it outweights even the Constitution when it comes to moral ideals for communities of all time. It is intrinsically related to the heart and soul of the country as well as its (debated) history. The symbiotic relationship between history and myth sustains culture. 7 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Very often these history-supported myths become instruments in the plots for gaining control over groups that deviates from the norms of normal or complacent society. Mans’ irrational and well deserved fear of his creator always paves the way for these kind of dominance by those sections of society that claims moral superiority by virtue of divine right. They make it a point to remind the public about the historicity of myths. Control through obedience is the new motto. Obedience gained through idealization is a phenomenon in itself. Ramayana has provided for the greatest number of ideals in the Indian Hindu community, the ideal king, the ideal wife, the ideal woman, the ideal brother, son, father and so on. These ideals are knitted into concept of national identity making them popular among the masses. Ram was the perfect son, brother, father, King, warrior etc. Sita was the perfect woman the ideal wife and loving mother, Lakshmana the perfect brother, hanuman the perfect devotee and Ravana the supreme villain. The problem with these definitions is that it limits the individual’s mobility of the psychological spheres. The individual becomes the motif. The ideals are victimized by the ideal. It traps them to such an extent that escape is impossible. The characters of the texts are trapped in their ideals. Both Nair’s and Paley’s Ram can’t seem to escape their idealization. Nair presents this situation in solemn dialogues while Paley does it through her witty cartoons. The spectator is able to understand the pathetic situation of the characters as they become puppets of the ideal. They lose their individuality and gain a vagueness of identity. Perfection in body, thought and action drains the character of peaceful coexistence with the self. Paley’s puppets have a hard time defining Ravana, he was a great ruler, a scholar and reputedly handsome, the only fault they can find with him is kidnapping Sita. They point out that Ravana never forced himself on Sita a commendable act of conduct yet no one ever appreciated him for that. So the puppets don’t understand the utterly villainess nature of Ravana. Nair’s Ravana exhibit all the qualities of the tragic hero, but we all know his defeat is pre determined. Paley doesn’t share Nair’s elegance in characterization but both of them aim at a divergent character depiction outside the Ideal. Sita the meek, obedient housewife and daughter-in-law sings the Blues in Paley, a thought that would send millions of believers into a fit of religious frenzy. Ram’s ever devoted queen is trapped in her over perfection. Nair’s other characters narrates her as a celestial being innocent of worldly sins. The perfection in her ideal makes her the metal idol we see in Kanchana Sita, pure and pristine yet immobile. Paley’s Sita spends most of her life in tears till finally, after realizing the hypocritical nature of her husband and society decides to end her miserable righteous existence. Breaking the ideal is a very difficult task. People don’t often attempt it because they feel it better to deal with the burden than face the ramifications. If you are immoral/ normal you are free to execute your will but being the ideal deprives you of that privilege. You are the monolith that people look up to, for role models. Those attempting to break out of ideals will have to take the heat of society and they will be held responsible for ruining dynasties. The entrapments of these structures are so deep and twisted that one feel it his/her duty to continue the ideal. Both Kanchana Sita and Sita Sings the Blues illustrate the problems with idealizations. Two strains of thoughts drawn from the same collective unconscious emanate the dangers of idealizations, especially mythical idealizations that prevent individuals from articulating their individuality. Nair questions his ideals through his character, while Paley does it through the amusing dialogues of her puppets.

8 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Yet it is clear that both the authors are trying to bring out the ambiguity in the ideal status. In Kachana Sita Ram is repeatedly asked the question, whether or not he believes in the allegations on his wife and he continuously evades this question by saying that it is the duty of the King to execute the will of the people. Paley’s puppets on the occasion of the fire trial question its need and the conclusion they come to reminds us of Nair’s Ram. Paley’s Ram is portrayed as a through bully (on occasions he is seen stepping on Sita and kicking her, literally), while Nair’s Ram is a solemn figure, repenting his actions, yet unable for reactions. He becomes a puppet of the power hungry Brahmins. Paley’s portraits Ram as a jerk who deserves no sympathy from the audience (probably a picture of her own husband) whereas Nair’s Ram yearn for it, looking about him for understanding figures. But the Ideal that he is prevents him from showing his weaker sides. He can never admit his fears because profane thoughts should never enter a holy heart. In this sense Paley’s Ram is given more liberty of expression, as the focus of victimization rests on Sita alone. It’s apparent that Ram whether or not deserves sympathy, was a victim of his own perfection, just like all those ideals in society. So as these myth infested history sustained facades of perfection carve into the soul of the ideal holder he/she slowly regress into a kind of self denial that prevents them from ever enjoying life to the fullest. May be the moral of these epics/stories/ retellings is that only idols can be ideals and not people and ideals that deprive one of peace and happiness should be thrown to the wind. Works Cited 1. Gokhale, Malashri and Gokhale, Namita Ed., In Search Of Sita: Revisiting Mythology. Penguin Books, New Delhi, 2001. Web. 2. Kohn, Eric. A Filmmakers Blues Prompts Traditionalist to See Red. Forward.com. May 29, 2009. Web. September 25,2015. http://forward.com/culture/13468/a-filmmaker-s-blues-prompts-traditionalist- 01927/#ixzz3l4UAFp1X 3. Nair C N Sreekandhan, Kanchana Sita, Natakathrayam: D C Books, Kottayam, 2001.Print. 4. Sita Sings the Blues. Dir.Nina Paley. Audience Funded Project. 2009. You Tube. 5. Jung, Collected Works vol. 8, “The Significance of Constitution and Heredity in Psychology” (1929, Ed. And Translated: Adler, Gerhard and Hull, R. F. C., Princeton University Press, 1960, 229–230 (p. 112). Web. Acknowledgement This paper is inspire from seminar paper titled Ambiguous Identities: Utilization of Myth in Kanchana Sita and Sita Sings the Blues Presented at two day UGC Sponsored National Seminar on Trajectories of Theatre Studies: Including Exclusions organized by the PG Department of English, N. S. S. College Ottapalam on 8.10.2015 & 9.10.2015.

9 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

THE GOD OF LOSS: REPRESENTATION OF THE PARAVANS IN THE NOVEL THE GOD OF SMALL THINGS BY ARUNDHATI ROY

Febina T.P. M.Phil. Research Scholar, Department of Studies in English Thalassery Campus, Kannur University, Kerala State e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Arundhati Roy, the winner of Booker prize for her debut novel The God of Small Things, follows Mulk Raj Anand’s tradition of attacking degenerating aspects of Indian social systems. Roy’s compassion for the underdog and her indignation of the exploitation of the weak by the forces of caste system, capitalism and industrialization invest her work with tremendous power. Untouchability has been the greatest hampering process which has always been a blood sucking leech to the Indian society. Untouchability, a great impediment to the marginalized or the dalit sections of the society, has shown how much deprivations these societies undergo. The God of Small Things is an attempt at bringing into focus the deep roots of casteism, which has stifled healthy growth of considerable sections of Indian society. Though the ban of untouchability preached in the past, even today it strictly practices in the rural India. This paper aims at exploring the condition of dalits and the strong rooted untouchability presented in the novel The God of Small Things. It also discusses the domination and exploitation imposed upon the powerful over the powerless. The protagonist of the novel Velutha is a representative of the young and spirited paravans. Although he was so bright and talented, he had a tragic fate only because he was an untouchable. Key words: Untouchability, Caste system, Patriarchy, Oppression

INTRODUCTION Arundhati Roy, a great Keralite writer who writes in English presented a sharp satire on Kerala society in the 1960s through her celebrated novel The God of Small Things. Thus the novel reveals the confrontation between the haves and have nots, between the mighty and the weak, the ‘Big man, the Laltain’ and ‘Small man, the Mombatti’, between ‘the God of big things’ and ‘the God of small things’. It represents all those people who are victimized by the forces of history, dead convention, false pride and respectability, the tyranny of the state, the politics of opportunities and androcentric order. The life in the novel is divided into two sets of forces, locked in a grim mortal fight. The upper world consists of the burden of history, dead limbs of tradition, family culture, pride and patriarchy and political opportunism-‘the God of Big Things’. The other 10 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 layer comprises of children, insecure women, untouchables and working people with their struggle for identity and independence and natural urges and desire- ‘the God of Small Things’. The novel is complex in its theme. It has been interpreted in diverse ways. Although, it is preeminently a novel by a woman about a woman the most striking element of the novel is its treatment of the lower caste people. The novel deals with the universal theme of social consciousness, that is, class antagonism and class exploitation. It questions the exposure to tyranny and injustice the untouchables have to suffer arbitrarily and the neglect and humiliation the dalit and the defenseless have to pass through in a caste ridden society. Roy takes off from where Mulk Raj Anand left in his Untouchable. Anand suggested conversion to Christianity as one of the three alternatives for untouchables to free them from the scourge of Hindu orthodoxy. She successfully drives home the point that conversion to Christianity also failed to relieve the underdogs of the society from their misery. The novelist privileges the marginalized in her attempt to idealize Velutha, a despised Paravan. Attached to the Ayemenem household of a highly revered Christian family, Velutha is a convert. His father Vellya Pappen, was a toddy tapper and worked as a servant in the Ayemenem household. Velutha who used to accompany his father to the house, find a job in the pickle factory of Mammachi, the Ayemenem land lady, on the strength of his his personal skill and ability. Even as a child Velutha displayed his exceptional skill at building highly functional as well as decorative items by using locally available natural raw material. He would make “intricate toys, tiny windmills, rattles, minute jewel boxes out of dried palm reeds: he could carve perfect boats out of tapioca stems and figures on cashew nuts” (73). But being a victim of untouchability and caste system Velutha never got opportunity for further development and recognition he deserves: Mammachi rehired Velutha as the factory carpenter and put him in charge of general maintenance. It caused a great deal of resentment among the other touchable factory workers, because according to them, Paravans not meant to be carpenters. And certainly, prodigal Paravans were not meant to be rehired” (77). Apart from his carpentry skills, Velutha had a way with machines, he mended radios, clocks and water pumps. He looked after the plumping and all the electrical gadgets in the house. But he was always marginalized by the society, even in his love affair with his dearest Ammukkutty. Ammu, the upper caste woman, has a doomed sexual encounter with the untouchable Velutha towards the end of the story, violating love laws that lay down “who should be loved and how. And how much” (33). The word Velutha in Malayalam means white. On the contrary, however, we know that he is ebony skinned. But he is certainly apotheosized by the author. Being an accomplished carpenter, Velutha makes little wonders in carved wood and thus is The God of Small Things, the titular hero of the novel. Thus he is: The God of Loss The God of Small Things Naked but for his nail varnish ( 290). The indivious nature of traditional power-relationship and class character in a typical socio-cultural backdrop is latent is not only in the delineation of Velutha’s character, but also in the social milieu of the time. The class ridden and almost bipolar society of Kerala, as there were no buffer castes 11 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 quiet unlike North-Indian caste-profile, a number of Paravans, Pelavas and Pulayas converted to Christianity and joined the Anglican Church to escape from the scourge of untouchability. As an added incentive, they were given a little food and money and they came to be called as Rice Christians. They were made to have separate priests. In fact, they achieved nothing despite of disappointment as they remained Paravans albeit Paravan Christians. The innocent Velutha is beaten to the point of death by the merciless police force who bear grudge against him for keeping illicit relationship with Ammu. Mammachi’s condonement rather complicity in facilitating her son Chacko’s sexual relationship with various low caste women which she justifies as being men’s needs contrasts sharply with her revulsion on learning about her daughter’s affair with Velutha. Baby Kochamma, Ammu’s father’s schemy sister, was fascinated towards Father Mulligan, a handsome Irish monk, has cunningly rejected the affair between Ammu and her dalit lover by saying that How could she stand by the smells, haven’t you noticed, they have a particular smell ? These Paravans? (78). Velutha was known and familiar to the family and develops a loving and even father like relation with the youngsters Rahel and Estha, but he is a dalit servant, he is assigned “outsider” status to the house and the family designation” Pappachi would not allow Paravans into the house. Nobody would. They were not allowed to touch anything the touchables touched. Caste Hindus and caste Christians” .73) Velutha offers what is denied to Ammu, Estha and Rahel in society and family. Baby Kochamma destroys Velutha during the incident of Sophie Mol’s death, only because he belongs to the Paravan community. Although she knew the fact that Velutha was not responsible for Sophie Mol’s death, she had filed F.I.R against the innocent young. Still the crime was not proved; the touchable police had brutally treated the accused untouchable as a murderer. Baby Kochamma was also successful in making numb both Rahel and Estha, the twin children of Ammu, while the barbaric police operation going on against Velutha. But the memory of a lie haunts Estha all his life that he decides not to utter any other word after that. The policemen wanted to know whether Velutha had kidnapped the children. Baby Kochamma had impressed upon him that if he did not lie, Ammu would rot in jail for the rest of her life. So Estha lied. That was the end of his childhood and the end of his innocence and of speech. “Childhood tip toed out, silenceslid in like a bolt”. Velutha’s low birth coupled with his political affiliation renders him disabled like the one- armed God of Ammu’s dream. Neither his personal talent nor his political affinity rescued him. The image of the physically disabled god serves as the central image of the story. Veluth’s mesmerizing talent catches Mammachi’s attention and she would often say that “if only he had been a Paravan he might have become an engineer” (227). Chacko too acknowledges him as an excellent carpenter with an engineer’s mind. As an accomplished mechanic, Velutha is “invaluable” for Chacko, for it is Velutha who “practically runs the factory” (279). However, neither education nor skill ensures freedom and equality for these underdogs. In a world of touchable’s employment opportunities remain painfully limited for them. They are discriminated against in terms of wages. In a social system where jobs are determined by one’s caste, employing an untouchable as a carpenter even with salary is nothing less than a revolutionary step. Mammachi justifies it by thinking of her time; Paravans like other untouchables were not allowed to walk on public road, not

12 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 allowed to cover their upper bodies and not allowed to carry umbrellas. They had to put their hands over their mouths when they spoke, to divert their polluted breath away from those whom they addressed. Although Roy presents both Ammu and Velutha as downtrodden, Ammu is someone superior to Velutha. As she belongs to an upper caste family and Velutha’s existence as a lower caste makes a contrast in their relationship. Regarding the relationship between Ammu and Velutha, the critic Christina Bertrand Firebough opines that: When I would like to suggest is that, as a result of the combination of caste and colonialism Ammu can be seen as signifying the role of the “white English woman”, while Velutha can be seen as the ‘dark native’(142). The caste system as scrutinized throughout the novel. Unlike, Ammu, who is a rebel, many of other characters in the novel such as Mammachi, Pappachi, Baby Kochamma and Inspector Thomas operate under the belief that caste and class were vital to Indian culture and must be maintained. Roy maintains adherence to realism when she portrays Velutha’s plausible violent end, and the irresistible disgust toward the inter caste affair felt by the family, community and communist party. Through the novel the novelist strongly criticizes the caste system, untouchability and treatment of the Paravans in a powerful and enchanting language. The titular hero of the novel is a representative of the lower class talented and sincere youths. In a 1998 interview, Roy asserts, “since the dawn of the time, human society has found ways in which to divide it, to make war across these divisions, to make love across these divisions. There will always be those of us who make these divisions and those of us who argue against them” ( Abraham 91). CONCLUSION Arundhati Roy created ripples on the surface of the Indian English fiction with her magnum opus, The God of Small Things. As the novel is a forceful plea for the upliftment of the downtrodden it can be considered as a polysemic work. It treats various aspects of socio-political realities. It is a satire on political domination and social deterioration. The novelist analyzes the dimensions of domination by the powerful as well as the plight of the untouchables in South Indian state of Kerala. Through the novel Roy tries to show how the women and untouchables are treated as impersonal and subjugative objects in the social structure along with epitomizing the worst form of marginalization. She exposes the ugliness of the society for its rigid social attitude. The protagonist of the novel Velutha is watched in fear and uneasiness by all including his father, employer, party- boss, co-workers, and local police, as in spite of being a paravan he dares to be unparavanlike. Though he was sincere in all spheres of his life, as a son, as a friend, as an employee, as a political party member, and as a lover, he was forced to face a catastrophic end. Velutha is not accepted as a human being, but only as a paravan. Although Velutha joined the party for its promises of the salvation for the underdogs and paravans, he was expelled from the communist party. The collective brutality of the society is sharply criticized in the novel. Along with the acute suffering and deep frustration of the paravans, Roy has remarkably portrayed the nature and functioning of communism in Kerala. The corrupted and greedy leader K.N.M Pillai acted as a representative of this group. He is not repentant, as he was not responsible, for what had happened to Velutha and Ammu,

13 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 though he vividly recalls their tragic end. He plays a crucial role in the tragedy and death of both Velutha and Ammu. But he pretends and acts as a sincere communist leader who works for the growth of the poor and the needy. Roy has raised certain raging social and political problems and interrogated the prevalent systems and structure of the hierarchical society and by doing so she has attempetd to create a new history for Indian Writing in English as the Booker Prize winner Salman Rushdie has done. Bibliography Abraham, Taisha. “ An Interview with Arundhati Roy” . ARIEL 29 (1998) : 89-9 Print. Dube, Leela. “Caste and Woman”. Caste: Its Twentieth Century Avatar. Ed. M.N Srinivas. New Delhi: Penguin, 1996. Print. Dwivedi, A. N. Arundhati Roy’s Fictional World. NewDelhi: BR, 2001. Print. Firebough, Christina Bertrand. “The Unsafe Edges: Ammu’s Agency in The God of Small Things”. Indian Booker Prize Winners- A Critical Study of Their Works. Ed. Sunita Sangha. Vol I. New Delhi: Atlantic, 2008.Print. Manohar, Murali. Contemporary Women Novelists in English. New Delhi: Seriels, 2000. Print. Roy, Arundhati. The God of Small Things. New York: Random, 1997. Print. Rudy, K Venkata. Major Indian Novelists. New Delhi; Prestige, 1990. Print.

14 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

SOCIAL IDENTITY VERSUS INDIVIDUAL IDENTITY IN JAISHREE MISRA’S ANCIENT PROMISES

Hima S. Guest Lecturer (English), Kerala Kalamandalam, Cheruthuruthy Thrissur Dist. Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Identity is a central concept for much contemporary literature. When it comes to women’s writing it become more crucial. Twentieth century women writers express the experience of their own identity in what and how they write. Their writings mirrors the plight of the female protagonist her feelings estrangement and her inner conflicts in a patriarchal society. While examining the works of Indian Women authors we can see a shift from passive, obedient woman to defying and rebellious being. In the debut work of Jaishree Misra we can see the emergence of New Woman who is rebellious, recalcitrant and self –assertive. Woman is no longer controlled and regulated by narrow walls of tradition, morality and society. They have become free autonomous beings, who assert and affirm their ‘feminine self.

Literature and female identity cannot be separated. A more suitable phrase for “female identity” would be “woman identity” as the term female, reduces a woman to the biological dimensions of herself, whereas the word woman would include the female, the feminine, the feminist, and all that which has been excluded until now. None has bothered to find if there really exists anything called woman’s identity. In literature the battle between the sexes, the search for woman’s identity is inevitably linked to the conflict between self and the other. In fact there has been a large production of woman stereotypes. The ideal woman is the one who incarnates most exactly the man’s other” a woman is not born, she becomes” says Simone De Beauvoir. According to these feminists, literature is the product of culture and our existing culture is predominantly patriarchal. There is a need to locate women identity from a women’s perspective who is the other as subject. According to French feminists this can happen if more and more enlightened and awared women take up to the writing of literature. Such writings which would puncture the whole patriarchal notions and ideology behind woman identity represented until now. Twentieth-century women writers express the experience of their own identity in what and how they write. In the modern age, with rapid progress in the field of education, women are becoming

15 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 alienated from femininity. More and more women had education, which naturally made them discontent with their lot especially, their role as housewives. Women in the present socio-cultural set-up feel deeply frustrated by their restricted and regimented lives. The lack of privacy, the physical burden and drabness of a monotonous family life have impeded the free growth of their feminine self the problem for women today is not sexual but a problem of identity. She would fulfil and assert herself as a woman and not simply as a career woman. Traditionally, the work of Indian Women Writers has been undervalued due to patriarchal assumptions about the superior worth of male experience. The majority of novels written by Indian women writers depict the psychological sufferings of the frustrated homemakers. This subject matter is often considered superficial compared to the depiction of the replaced and oppressed lives of women. Indian writing in English is now gaining ground rapidly. . Indian women writers have started questioning the prominent old patriarchal domination. They are no longer puppets in the hands of man. They have shown their worth in the field of literature both qualitatively and quantitatively and are showing it even today. The works of Kamla Markandaya, Nayantara Sahgal, Anita Desai, Geetha Hariharan, Shashi Deshpande, Kiran Desai and Manju Kapur and many more have left an indelible imprint on the readers of Indian fiction in English. A major development in modern Indian fiction is the growth of a feminist or women centred approach, that seeks to project and interpret experience, from the point of a feminine consciousness and sensibility. Many Indian women novelists have explored female subjectivity in order to establish an identity. The image of women in fiction has undergone a change during the last four decades. Women writers have moved away from traditional portrayals of enduring self- sacrificing women, towards conflicts, female characters searching for identity; no longer characterized and defined simply in terms of their victim status. A major preoccupation in recent Indian women’s writing has been a delineation of inner life and subtle interpersonal relationships. Women find literature the most expressive form of art, which is true to women’s experience. Women’s writing falls as a separate category, which articulates the gender specific concerns of women – feminist viewpoint. Feminism if taken in a wider perspective includes whatever is vital about women in life and literature .So the ultimate aim of women’s literature is to create a new awareness in men and women. She has found a new medium for self-expression, to raise a voice of protest against the injustice and inequalities in the treatment of women, the disadvantages women have to bear on account of their gender. It seeks to influence public opinion in order to change women’s situation. Women’s literature is intimate, confessional, and autobiographical. The identity of women is formed out of pain and suffering on account of male cruelty and indifference. The collective identity is constructed on their collective oppression, which is a shared experience Women’s emancipation in India is a sublime concept. In a nation where extremely fragmented and traumatised women’s pains remain untold a change is needed. In a world where thousands of women live as victims Jaishree Misra’s women offer a new path. Ancient Promise is about a woman’s painful journey of self-discovery. It is the transformation of the young and vulnerable Janu into a more determined stronger and empowered woman who is capable of taking decisions about her own life. “My marriage ended today”. With this stark statement Misra begins her novel. “. Ancient Promise is about a woman’s painful journey of self-discovery. It is about

16 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Janaki (Janu), a Keralite brought up in Delhi being confused, unsure and unwilling to hurt her parents Janu agreed to the proposal and married Suresh, who accepted her for these reasons: she had to be pretty, she had to be young so that she can adjust, she must be able to speak English so that he can take her to Bombay to extended his business. Suresh Maraar, heir to the Maraar fortunes is seen as a prize catch for an ordinary middle class family like Janu’s. The pressure from her extended family is subtle when the mighty Maraar clan approves of her so easily: “What are they going to think? They could even retract their offer by tomorrow!”. “Be grateful for what you’re getting”. “They don’t even want a dowry…It’s nothing less than arrogance to say no to people like that’ (61). Janu’s feeble protests are brushed aside. She is forced to sacrifice her love for Arjun because she says she is ‘tired of fighting off my family”. Ridden with guilt for the pain she has caused her parents by crossing the boundary they had set, and daring to fall in love, she looked upon her marriage to Suresh as a kind of compensation-”to ensure that I began to pay off some of the debt that has accrued against my name somewhere’(68). Suresh has nothing in common with her but agrees to the ‘alliance’ because she fits into his specifications of being pretty, young enough to ‘adjust’, and able to speak English so that he could take her to Bombay in the hoped-for expansion of his motel business. “Nothing else was too important”(96). Later she realises that “it was getting clear that it was the Maraars I had married not Suresh.”(87). Marriage was not according to her expectations loneliness, emptiness and dissatisfaction was the result. To gain some respect and consideration from in laws and from her husband and hoping motherhood would change her pathetic state she gave birth to a child. All her efforts were thwarted because the child was mentally handicapped. But her intense attachment with the baby turned out to be her best protector and a means for emancipation. After the birth of her daughter with special needs she realized that she can no longer live trapped in a cold marriage with a spineless husband and a dominating mother in law. She continues her education. Janu plans to leave India, to US to continue her studies and find special needs school for her daughter, Riya. Meanwhile she met her old love Arjun during her visit to Delhi. She decides to get a divorce. She, Arjun and Riya leaves to London and she joins a university in London to continue her studies in special education. She decides to end her marriage, but Suresh disagrees to it. Later she have to leave to England without Riya. Arjun and Janu relive their love life in London . She realizes that her life will be incomplete without Riya she returns to India, Suresh reconciles to divorce and hands over Riya to her. The novel ends with a hope of beginning of a new life. It is a Cinderella kind of transformation of the young and vulnerable Janu into a more determined stronger and empowered woman who is capable of taking decisions about her own life. Through Janu, Misra asserts the right of every person to his or her happiness and the right to create the means to achieve it. Janu not only creates her own happiness but also through her education opens up for her daughter as well as we can see that the author also criticises the marriage system. Janu is told that their marriage would ensure that she would have more people to love and be loved by. But ironically the promise of love and be loved is not kept and she is forced to lead a lonely and loveless life. The inevitable fate is always used as a weapon of oppression. By agreeing themselves to their condition and by enduring the treatment meted out to them, they not only perpetuate patriarchy but also inflict it on women. Janu’s character is carefully crafted with deep insight into her psyche, she is vulnerable and strong. 17 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

When she gives birth to a daughter who turns out to be mentally challenged, life in the Maraar household turns from bad to worse to unbearable. The novel endeavours the depths of isolation and desperation that Janu is forced to face with the birth of a mentally retarded daughter. Her intense attachment to the baby forms her best protection and her sole means of salvation. Coldness of her husband’s family and his indifference to her and their daughter’s needs, Janu starts to rebel against the snobbish conventions of the family. “I grabbed at the realization with a weary but dizzy, almost overwhelming sense of liberation. I was free. I neither had to struggle for their approval anymore nor put Riya through the same hopeless loop”. Bound by age long social customs formulated by men, it takes a courageous woman to stand up and fight for her rights and happiness. And that is what Janu finally does. In the words of Misra ,”It was quite important for me to show that she (Janu) was by now a woman in charge of her own destiny.” Jaishree Misra’s Ancient Promise, full of keen psychological observations, it is a sensitive account of a woman’s effort to transform her life and live life on her own terms by breaking out of things, held her down from seeking her own destiny and happiness in life. Family is vital regardless of the restrictions it imposes on individual freedom and the subordination of women, by upholding the values of patriarchy. The novel reveals an intense awareness of woman’s need for freedom and independence. CONCLUSION Family is considered to have restricted the expression of the individual freedom through the imposition of a code of conduct and ethics. This familial interference in the life of an individual is resisted strongly by younger people in the community and this resentment has considerably impacted the efficacy of the institution of family. An arranged marriage was the traditionally accepted mode of matrimonial arrangement in the Hindu society. With the impact of westernization and modern education, young men and women began to assert their right to choose their life partner. Some of the Indian English women novelists have depicted a society in which women are not only ill-treated but are also abused and exploited. They have tried their best to free the female mentality from the age-long control of male domination. There are a number of Indian English novels that deal with woman’s problems. But the treatment is often peripheral and the novels end up glorifying the stereotypical virtues of the Indian woman, like patience, devotion and abject acceptance of whatever is meted out to her. Tradition is so deeply rooted in Indian women that none would dare to uproot it and make a change. By resigning themselves to their condition and enduring the treatment meted out to them the women inflict it on generation after generation. Bound by age long social custom formulated by society it takes a courageous woman to stand up and fight for her rights and happiness and that is what Janu finally does. She is in charge of her own destiny. Jaishree Misra in Ancient Promises gives an account of a woman’s effort to transform her own life and live on her own terms by breaking out the social and familial codes that held her down from seeking her own destiny and happiness in life. Misra’s women work hard for their freedom and earn it. This shows their inner strength of character and courage. The freedom they win has the power to guarantee what they wish their life to be. So this novel can be considered as a struggle and the final triumph of individual will. Women must throw off the shackles of tradition and educate themselves to carve out a distinct identity for themselves.

18 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Reference Lodge, David. Modern Criticism and Theory. Longman,London,1983.Print. Misra,Jaishree. Ancient Promises.Penguin Books, New Delhi, 2000. Print. Naik. M.K. History of Indian English Literature.Sahitya. Akademi. New Delhi.1982.Print. Singh,Sushila. Feminism: Theory,Criticism,Analysis. Pencraft.New Delhi.1997.Print. Swami.S,P, Feminine Voice in Indian English Fiction. Asia Book Club. New Delhi.2005.Print.

19 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

CHOTTI MUNDA AND HIS ARROW: RESISTANCE AND ETHNICITY

K.V. Rosha Assistant Professor, Department t of Science and Humanities Ahalia School of Engineering and Technology, Palakkad, Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Tribal culture is much different from the culture of the modern man. They celebrate each and every occasion, be it the festival or return of their own man from jail. With their hard work they can even cultivate crop form the barren land. They resist the interference of the external force into their life, to their maximum. This paper tries to highlight the culture and resistance of tribal people in special reference with Mahasweta Devi’s novel, Chotti Munda and his Arrow. Key words: Tribal literature, Indigenous culture, Resistance.

British colonizers and missionaries used the term ‘tribal’ to comprehend and narrate the lifestyle of the indigenous people. Indigenous people are the natives of a particular country. But, unfortunately those who should get the primary position in a country have taken the secondary one. External forces consider the indigenous people as uncultured. In many cases the indigenous people are the lot who do not get proper education and lead their lives as illiterate because of the interference of the external forces. Mahasweta Devi in her novel Chotti Munda and his Arrow highlights the trouble that the indigenous people have to face in their day to day life. She says in one of her interviews with Gayathri Chakravorty Spivak: “The tribals are still being evicted from their land” (ix). As these people did not get a chance for education, they do not have a written script. The novelist maintains “Munda language has no scripts. So they turn significant events into story and hold them as saying, as song. That’s their history as well.” (18) The novel is was published in 1980 and is also remarkable for the manner in which it touches on vital issues that have, in subsequent decades, grown into matters of urgent social concern. It raises questions about the place of the tribal on the map of national identity, land rights and human rights and the justification of violent resistance as the last resort of desperate people, amongst others. The protagonist of the novel is Chotti Munda. His forefather “Purti Munda brought his wife and kids from Chaibasha to Palamau.”(1) He made a home for himself and his family by 20 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 clearing the forest. A story is connected with Purti Munda that wherever he went coal and mica will come out of the ground. In Palamau it was weapons of stone that emerged from under the soil of his fields. After hearing the news, many kinds of people from the outside world came and evicted Purti from his home. The helplessness of an indigene man is very much visible in this part of the novel. As he does not have much knowledge and power, he was thrown out of his own home. Even though his spirit gets shattered; he does not allow the external forces to wither away his people. Slowly he withdraws himself from the place, so that his community can live there peacefully. Indigenous people are very truthful and prestigious. This is evident when Chotti gets some cash from police as fine amount; he goes to the Pahan along with villagers and decides to return the money as “no one in Munda tribe has ever ta’en sick cash!”(30). Tribals are courageous enough to face the consequence of whatever they have done. It’s a kind of resistance as they don’t allow anyone to question or blame them. If they had killed a person, they will come forward and accept it. Chotti believes the same and thinks of Dukhia and whispers to himself “Even with the knowledge that the outcome is death, in order to remain right with oneself, the humans created by Haramdeo, having reached the twentieth century, must sometimes do certain things.”(55) Chotti’s wife says: “… Do they fear je-hell, fear noose? If they cut down someone in rage they go to the Police Station with the body on their shoulder and say, I killed for rage. And then they go to je-hell – and swing.”(42) As these people have no education the landowners take their thumbprint on the white paper in exchange for food during the drought or natural calamities. This thumb impression makes them bonded labour. Even for many generations they have to do labour work for the landowners. Nobody can inquire the landlord about this as they do not have knowledge regarding this. The younger generation from the birth itself knows that they are bound in bonded labour. Tribals’ mingling with other people shows their free nature to accept everything good into their life. They find out the reason for joy or happiness even in the midst of a lot of pain and poverty. Mahasweta Devi upholds: “ In a fully Mundari village, amidst a lot of pain and poverty, some variety enters in the form of half-Hindu festivals such as Karam, Sohrai, or Holi – the Colourfeast…”(48) They are even willing to share their own festival with the other people. “ In the old days the hunt festival was only for the adivasis. Now other people also participate.”(49) Among the tribals, women play an important role in every sphere of life. “Unlike in non-tribals societies, women are not treated as drudges or beasts of burden: they are found to be exercising a relatively free and firm hand in all aspects related to their social life. But it is still important to emphasize that the tribal woman is in herself exactly as any other woman with the same passions, loves and fears, the same devotion to the home, to husband and children, the same faults and the same virtues.” (221, TWI) In fact during the marriage, girls are treated as an economic asset. To compensate the loss of her the bride-price is arranged between the parties.

21 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Tribal girl is conditioned from her early childhood to be hardworking and responsive to their suitors. In the modern world when feminists fight for equal prestige for men and women, in tribal economy the equality was always present. They have the voice to say opinion in their day to day life. In the tribal society grazing of goats, feeding of animals and keeping poultry are predominantly feminine jobs. In the novel Chotti’s wife tends to cows and goats. She is a tough and hardworking woman. Whatever money she gets after selling poultry she saves it in a tin box and buries by the clay oven it fortifies her intelligence. She believes “If money is buried close to the oven it will never be stolen” (49) Tribal women are very safe within their tribe. No one hurts them. In the novel when a youth league leader tries to catch a woman named Basmati, Chotti comes forward to save her. This shows their resisting and audacious nature. Without any fear of anyone they come forward to save their pride and honour, by saving women of their tribe. Many a times outsiders are so afraid of the tribals. For instance in the novel, the manager of that village gets afraid even of a hunt festival song sung by the Pahan. “Pahan! The manager’s voice grows weak. Why is he afraid of a hunt festival song in the voice of an emaciated old man in a deserted village?”(74) The tribals are so uneducated that they can’t even calculate their age. When Pahan asks the age of Chotti, he says “From me t’ Gormen’s year begins.”(85) Slowly tribal people had a wakening. They started realizing that the people from the outside world cheat them because they do not have education. There is always a zeal for learning among them. “Budha says, They cheat cos we don’ know book-learnin’. T’ Mission teaches book-learnin’ too.”(85) Even if the tribals want to study or go to school, outsiders just “chase ’em off” (118). They are not allowed to enter and study in school, they say “Oh let… t’ caste-Hindu kids go to school.”(119) Some tribals even got educated by the interaction with the outside people. The new Pahan of Chotti village learned to read and write Hindi by his close interaction with the Christian Munda village. In the novel it is discussed that “The special advantage of the new Pahan is that, as a result of living close to a Christian Munda village, he too has learned to read and write Hindi. Working for certain grain wholesalers he has also learnt to reckon.”(96) If there is someone among them who knows to read and write, they are so proud of that individual. This gets evident from the conversation between Tirathnath and Chotti. Tirathnath says “So ye’ve learnt to write as well?” the reply is “Don’ we have our Pahan?”(98) In India, tribals were never treated as Indians. Mahasweta Devi comments “Dikus never thought of the adivasis as Indian. They did not draw them into the liberation struggle.”(96) Tribals are never allowed to live in their own village. They have to always move from one place to another. Because of this they believe that there is no end to their sorrows. Chotti comments: “Diku import. Diku brings, Gormen supports. We know Diku – Gormen’s father’n son. We ne’er saw Mundas live in Munda-property village and Oraons in Oraon-owned village, and our chillum won’ either.”(86) Unlike the modern man, indigenous people even after marriage live together in a same house. Works are divided among them equally. Their hardworking nature helps them get water even in the drought. During the drought, they have to depend on Tirathnath and they know that surely he will take a price from them for getting water from the well. All the Mundas get together

22 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 and dug the breast of the river. After digging they see that there is enough water for them. To save that water they “put baby sal trees as props so sand couldn’t fill up t’ holes” (99) Chotti represents the whole tribal community. Their close association with nature teaches them a lot. Chotti says to other Mundas “There’s water below t’ river… Now it’s t’ second month – Jeth… There’ll be rain in Asharh… When that’s not t’be, ye get dusty soil at t’grass-roots.”(100) Tribals are of very helping nature. They not only think of themselves but also do care of others. Even though Chotti was not a bonded labour, he thinks about the laws that government has passed. He says “…someone’s home’s on fire, why d’ye put it out? Yer home might burn too.”(240) Tribal people can survive in any situation. It gets apparently cleared when Mission people says “the adivasi seldom dies of hunger because they are in the habit of staying alive on food with very little nutritional value.”(127)They have so much faith in themselves that even if they are provided with barren land, they make it fertile. They have some strong beliefs in their culture like “A bitta molasses, a bit o’ salt… sweet’s to keep …deal sweet…salt to keep off betrayal.”(216) Outsiders very well know that only by suppression they can make the tribals flee from their own land. all the time the outside world brings disturbances to the tribal world. Tribals are always afraid that if the outside people come to their life surely they will bring some or other disturbance with them. Upper caste people always believe that aboriginals are inferior to them in status. There is a conversation between two upper caste people, where one says “Our birthright is the caste- system” (193) Tribal people do not have any caste system. They treat everyone as equals. Chotti upholds “There’s one diff’rence. Ye have caste stuff… We have no caste diff’rence.” (101) Many people do not even think of tribals and harijans as human beings. Even they steal the tribal infants for human sacrifices. Tribals are cheated in their day to day life itself. False promises are made to them by others. They have to undergo so much discrimination from the other people. Chotti says in fiery tone “caste-Hindus are so narrow minded…that they don’t let adivasis…take water even from government wells.”(159) From their experience they have learnt that in time of their need, no one will be there to help them. Chotti comments “we must remember, we’re alone for ourselves. And this too, that we watch out f’r our own trouble.”(99) They do not have much faith in the government and the laws passed by them. CONCLUSION One has to realize that tribals are also human beings with some virtues and flaws. They have their own rich culture which makes them kind hearted to accept every other one. They don’t have any negligence in including anyone to their culture. By including the person, they never try to change him/her according to their own beliefs; instead they try to make the person feel at home. They are daring and faithful. Daring in the sense, they never fear to say anything that is true to anyone and faithful enough to their tribe that they never cheat and backstab anyone. Mahasweta Devi in her interview with Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak says: “The tribals and the mainstream have always been parallel….The mainstream simply doesn’t understand the parallel… They can’t keep their land; there is no education for them, no health facilities…they are denied everything….” (19.TPD). 23 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

WORK CITED Devi, Mahasweta. Chotti Munda & His Arrow. Trans.Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak.United Kingdom: Blackwell ,2003. Satyanarayana ,E. The Plays of Mahasweta Devi. New Delhi: Prestige, 2000. Sharma, S.P and A.C. Mittal.’ed. Tribal Women in India: Women in tribal economy. 2 vol. New Delhi: Radha Publications, 1992.

24 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

HOMOGENEOUS MANIFESTATION OF LIFE AND THEATRE- A STUDY OF BADAL SARKAR’S SELECTED PLAYS

Divya M. Nair Guest Lecturer, Department of English, College of Applied Science Pazhayannur, Thrissur District, Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Badal Sarkar is a spellbound first generation theatre personality of Bengali Drama of post-colonial India. He reveals the middle class apathy and their repugnance to the adversities of the impoverished strata of the society. Sarkar’s plays ardently elicit the melancholic nature of exploitation endured by Indian poor class during and after the colonial period. His writings reflect his inspiration from the vicissitudes of the society. Depiction of injustices and oppression of the suffering community in his plays never marginalized people on the basis of culture, politics and geography. He amalgamates illiterate sector of rural and urban culture. Sarkar’s dexterity in the reconstruction of language of Indian political theatre ascertains his role of an inventor of a new form of theatre. With the development of this effectual form of theatre called the “third theatre”, he engraved his signature in Bengali drama as well as Indian drama. The theatre group “Satabdi” highlights his concept of theatre. The adaptable arrangement of the “third theatre” helped him to move freely and propagate his concepts among the poor villagers as well as the urbanites. The “third theatre” conveys the message of the play through human body. His plays focus on the significance of direct communication. He reduces the use of sets, lights, costumes and background music. Badal Sarkar’s keen desire for the utmost participation of common people forced him to develop this new form of theatre. He sincerely wishes to write for the common people. His brashness in the invention of this theatre technique is a powerful revolt for the conservation of his culture which was deteriorated by the colonizers to a certain extent. His plays Procession and Bhoma communicate the pathetic predicament of the exploited strata of society. This paper is an attempt to analyze his plays Procession and Bhoma on the basis of “third theatre”. Procession delineates the adverse and miserable repercussions of colonial dominion on Indian community. Bhoma recounts the nature of both industrial and agricultural exploitation. This paper is an attempt to analyze these plays on the basis of “third theatre” Key Words-Third theatre, culture, colonialism, society,common man

INTRODUCTION Theatre has always been one of the most effective tools of social communication. It can be considered as one of the strongest forms of art which effectively penetrates into the depth of 25 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 mind. Drama is a form of art dependent on stage conditions. The Indian drama gathered its mesmerizing progress with this indissoluble relationship between drama and theatre. By early twentieth century the theatre movement in the Indian languages attained stimulating impetus. Indian playwright lacks opportunities to present his plays as a living theatre in his own place which in turn causes harm to this art .Genuine dramatic talent perverts drama absolutely. The playwright is more concerned with making it possible for his characters to germinate that riveting dramatic experience through utterance. Without following the electrifying tradition of Indian theatre, most often Indian playwrights willingly became the imitators of the west. A play enjoys its success in providing a living dramatic experience while it is connected with real theatre and live audience. Direct communication being the significant aspect of theatre induces empathy in audience. Actor’s expression of feelings results the purgation of emotions of the spectator and hence purification of sensibilities. Immediate comprehension of the matter and instantaneous response for it differentiates theatre from other forms of art. Theatre more rapidly demonstrates the resistance and revolt against certain social issues than any other form of art. Indian theatre too reflects social issues like communal violence and gender identities. This paper is an attempt to analyze Badal Sarkar’s plays Procession and Bhoma on the basis of his third theatre technique. Recreation of Theatrical Discourse through Badal Sarkar Practice and theory of theatre of post independent India is deeply and pervasively influenced by Badal Sarkar. No other theatre personality could create an influencing space in Indian theatre earlier as a writer of proscenium plays and later as the pioneer of non proscenium plays. Intense passion for theatre provoked him to be a mentor of lot of theatre activists. Through them his rejuvenating ideas got transmitted from one space to another making his name and works conspicuous and testimonial in Indian theatre. “It is impossible to discuss the history of modern Indian theatre and not encounter the name of Badal Sarkar.”(Mitra, 59) Badal Sarkar, a prolific playwright in Bengali Drama was an influential figure in post independence Indian Theatre. With his anti-establishment plays in the 70’s, he took theatre out of the proscenium into the open space. He was a playwright of dexterity and innovative brilliance. He got into this vast arena of theatre with light hearted comedies which later pave way to depiction of urban middle class anxieties in his classic plays. Eventually, in his post-proscenium plays he focused more on anti-establishment. Consequently, transforming the scenario of contemporary theatre, Sarkar reconstructed the language of modern Indian Drama. Theatre being his passion, he liked directing plays more than writing. However he enjoyed roles of playwright, director and actor. He says, “I wrote plays to perform them. I am a theatre person that’s all.” Designer of an Invigorating Strategy Sarkar never turned his back to the common folk. His intense desire to explore the life of common man forced him to initiate a novel form of theatre called the “Third Theatre”. Intrinsically, third theatre speaks and indicates the rural life. He considered this new form a persuasive channel for societal transformation and progress. Later, he replaced the term “Third theatre” with “free theatre”. Free theatre required no ticket to watch it and no any sort of constrains and obligations. 26 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Without any fear, it familiarizes with determinedly anguished and subjugated mindset of the society. With the help of his theatre group “Satabdi” he got opportunities to perform his plays anywhere. Function of Third Theatre Badal Sarkar’s convincing insight of cultural, political, psychological and spiritual obliteration of Indian society provoked him to concentrate more on theatre than writing plays. He strongly believed theatre could bring out a change in society. He was very much aware of the fact of dichotomy in the cultural and mental realm which can be eradicated only with a basic transformation in the socio-political-economic situation. He was conscious of the incapacity of theatre to change the society. Bearing this in mind, Sarkar still firmly believes that theatre reality can provide many components that evoke the preferable adaptation. Therefore regarding Sarkar, theatre of transformation makes the idea of third theatre. Features of Third Theatre (1).Combination of rural and urban theatre Presence of live performer and technique of direct communication of folk theatre is amalgamated with the strategies of urban theatre. (2).Anti-proscenium theatre Actors and actresses communicate only through facial expressions without the help of costume and settings. Keeps no distance from the spectator and hence offers openness. (3).Strategy of acting Sensibility of the play is the harmony of idiosyncratic sentiments of the performers. Actors express their true selves in the presentation. Acting is considered more important than set-ups and costumes. (4).Portability and Flexibility Performance of the third theatre can be enacted anywhere freely. Insignificance of settings allows the presentation anywhere. Open stage show reduces the cost of theatre. (5).Power of participation of audience Third theatre thrillingly accepts and enhances the social and cultural consciousness of viewers. A viewer is never marginalized from the participation. Stimulating contributions of both actors and watchers form the spectacular technique of third theatre. (6).Unification of East and West Sarkar’s perception of third theatre is molded both from Indian folk theatre and western experimental theatre. Sticking features of direct communication and live performance of folk theatre are harmonized with the technique of open performance and emphasizes actor’s body and emotion of West theatre. Recalling Reality in Bhoma Bhoma, his other testimonial play was produced in 1976. Sarkar scrutinizes the vulnerable condition of the subaltern people through the character Bhoma. The play reveals the anguished life of the misused subaltern class. During colonialism the nature of commercialization was transformed

27 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 and a lot of money –lenders was introduced in India .How the down-trodden urban class was utilized by the British is also interpreted in the play. A group of society which does not have access to power is referred as ‘subaltern’; Sarkar communicated the agonized living of this impoverished section and powerfully claimed for their rights. Since the term subaltern means one who belongs to inferior and subordinate groups. He elevated himself as a champion of this distressed and oppressed class. The play also authentically discusses the realistic evils of materialism and the unfavorable and harmful spiritual values. Sufferings of common man due to his self-centered lifestyle achieved prominence in the play. While explaining and pinpointing the misused and dejected life of poor proletariat group, Sarkar portrays a fact of India. He claimed that the exploitation continues from the British India to the post-independent India. Sarkar says, “Having been a colonial country for a long, the cities of India have acquired a colonial character in their development –sometimes even in their birth, like in the case of Calcutta, Bombay, Madras, New Delhi. Such cities did not emerge as the natural products of the indigenous economic development of the country, but were created primarily to serve the colonial interests of a foreign power.”(On Theatre 1) Hence every government considers development of cities significant and blindly provides a large sum of money for it. Unfortunately, government suffers scarcity of the amount for the improvement of the needy and suffering agrarians. These relevant contemporary issues come across the thematic considerations of the playwright. According to Sarkar, Indian people got only political freedom from the colonizer. Psychologically, mental framework and demeanor of Indian community still depends upon the British culture and custom. Long period of colonization has a considerable impact on Indian civilization. They readily diverted from their great culture. Colonial rule persuaded them a lot and prompted them to simply discard their hundreds of years old culture and tradition .Without any regret, Indian people vanquished themselves and assumed so-called sophisticated culture of British. This foreign civilization influenced them to that extent that even the subaltern group communicates through the Western intellectuals. They willingly accept their colonial servitude and transformed themselves into inactive human beings. Therefore, they are not able to articulate their feelings and acquire their rights. Still, they seem to enjoy their subordinate position. Thus the play Bhoma can be considered as a keen and strong retort against the enslavement of Indian community. As Dr. Samuel Johnson said a form of art should not only provide an atmosphere of enjoyment but also allow a space to ponder over and attain a message. Hence a perfect work both entertains and instructs the reader or the audience. Regarding Bhoma, poetic justice is fulfilled when it amuses and successfully delivers a message using the third theatre technique. Actors in Bhoma together contribute their personal experiences and feelings to construct a combined myriad impression. These amalgamated feelings render a totality of emotions in the play. In this way, Bhoma can never be considered as an exclusive creation of Badal Sarkar, but that of a combined effort. Terror and atrocity of nuclear weapons tempted him to write Bhoma. He depicted the demolishing particulars of nuclear weapons. Sarkar never considered the nuclear power pure, affordable and harmless.

28 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Manipulation of Third Theatre in Procession The play Procession, first staged in 1974 by Badal Sarkar’s playgroup ‘Satabdi’, delineates the adverse repercussions of colonial rule on Indian community. The play kindles a thought on the disappearance of the young men in the urban landscape. The cold-heartedness of the middle class and their rejection of other’s sufferings can also be traced in the play. Sarkar revealed callousness of urban community in the depiction of life of Calcutta-a city of processions. Processions for different causes like procession for food and clothes, procession for salvation, procession for protest and festive procession are day to day incidents in Calcutta. Variety of themes are incorporated but not in a chronological order. The divide and rule strategy of colonialists which accordingly caused the partition of the country attained a conspicuous part in his reference of themes. Gradually, the colonialists’ cultural tradition got established in India. Indian society vigorously started to absorb the foreign culture. Those who praised the colonialists’ culture benefited economically, politically and educationally. The people who opposed and rebuffed the foreign culture and policies were ill-treated and forced to lead a pathetic life in Indian society. Colonial rule made its impact by increasing materialism, loss of spirituality, deterioration of familial values, poverty and the misery of poor peasants’ strikes for different causes, which were simultaneously described in the play. Procession was not a play written to be performed on the proscenium stage. His third theatre technique reflects his vision of post-colonialism. He wished for the open stage performance of Procession. To him roads become the acting area. His actors and actresses used no extra costumes except a tag that identifies the characters. No heavy costumes and decoration or settings were used in this play. CONCLUSION Obviously, Sarkar’s plays effectively and intentionally present a vivid picture of culturally disturbed Indian society. Mentally disharmonized Indian people recognizing the adverse effects of colonization and their cultural dependency on the colonizer are still trying to uproot this serfdom. Sarkar has registered his name in the world of theatre with western influenced proscenium stage, yet he could find content in it. Unsatisfied mind of dramatist caused the invention of a new and inspiring technique i n theatre. His innovation was a revolt in theatre. It was the common man for whom he devoted his writing. So he wanted the maximum participation of common folk. His writings focused on the preservation of Indian culture and tradition which was adversely affected by the colonizer. Sarkar’s plays are the documents of the residual effects of colonization. He effectively drew the categorized issues of pre-independent and post- independent Indian society- the unfair treatment and subjugation of the marginalized section , the spiritual deterioration , vibrant and intellectual urbanites, people’s inability to construct and establish ‘Indianness’ in economic and political system. Regarding him the ingrained remaining of British civilization and custom can be traced in political, economical, cultural and even psychological strata of the country. His plays prove the power of resistance and revolt and express his wrath with the government. He severely criticized the people who do not want to renounce the colonized culture and still follows the colonial slavery. In fact, these people voluntarily mould themselves as non –natives in their own native country and hence creates and suffers from rootlessness. “The soil that he has created will ultimately 29 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 be germinated by people as idealistic as him.” (Mahesh Elkanchivar) Work Cited Chadha, Tara. “Badal Sarkar: From Proscenium to Free Theatre”. New Directions in Indian Drama. Eds. Sudhakar Pandey and Freya Barua. New Delhi: Prestige Books, 1994. 52-57. Crow, Brian and Chris Banfield. An Introduction to Post-colonial Theatre. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996. Print. Dutta, Ella. Introduction. Three Plays: Procession/ Bhoma/ Stale News. By Badal Sircar. Kolkata: Seagull Books, 1983-v-xi. Print. Mitra, Shayoni. “Badal Sircar: Scripting a Movement” TDR/ The Drama Review. Vol. 48. Issue 3, USA: MIT Press. Sept. 2004. Web 20 Sept. 2011. www.deepdyve.com Sircar, Badal. On Theatre. Kolkata: Seagull Books, 2009. Print. ——Preface. Three Plays: Procession/Bhoma/Stale News. Kolkata: Seagull Books, 1983. Print.

30 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

ACTS OF RESISTANCE: GIRISH KARNAD’S NAGAMANDALA AS A PART OF POSTCOLONIAL THEATRE

Sarada P.S. H.S.S.T. in English, N.S.S.H.S.S. Mullurkara, Thrissur Dist. (Research Scholar in English, Bharathiar University Coimbatore, Tamil Nadu) e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Critics like Bill Ashcroft, Gareth Griffiths, and Helen Tiffin asserted that the term “postcolonial” covers “all the culture affected by the imperial process from the moment of colonisation to the present day”. The theatre’s aim is to generate cultural resistance through the field of popular culture and art, as a catalyst for social change in the Postcolonial territories. Theatre creates a context that can support other forms of resistance. The idea of cultural resistance is to work alongside with other forms of resistance. Theatre in Postcolonial countries is a resistance movement against injustice and they believe in the power of acting, not guns and bombs. The theatre can recover the silenced but resistant subaltern voice from a variety of discourses and events. Postcolonial dialectics, subalternization of Indian English Drama and nativism are the most important characteristics of Karnad’s plays. He gives some sort of cultural investment of colonial and postcolonial texts in framing, organizing, and presenting alternative stories. He adopted modern theatre techniques to make the performance effective, and fused it with indigenous cultural sensibility. In Nagamandala, Karnad achieves an interface between myth and history. The play is attuned to its contradictions and Karnad used the postmodern theatrical device of multiple ending in the same. Karnad was able to appeal the postmodern sensibility. Key Words: Postcolonial Indian Theatre, Cultural Resistance, Theatre Techniques

INTRODUCTION Theatre is the mirror of cultural heritage. We find reflection of culture on each theatrical work like drama. Postcolonialism represents all the characteristics of the society and culture from the time of the colonialization to the present. The study of the controlling power in the colonized societies had begun much earlier with the texts such as Said’s Orientalism (1978), and led to the development of what came to be called “Colonialist Discourse Theory”. Theatre in Postcolonial countries is a resistance movement against injustice and they believe that there is a power for acting. Silence is the curse for repressed and marginalized and the theatre can recover the silenced but resistant subaltern voice from a variety of discourses and events. Through the various ways and techniques, the theatre acts as a significant site for resistance.

31 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Different strategies used by the colonized , the ways in which performance has been instrumental in resisting the continuing effects of imperialism and the specific enactments of ritual and the theatrical citations of the post-colonial body referring to the integration of cultural signs and practices from the colonizing and the colonized cultures can be identified clearly. Girish Karnad uses a culturally specific approach in one of his amusing play Nagamandala. Nagamandala as a play of Resistance Imperialism had blended a widely diverse population of the subcontinent into one single nation. One of the leading playwrights who deals with these issues is Girish Karnad .Postcolonial dialectics, subalternization of Indian English Drama and nativism are the most important characteristics of Karnad’s plays. He gives some sort of cultural investment of colonial and postcolonial texts in framing, organizing, and presenting alternative stories. The discussion here is also based on the skill with which Karnad intertwines two stories thereby creating a piece of theatre that uses storytelling form to explore the importance of stories in all our lives. Karnad often felt that Folk art has a great impact on the modern theatre treatment. He uses a magical folktale to reveal the complexity of human life. In particular, he uses the folktale in the Indian context to reveal the social and individual relations. Nagamandala is a mythological play based on a folk tale and the snake myth. In Naga Mandala we find the effect of Naga cult of Kerala. Naga cult of Kerala is a kind of worship. It is variously practiced in many parts of Kerala. It retains the impact of Hindu mythology. Naga-mandala is a reworking into the dramatic medium of the ‘folk-mythologies’ whose stories Ramanujan retells. Nagamandala “is based on two oral tales from Karnataka which I first heard several years ago from Professor A K Ramanujan.” (Preface, Karnad 20) The sub-title ‘play with a cobra’ given by Karnad himself is indicative of its theme and the significance of the role of Cobra in it. In Nagamandala, Karnad weaves two Kannada folk tales together. Karnad’s cultural practice is continued in the play. Karnad is among those Indian playwrights who have rejected the imitation of the west. They have ventured something new and indigenous. Girish Karnad himself admits that he used myths as he cannot invent plots and he used history as he cannot invent stories. In Nagamandala, Appanna, an allegory of male chauvinism, marries the innocent village girl Rani and takes her to his home. She is doomed to stay alone as Appanna comes home for lunch and leaves immediately after locking his wife in the house. The rest of the time he is in the company of his concubine as revealed by Kurudamma, a blind woman and a relative of Appanna. Grieved over the plight of the newly married girl, Kurudamma suggests a technique to Rani to attract her husband. She gives her roots of a secret plant, the paste of which is to be added to the food. Rani does as she is advised, but is aghast when she finds that the curry explodes and turns red. Frightened, she pours the potion into an ant-hill. All of a sudden a king cobra (Naga) peeps out with a hissing sound. The potion seems to have worked on the serpent, which then visits Rani every night disguised as Appanna. Rani is confused by the amorous nature of her husband in the night as against his rudeness during the day. The relation between Rani and Naga grows so intense that it leads to their physical union. Before long she realises that she is pregnant. Appanna accuses her of infidelity and the village 32 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 panchayat wants her to prove her innocence by holding a hot iron rod or by putting her hand in the burrow of the cobra. To the surprise of all, she opts for the second option and escapes unscathed from the ordeal. She is defied. Even Appanna turns her devotee. The villagers carry them in palanquins. A baby boy is born to them. Appanna laments over his fate of having a baby that is not his. As for the serpent, it can’t leave Rani for good. It transforms itself into a lean grass snake and hides in her tresses. Feeling something heavy in her tresses, she combs her hair and the snake falls out, writhing on the floor. As Appanna searches for a stick to kill the snake, Rani welcomes the snake into her tresses saying, “The hair is the symbol of my wedded bliss. Live in there happily forever”.(Nagamandala, Karnad 64) Naga Mandala is a folk cultural play. It is a folk morality play in its deep structure. There is a community of beliefs in the play. In this play, Naga, a symbol of supernatural powers, fulfills the desires of a devotee Rani, the symbol of womanhood desires. She needs love and sensual pleasure from her husband Appanna. But, she is denied in their marital life. Her actions based on folk beliefs fulfill her desires. The moral in this play is that when a devotee is in need, God of belief appears to solute the problems. Folk narratives are cultural construction. They shape the individual according to the code of the moral tradition. This play has multi streams as symbolic, mythical and feministic. The dark setting eloquently reflect the strange mix of myth, mystery, reality, superstition and hallucination that the play embodies. The portrayal of the union of Rani with the snake is a testimony of Karnad’s inventive brilliance. Also, the dialogues true for the effective communication with the audience. The cobra myth provides the playwright with an opportunity to use mask creating a complex metaphor and demarcating the world of desire, enunciated libidos and by the use of them he brings out the ambivalence between natural and supernatural. A.K. Ramanujan, has a clear cut notion on Nagamandala, that while the great myth and local tales, shares similar structures, we must imagine that they never put to the same uses or carrying unchanging meanings. Motives may not predict function and functions may not meanings. Thus he draws the contours of contemporary reality within the confines of his mythical canvas. Naga Mandala is connected with the cultural consciousness. It can easily become the extension of folk culture, when it is read in the context of culture belief. Without cultural context it is only a folk text about superstitious and sensational story of snake meeting with the woman. Cultural context determines the true meaning of Naga Mandala. In Naga Mandala there is a strong undercurrent of mythical belief. The process of transformation of Naga into a human being is derived from such a belief. A live physical experience of Naga cult performance enables the acceptance of the transformation that is dramatized in the play. The theme of the play reminds us of the Kerala Naga cult. This experience makes acceptable all the possibility of Naga becoming performer and the performer becoming a Naga in the aesthetic manner. In other words, the physical experience of Naga cult trance dance accepts the theatrical concept of transformation as the possible result of reality. In Naga Mandala, the theme is mythical, but the approach is entirely post modern.Karnad has tried to maintain an appropriate approach, style and form of theatre. He has worked on 33 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 consciousness of people and cultural traditions. He wants to make the audience entertained and aesthetically satisfied. He thought over the fact that how the folk themes can become meaningful and relevant in the modern context. Karnad observes, “It was when I was focusing on the questions of the folk forms and the use of masks and their relationship to theatre music that my plays suddenly began to take shape in my mind’’(Preface 1) Originality is not the play’s chief cache and though the story and the plot is known, it is what the playwright does with that story, where he chooses to lay emphasis that makes for innovation. In this sense, the meaning and value of these tales go beyond those of the local variations and specificities that Ramanujan suggests they have within their ‘folk-mythologies,’ as sthala-puranas or stories of local/regional life. In Karnad’s hands, folklore transforms to resonate not only for whom the Natyashastra calls the sahridaya spectator (the spectator who knows the story and hence can readily relate to it) but also for the urban reader for whom the tales can, in transformed ways, emblematise crisis in identity-formation and articulation. In this way perhaps, Karnad hits upon a strategy to combine the impulses of Western realistic theatre with the paradigms of Indian folkloric drama, creating a form of ‘complex seeing’ that he borrows from Brecht as much as he does from Ramanujan, the Yakshagana and the natak companies of his childhood. Karnad makes use of myths and folk forms in his plays to exorcise socio-cultural evils. The play through using the element of folk lore questions the patriarchal codes of society and deals with modern concepts of repression and psychology. He says in his Introduction to the play, ‘The energy of folk theatre comes from the fact that although it seems to uphold traditional values, it also has the means of questioning those values, of making them literally stand on their head( Preface, Karnad 20). In Naga-mandala, Karnad not only exposes male chauvinism, the oppression of women, the great injustice done to them by patriarchal culture and men, but also overtly deflates the concept of chastity that undergirds the patriarchal mythic imagination across religion and language. The play hints, indeed, that these contradictions lie at the heart of myths as a whole. Karnad’s way of reckoning with the anxiety can be seen in his use of classic postmodern theatrical device of multiple endings. It appeals to the postmodern sensibility of the late twentieth- century. Naga-mandala is a good example. The transformative power of women’s retelling of myths is kept intact by the play with closure-happy/unhappy, complete/ambiguous—thus foregrounding the important question: for whom is it happy? In whose eyes is it ambiguous? The double ending presents to the audience a choice of belief: in End One, Naga’s sacrifice paves the way for Rani’s happy married life. In End Two, the snake does not die. He is allowed by Rani to live in her tresses. The lover is thus accommodated within the marriage, and although, the rubric of myth allows his transmogrification, symbolically, he lives with Rani, within the family. Karnad often felt that Folk art has a great impact on the modern theatre. The Myth of Cobra reinstates the fact that modern man cannot have one identity and every choice gives way to certain experiences and at times at the cost of penalty. Karnad had once observed that we keep accrobating between the tradition and the modern, because we could not hit upon a form that balances, true to life, nation and personal idiosyncrasies. Iyengar, commenting on the dramatic technique of Karnad, says: In all his three plays – be the theme historical, mythical or legendary, Karnad’s 34 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

approach is ‘modern’, and he deploys the conventions and motifs of folk art like masks and curtains to project a world of intensities, uncertainties and unpredictable. (731). The Karnad drama focuses on the complexity of human relationship and contains an indirect critique of modern Indian society. Karnad uses myths in his plays to express meaning for the contemporary life. He believes that the significance of myth never dies. In an age of postmodernism and globalization, he observes people’s craze for materialism and their crude imitation of Western civilization. So as a conscious dramatist, he valorizes myths, parables, legends and folktales in his plays. He rewrites them in his plays as they provide immense scope for living. Girish Karnad writes from and of a common cultural subjection and oppression. His works are vehicles of resistance, returning the Eurocentric gazes and reconstructing the language of a nation that had once been under the shackles of Imperialism. He shares the desire to use theatre to explore and verify their cultural substance .Karnad being a postcolonial dramatist hybridizes his interest in Indian’s cultural traditions with Western dramatic literature, theory and criticism. As a result of which Karnad can not only resist the nativist pull to revive the authentic Indian culture but also the temptation of Western hegemonic cultural standards. Karnad decorates Indian culture nicely in his plays. He wants to make aware our generation of Indian culture. It is right today we have come afar but our culture still catches our attention. He never tries to impose anything on the readers or audience. He always makes realize the importance of our culture. Karnad has full command over the audience of the world. He has achieved a special position among the Indian dramatists. His feministic approach is highly remarkable especially in the play Naga Mandala. This play held an immediate appeal because of reading it as Rani’s story. This story is of a restricted or confined lady. The whole story revolves around the lady character among the middle class women. The main story of the play is co-related with male story teller and his artistic anxieties. Through this play Karnad presents the tradition of women’s story telling. In this play the gender and sexualities are very much noticeable. Sexual excitement and mellow dreams of a newly married woman are carried in the play. Karnad is well aware that the audiences are not only male; there are women too in large number. Karnad has used the theme to show that a married woman is content when she finds fulfillment in love. Karnad has tried to make us realize that the love that happens to be outside marriage should not be considered wrong. If we have a look on Krishna Kathas, Radha’s love for Krishna is considered pious. The reason for feministic interest is that Karnad was extremely inspired by his mother after the death of her husband. She showed courage to face the society in which many hurdles are raised up for a lonely woman. Karnad stresses on human desire. He realizes that every human being has desires. Karnad has contributed immensely to foreground the indigenous culture and tradition through the use of folk tales, myths and legends and the form of folk theatre. He has proved helpful in re- affirming and establishing the national identity firmly on the contemporary ground of foreign cultural influences and invasion. Extensive use of folk techniques and crafts have generated newer interests in indigenous arts and crafts, their life, tradition and culture thereby contributing to their economic development and progress. Use of traditional devices and artifacts by contemporary drama has helped generate a new scope for livelihood for the various artisans and folk artists.

35 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Girish Karnad has been one of the vanguards who aided the audiences by using Indian English, mythical references in theatres that is at once internalized and voiced without any traces of premeditation. He returned the gaze, as a vehicle of resistance and gave Indian dramas, a form, and an identity that is truly Indian .Among the major dramatists’ that India ever created and saw, Girish Karnad fits the bill who gifted a distinct silhouette to the enormous volume of creative article that India already is preoccupied with. A playwright for five decades and yet maintaining his ground, Girish Karnad continues to redefine and reinstate the contours of Modern Indian Theatre with his Kannada plays, which he himself translates. His intensive explorations of the genres of folklore, mythology and history that trine to form the thematic crux of his plays have been reflective enough of the idiosyncrasies and perpetual challenges of mortal existence. In each of his play, beneath a legendary/mythical or historical story, we notice “subtle and constant juxtaposition of the past and present” which has been “a common feature of Karnad’s dramatic art.” (Dhanavel 106) CONCLUSION Nagamandala is an interface between myth and history. Karnad achieves something great through this play. There is a uniqueness in Karnad’s dramatic vision. He is a part of the post- independence ‘modern’ phase of Indian theatre, and his plays have that much impact on his readers and audience. Works Cited Dhanavel, P. The Indian Imagination of Girish Karnad: Essays on Hayavadana.New Delhi: Prestige. Iyengar, K R S .Indian Writing in English ,New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd , 1985. Karnad, Girish. Three Plays : Naga-Mandala, Hayavadana and Tughalaq. New Delhi: OUP, 1994. Karnad, Girish. 1997. Preface to Naga-Mandala. Delhi: Oxford University Press Maya, D. “Karnad’s The Fire and the Rain: A Return to Indigenous Tradition” The Literary Criterion. Volume. 36, No.4, 2001. Ramanujan A. K. ‘Towards a counter-system:Women’s Tales’.The Collected Essays of A.K. Ramanujan, ed. Vinay Dharwadkar.New Delhi:OUP. ND.

36 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

RESOLVING THE IDENTITY CRISIS OF FEMALE PROTAGONIST BY EMBRACING NATURE IN KAMALA MARKANDEYA’S NECTAR IN A SIEVE

Poornima S. Unni Research Scholar, Department of English, Sree Kerala Varma College, Thrishur

ABSTRACT Kamala Markandaya contributes to postcolonial fiction in a blooming mode as her writings bring to light the predicament of working class women and also about another oppressed entity, the environment. Kamala Markandaya’s 1954 novel, Nectar in a Sieve exposes the issue of women in relation to nature. Rukmani and her husband are rice farmers and her relationship with nature, like his, is thus mediated through their labour. Through the act of gardening Rukmani develops the type of closeness with the land represented in early ecofeminist writing on the body and spirituality. The question of belonging to the land can be viewed as her intimacy with nature as part of shaping her identity thereby solving the crisis. The paper analyses how Rukmani resolves her crisis of identity by embracing nature. Key Words: Woman, Nature, Identity, Ecofeminism

INTRODUCTION We are either going to have a future where women lead the way to make peace with the Earth or we are not going to have a human future at all – Vandana Shiva The female protagonist’s identity crises are resolved through her association with nature. All of these are indicative of the postcolonial environmental condition that the women engage in to survive materially and triumph. The crises of identity of the women are mediated through the land metaphorically and literally. The land as a physical and geographical entity features predominantly in the lives of the women in the novel and the decisions they make regarding staying or leaving the land, or their land accepting or rejecting them as citizens. Ecofeminism is the name given to a variety of positions that have roots in different feminist practices and philosophies. These different perspectives reflect not only different feminist perspectives; they also reflect different understandings of nature and solution to pressing environmental problems (Warren, 1993). Ecofeminists believe that patriarchal society is built on four interlocking pillars: sexism, racism, class exploitation and environmental destruction. This ecofeminists analysis projects that not only women but oppressed races and oppressed social classes are also closely tied with nature. They 37 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 argue that there is close relationship between women and nature that comes from their shared history of oppression by male domination. Ecofeminism as a literary practice is concerned with the depiction of nature; it emphasized how traditional representations often see the land as innocent, female and ripe for exploitation. Resolving the Identity Crisis Markandeya gives voice to her main character Rukmini through her intimacy with nature. The agrarian characters especially women are more prone towards nature or environment. Rukmani in Nectar in a Sieve is posited as an Indian peasant ‘everywoman’ who often finds solace in the lap of nature from the trials and tribulations of life. Ecofeminism is vivid in Rukmani’s identities as victim of child marriage, wife, and mother. The theory establishes the fact that women and nature are uniformly important and independent instead of their oppression and degradation by male autonomous bodies. However, Rukmani’s identity is mediated through both her labour and love of the land. Her interaction with the land integrates both production and reproduction, thereby giving it a materialist dimension. This is especially seen through experience of an identity crisis when she is evicted from her land thus making her neither of the land nor of the city. Rukmani resolves this crisis of identity by ultimately preferring village life that is so close to nature. Although the novel predates the emergence of ecofeminism as an institutionalized theoretical field, several critics who have written about Nectar in a Sieve view Rukmani’s connection with the land and nature through the prism of cultural ecofeminism. For example, Rukmani says that, “when the sun shines on you and the fields are green and beautiful to the eye, and your husband sees beauty in you which no one has seen before, and you have a good store of grain laid away for hard times, a roof over you and a sweet stirring in your body, what more can a woman ask for?”(8).This oft-quoted passage from the novel is seen to romanticize the relationship that Rukmani has with her land and to nature. Nature, the sun and the beauty of the green fields appear as Rukmani’s source of well-being. Similarly when they relocate to Nathan’s village far from Rukmani’s family home, he is eager to prove himself. He holds up a handful of grain and promises that with “Such harvests as this, you shall not want for anything” (6). It is interesting to note that for a peasant woman, happiness consists of bare necessities at the elemental level made up largely of food, clothes, shelter and the idyllic beauty of the countryside. Nature, the sun and the beauty of the green fields appear as Rukmani’s source of well-being. Nature is employed as a metaphor to describe Rukmani’s sexual maturation as well as sexual desire. By overtly linking Rukmani’s body to the land, the text here hearkens back to cultural ecofeminism’s naturalization of woman’s pleasure and connectedness to the earth. At this point, however, it becomes important to move away from the images of a romanticized and naturalized image of the third-world peasant woman reflected in the character of Rukmani. Rukmani is initially projected to be irrevocably linked to the land. But a number of problems arise, however, when attempting to read Nectar in a Sieve directly through ecofeminism. Firstly, the novel predates the emergence of ecofeminism (as an intellectual field, and as a recognized movement) by at least two decades. Secondly, ecofeminism, especially its spiritual branches, has received heavy and continuous criticism almost since its inception. As an example, Noel Sturgeon points to how “The Chipko movement [became] a symbolic center of a discourse about Third World women that paints them

38 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 as ‘natural environmentalists’ or ‘ultimate ecofeminists,’ reducing them to an idealized peasant woman who is integrated into ‘nature’ through her daily lived activities” (127).So an attempt has been made here to frame her commitment to the land in relation to larger socio-political and inter- personal frameworks. The protagonist Rukmini is portrayed as an active agent of nature. She as the central character enunciates her story hard life, and shows her bravery in spite of all heavy odds put on her by cruel society as well as by nature. This protagonist develops her bond with nature from the very beginning of the novel. This association with nature seems stronger after her marriage with Nathan, a poor tenant farmer. Her strong ties with nature seem to be superb, brilliant and thought provoking. It seems due to Rukmani s close tie with nature, that her day to day activities and duties are environmentally driven. A normal person cannot even think about these natural objects which this young protagonist mentions, when her husband has gone and she is a widow. “Sometimes at night I think my husband is with me again coming gently through mists, and we tranquil together “( 01). The single word mist in this reference is a complete depiction of late summer season (autumn), when nights are drenched, when often rain falls and the meadows and pastures are full of dew drops. This atmosphere is so amusing and pleasant for the protagonist that it romanticizes her, and she feels peace and serenity in this climate when she does find herself with her husband; as dew nights are naturally considered to be calm. Her choice of weather does not seem poor, in spite of her being peasant, whereas this is the season when there is not much greenery in the fields and on the trees, but she is blissful and contented. Her connection with nature is surely marvelous and a matter of positive reception. The protagonist from the night scene goes towards break of day, “Then morning comes the wavering grey turns to gold” (02). The arrival of dawn and the shining of the sky give the beautiful golden colour to all the objects present in this world. This description presents Rukmini’s deep and intensive love for nature, which grows ever and never comes down. The scenery of dawn is beautiful, which most of the people enjoy by waking with the arrival of it, but her practice to see things with the colour of dawn aware us that she has more inclination towards nature, not only to observe and enjoy it, but also to give it worth by telling its affirmative aspects, reimbursement and benefits to the reader. Rukmani again tells, “Sleepers awake and he softly departs” (03).The above quote hints that her sleeping and awakening is unwaveringly mingled with nature. It seems that even before marriage she has deep concerns with surrounding environment. She starts her journey in a bullock cart and reaches a mud house, and says in a pretty manner, “It suits me quite well to live here” (06). It seems her compromise with her fate as well as her love for nature that after leaving a well built house she is willing to reside in a mud house quite gleefully. So it is palpable that she is developing her link with nature in her attempt to redeem her identity crisis wants to give nature an independent and valuable place, and to establish the fact that ecofeminism’s preliminary premise is to consider them two different and independent things. That’s why after leaving a pompous house she is ready to reside in a mud house quite contentedly and gleefully. Interestingly women are viewed as active agents in the maintenance of life. She is contented with her harmonious relation towards nature. Nature is prominent when she mentions, “good store of grains laid away for hard times” and about her dwelling place, made of mud and with a roof of wood and straws. Each and

39 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 every object of their use has been got from the natural resources. It shows their firm belief on nature and the mercy of nature on them. Rukmani mentions while a woman has all these belongings she must be contented. Rukmani has faced a number of hardships and she knows the worth of land, because if there is no land there is no hope to survive. That’s why she also thinks about Ira’s marriage, she does not find Kali’s son as a suitable match because they do not own any land. She never wants to indulge her daughter in the same problems as she herself has suffered. That’s why when old Granny searches for a match, Rukmani describes it, “At last we found one who seemed to fulfill our requirements: he was young and well favoured, the only son of his father from whom he would one day inherit good portion of land (p.35)”. Her commitment with nature compelled her to prefer land for her daughter also. In fact life in the company of nature is cool and contented. She gives splendid descriptions whenever she finds a company of nature. Rukmani and her family also have a deep love for nature because they are masters in this field. Nathan seems to give favour to land when he speaks, “Look at our land- is it not beautiful? The fields are green and the grain is ripening (p.69)”. Their whole love for paddy field is rich again, to which they say, “Holding in itself our lives (p. 70)”. The entire dependence of their lives is on the fields, especially on paddy fields. They give such a value to land that they have developed reciprocal relationship with land; land cannot survive without their efforts and they cannot survive without land’s production. They get not only their survival needs from land but also get the annual payment of the landlord. The promise of a bright future is represented in the able body of her husband, as well as the paddy that runs through his hands. A symbiotic relationship is thus established, in theory at least, between the farmers, producers and nature. The farm soon becomes the centre of their lives, and Rukmani finds her passion in tending the land. Susheela Rao locates Rukmani’s special relationship with nature in her “heightened awareness of nature’s beauty” (42) as well as her connection to the rhythms of the seasons. The garden has a special place in her life and is closely associated with her coming-of-age. Being as young as she is, having married at twelve, Rukmani experiences her own physical, emotional, sexual and psychological development through her work in the garden and the growth of her vegetables. Her first planting of pumpkins is a particularly moving process for her. In the passage describing the pumpkins what is most striking is not the mere satisfaction or pride she feels, but the pleasure that the growth provokes in her: Pumpkins began to form, which, fattening on soil and sun and water, swelled daily larger and larger and ripened to yellow and red, until at last they were ready to eat, and I cut one and took it in. When Nathan saw it he was full of admiration... “One would have thought you had never seen a pumpkin before,” I said, though pleased with him and myself, keeping my eyes down. “Not from our land,” said Nathan. “Therefore it is precious, and you, Ruku, are indeed a clever woman.” I tried not to show my pride. I tried to be offhand. I put the pumpkin away. But pleasure was making my pulse beat; the blood, unbidden, came hot and surging to my face. (10) There are several things worth noting about this passage. The first is the frank and open manner in which Markandaya describes Rukmani’s pleasure. The sensuousness and overtones of 40 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 sexuality, indicated by her blushing and experiencing “pleasure,” are one of the qualities that make Nectar in a Sieve such a remarkable book for its time. Rukmani’s garden-variety sexuality show that female sexuality is an important theme in Markandaya’s novel. Although the pumpkin scene uses sexual pleasure as metaphor for nature-pleasure, in other places the text uses nature as a metaphor for sex. In the only description of amorousness between Rukmani and Nathan, she recalls her “senses opening like a flower to his urgency” (57), a description which directly echoes the green leaves of her plants “unfurling” under her own “eager gaze” (13). The reliance on nature symbolism here does not naturalize sex itself so much as it does relationships of pleasure and connectedness. This metaphoric reversal serves to reinforce the idea that the fecundity of nature is linked to Rukmani’s sexual maturation. This embodiment of nature is one of the forces that ultimately connect her toher land and that determine her commitment to it later in the text. The emphasis on life and in particular the female body as the giver or sustainer of life was a common theme in early ecofeminist writings and is echoed in the way Rukmani experiences a sort of embodied spirituality through her connection with the growing pumpkins. We can also notice theorizing of women’s spirituality in early ecofeminist writings. One vision of liberation to emerge from this field involved embracing this woman-nature connection, which was often described in spiritual terms and very much rooted in bodily experience (Tong 260). She gets astonished over the constant growth of brinjals, pumpkin and beans, and her curiosity increases until she sees their full growth. She calls this growth of vegetables a conscious growth, unlike her own unconscious spiritual growth. Splitting of the seed and the growth of the green leaf becomes a constant source of excitement for Rukmani. Her deep concerns also highlights that Rukmini’s great care and association with nature is very much like the care and association with her own child, though the child has not born yet, but she takes care of land and nature just like a child. As giver and nurturer and endurer of life, woman participates in the cycle of life as seed, then seedling, which ultimately becomes part of the soil that supports future seed” (Zeleny, 1997).The biological role of procreation (reproduction) is intimately linked to Rukmani, land and seeds. Procreation is seen to be a critical role for a woman in Rukmani’s society. A woman who fails to conceive early in her marriage may be renounced by her husband, as Ira is later on in the novel. Here, the claim that women are closer to nature rests on the premise of women bringing forth life from their bodies, undergoing the pleasures and pains of pregnancy, childbirth and nursing. In a social sense, childrearing and domestic caretaking have kept women close to the hearth and thus closer to nature. Cultural ecofeminists celebrate the relationship between women and nature by reviving ancient pre-patriarchal rituals centered on goddess worship, the moon and linking this to the female reproductive system. Rukmani’s work in her garden is closely associated with her coming-of-age, and thus linked to her awareness of sexuality. Moreover Rukmini’s commitment to the nature never comes down, even in the days of her pregnancy. In those days she expects from Nathan that he will do work in the paddy field, but he is a work shirker and not ready to listen even. She recounts that, “Sowing time was at hand and there was plenty to be done in the field; dams of clay to be built to ensure proper irrigation of the paddy terraces (p.12)”.She also makes an exemplary contrast between country and town life by stating that towns are crowdy and filthy that we forget to take pleasure in the beauty of objects of nature. She considers beautiful village life with its greenery as a benediction to the whole mankind. 41 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Vandana Shiva as a notable figure in ecofeminism advocates a holistic approach that recognizes nature as a creative force. For Shiva this creative force is also a feminine one, based on the Hindu concept of prakriti, or life-force. Shiva sees the promise of ecological stewardship in the daily practices of women like Rukmani. What is particularly useful, especially in relation to Rukmani’s relationship with the land, is Shiva’s emphasis on labour. She writes that “women and nature are associated not in passivity but in creativity and in the maintenance of life” (47, emphasis in the original), which could be read as an essentialist comment on women’s reproductive capacities. Rukmani describes work and fulfilment in the same breath: “The sowing of seed disciplines the body and the sprouting of the seed uplifts the spirit, but there is nothing to equal the rich satisfaction of a gathered harvest, when the grain is set before you in shining mounds and your hands are whitened with the dust of good rice”(102). Rukmani’s family’s absolute dependence on nature is so severe as to be pitiable for most of the novel. Her survival is so often tested and tried by rains and droughts that the reader cannot help but despair at what she calls the “mighty impotence of the human endeavour” (42).To consider nature as a character in the novel open up the possibility of developing relationships with other characters in the novel, and is thus a congenial way of visualizing the role of nature in this text as a rejuvenating force. Rukmani herself, in what Rao calls the most important passage in the novel, describes nature thus: “Nature is like a wild animal that you have trained to work for you. So long as you are vigilant and walk warily with thought and care, so long will it give you its aid; but look away for an instant, be heedless or forgetful, and it has you by the throat” (39). There is a sense in this passage that Rukmani is trying to come to terms with her own role in this very meaningful yet strangely ambivalent relationship. Although in this passage she appears to speak from a position of power and control, throughout most of the novel she seems to accept her position at the mercy of nature. She expresses fear and hope, but rarely anger. She hints the truth that a little negligence from our part may be detrimental to nature. For the greater part of the novel she and her family are undernourished and over-worked. In one prosperous season following a year of brutal drought, she depicts the conflicting feelings that arise as they watch over their crop: “Indeed, it did our hearts good to see the paddy ripen. We watched it as a dog watches a bone, jealously, lest it be snatched away; or as a mother her child, with pride and affection. And most of all with fear” (93). The sense of loss of control is palpable in this scene. The family is hungry; their youngest dies of starvation while outside the harvest ripens, ever so slowly—”indifferent to their need” (71). It is almost as painful to watch the death of her son as it is to watch Rukmani’s apparently passive acceptance of her situation. She is barely even roused to anger by this turn of events; rather, she accepts the situation as part of her way of living: “This is one of the truths of our existence as those who live by the land know,” she writes, “that sometimes we eat and sometimes we starve …Still, while there was land there was hope” (132). The land offers the opportunity for self-sufficiency—it does not guarantee it. Most importantly, the land represents self-determination through owning (or at least being in charge of) the means of production, that is to say, the land. Without this one avenue of power and promise, life loses its meaning and runs, as the title suggests, like nectar through a sieve.

42 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

CONCLUSION Hence, we see that although Rukmani alters the landscape through her gardening in beneficial ways and is positively linked to the land and her immediate environment. In fact her romanticized view is given another angle and shade of ambivalence through her irresistible link with nature. There is such a subtle relationship that Rukmani establishes with nature as no one can untie, neither in the village nor in the city in spite of a great hardships that she confronts with, at both places. At every stage there is a series of hardships, which she has to face, but her every trouble ends with her company with nature. Rukmini’s efforts to associate herself closely to the Nature seem to be dominant over all her tragedies that she faces in the novel. Finally she resolves her identity crisis by embracing nature as a protector. References Agarwal, B. The Gender and Environment Debate: Lessons from India, in “Feminist Studies”. Spring 18(1). (1992):119-158.Print. Gaard, G. Edi. Ecofeminism: Women, Animals and Nature. Philadelphia: Temple University Press.1993.Print. Markandaya, Kamala. Nectar in a Sieve. New York:Signet Classics. 2002.Print. Shiva, V. Staying Alive: Women, Ecology and Survival in India. New Delhi: Indraprastha Press.1988.Print. Warren, Karen J. “The Power and the Promise of Ecological Feminism. “Ecological Feminist Philosophies. Ed. Karen J. Warren. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1996. Print. 125-46.

43 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

REPRESENTING FRET AND FURY OF THE MARGINALISED: A STUDY OF THE WRITINGS OF THEMSULA AO

Soya Joseph Asst. Prof on Contract in English, Sree Krishna College, Guruvayur, Thrissur. e.mail: [email protected] 9495030130

ABSTRACT This is a paper on a land, a writer, people and literature which are politically, geographically, culturally, socially and linguistically marginalised. It tries to explicate the works of Themsula Ao who bears all the fret and furies of being a North East Indian, a woman and a writer. Temsula Ao is a distinguished writer from the North East India Focusing on Temsula Ao’s works, the paper will discuss how literature carries the potential to capture the history of a region that has undergone a time of terror, and also suggests possibilities of future peace. North East India has witnessed scores of issues in recent times. Wide ranging issues including insurgency, illegal migration, and ethnic clashes coupled with natural calamities like flood, drought etc. have paralyzed the socio-economic and political side in the region. As such, development itself becomes a misnomer if compared to other states like Punjab, Haryana, West Bengal, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu etc. The life of Nagas has been thrown into all these unending clashes for ninety seven years. Themsula Ao’s Literature exposes the internal struggles and the violent political spaces of Nagas. Geographically they are divorced from the mainland of India. Culturally they have wide varieties of race, tribes, caste, sub caste and this makes separatist tendencies and each may feel culturally separated and ostracised. Socially, due to never ending political insurgencies, they remain underdeveloped in many areas. Politically, they have been in the midst of insurgencies. Linguistically, though each tribe has its own Naga language, they do not possess a common Naga language. The reason for the emergence of insurgency in the North East can be its relative distance from the Indian mainland which has allowed the feeling of ethno-nationalism, political isolation and psychological alienation. The ignorance of the government of India in the political matters in this part of the region has been herculean, one severe example being the Armed Forces Special Powers Act of 1958, amended in 1972 in the state of Manipur without any resolution to the conflict whatsoever Identity crisis is also another issue for the people of the different states in the North East who are generally clubbed together under the category the North Eastern, as if from another part of the world. Being often tagged as a foreigner, in particular a Chinese or a Japanese, Indian people have not been generally acceptable of such people from the North East, often regarding them as ‘outsiders’, making them the object of suspicion, taunting, ostracization, and public insult, sometimes lynching to death too (as in the recent case of the boy, Nido Taniam, from Arunachal Pradesh beaten to death in Delhi in broad daylight). In a way it can be stated that the birth of insurgent groups and their aggression towards the central government have been an act of retaliation as the government has repeatedly turned deaf ears to the demands of the people of the North East from time past. In the works of Themsula Ao, marginalisation of a land and people incorporated with past and present through memories, violence, and experience. 44 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

INTRODUCTION Literature and terror have a long and complex history in the North Eastern part in India which is sometimes synchronised with general remarks such as “literature that is too conflict ridden,” “literature that depicts violence and rage,” “violence as a thematic interest” and so on. The broadcasting media was also helping in a larger sense in stereotyping a land and its literature and culture, and thereby retaining to a large extent the controversies over the term “the North East”. There is also the problem of “homogeneity” and resistant public misconceptions. In spite of the region being home to eight different states that differ greatly from each other in terms of culture, tradition, language, festival and food habits, they are usually looked at as one and the same. The failure to understand the land’s heterogeneous character has been largely responsible in foolishly homogenizing the geographical, cultural, social and political differences. Cut off from the nation at length, the region has become a place of bewilderment and external myth-making. One can give many reasons as to why the place itself or the literary works of the region for that matter remain unexplored. Most of the writings from the North-East run through a common subject matter where they deal with topics concerning the state, terror, violence, memory and displacement, a literature of and in bondage. Keeping in pace with the dominant issues cropped up in the region, Temsula Ao has curved a niche in the annals of North-East writing. One of the most powerful literary voices from the region, her commitment to writings carries proficiency and dexterity both in theme and treatment. Tried, as she has done, her hand in poetry, short story and the essay proper, she proves herself a meticulous artist in every conceivable area. However, the most striking feature in her writings, among so many, is the presentation of the problematics involved in imaginary homelands with all their socio-political and ideological dimensions. As most of her writings, mostly the short stories, are based on Nagaland and its adjacent areas, the Naga set up with the separatist bent covers a considerable space showcasing the incalculable toil and suffering that have paralyzed all and sundry. With their age old ethnic alliance transformed into ethno nationalism by the time the British prepared to leave the sub-continent, the pan-Indian nationalism faced a serious setback. Problematizing Home Home seems so problematic a term, particularly in a trouble-ridden location, that it requires deep speculation and consideration to fathom its multi-layered meaning. With fast changing social, cultural and political milieu, one’s recourse to home gets multi-faceted as day progresses and time advances. Under these circumstances, one’s home or homeland turns out problematic where normal activities cease from the scene. In, “The Curfew Man”, Ao presents the problematics of home once curfew is clamped on the locality. In her words: “…the night curfew was the worst for people living in towns because soon after dark all social activities ceased, even church services or social gatherings had to be concluded …civilians were shot dead by the patrol parties…” In another story named, “The Jungle Major”, Ao presents the home of Punaba and Khatila as one beset with so many problems when the former joins the underground outfit. Punaba’s motif

45 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 of joining the outfit is to liberate their homeland from the foreign rule. They take the Central and State leadership as foreigners doing very little good for the common people. The writer says: “The subject of independence became public talk; young people spoke of the exploits of their peers in encounters with government forces and were eager to join the new band of, patriotic warriors to liberate their homeland from foreign rule.” In each of her creations, she takes adequate measure to give it a new look and dimension. For instance, in “Soaba”, she presents the problematics both in public and private arena. Of course, there seems to be close affinity between these two. Their relative existence makes them quite interesting and worth reading. Talking about the problematics in public life, Ao refers to the grouping mechanism deployed by the government forces. Under the purview of this strategy, people lose their ancestral set up and are forced to leave their home. To quote from the story: “The word ‘grouping’ had a much more sinister implication; it meant that whole villages would be dislodged from their ancestral sites and herded into new ones, making it more convenient for the security forces to guard them day and night.” This humiliation inflicted on the villagers restricts them from their routine activities and robs them of their freedom –loving mind set. As a new wave for asserting one’s rights by taking recourse to armed resistance has swept most of the parts in the region, one’s home does not remain a safe haven of peace and serenity. Identifying through Flashbacks and Reminiscences Identity of a person is often seen to be connoted as self-reflection and awareness of the self. Literary writings of any geographical area, whether it is fictional or non-fictional, often facilitate in identity (social/cultural/personal) disclosure of their inhabitants and communities in general. However this disclosure can be carried out possibly in two ways- Firstly, through an explicit means by anthropological narration of author and secondly, implicitly through the autobiographical memories of the characters in the writings. Here Themsula Ao uses of the second technique in exploring the identity (/ies) of the people of the north-east India. Since the north-east writings are heavily influenced by folklore and oral literature, it is assumed that the identities of characters emerging from the stories reflect to some extent deeply rooted identities of the inhabitants of the various parts of the north-east. Thus both flashback and reminiscences act as tools to dig out our past role and experiences and facilitate us in engraving our present and future commitments and beliefs. Almost all the stories of Ao, it has been highlighted how the identity of a protagonist is influenced by their past experiences which was filled with anguish, shock, cultural protocols etc., and affect their present identity In the story “Sonny”, Temsula Ao has shown how the identity of a girl suffers a split in loving a militant named Sonny. Through her frequent flashbacks it can be assessed that she continuously lives with an invisible person in her flashes. For example she wrote- “The spectre of ‘sonny alive’ and ‘sonny dead’ haunted me with grief, frustration, anger and remorse so relentlessly that a few times I almost choked on my suppressed screams”. After Sonny left, adjusting to new life was very confusing and scary for that girl as she wanted to live normal person’s life but simultaneously she couldn’t stop herself from loving a militant. Thus she continuously lives in the

46 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 state of identity moratorium. In identity moratorium, individual is in an actual state of crisis. He or she is actively searching to find his or her identity but has not yet made a commitment. Terror: Accelerates Marginalisation Themsula Ao’s short stories reflect the period of insurgency, the unrest and turmoil that have ravaged the land. Apart from the representation of terror, they compellingly portray the cultural and traditional life forms of the tribal people through the memories that most often remain “unacknowledged”. “The Jungle Major” the story tells of a man named Punaba whose physical features seemed rather incomparable to his otherwise beautiful wife Khatila. In the course of the story it is the wife’s wits that save her husband from the Indian soldiers who have joined the Naga underground group. In another story, “Soaba” (meaning idiot in Ao-Naga dialect), a mentally- retarded and ‘unschooled’ young boy from a village loses his life in the hands of Imlichuba who serves as a lackey for the Indian Army. The legend of a young singer Apenyo from “The Last Song”, who was brutally raped in one of the fights, becomes a tale of remembrance for the story tellers. “The Curfew Man” has a character Satemba who is a government informant and who roams about the town beyond the Army-imposed curfew hours to spy on his fellow Nagas who have joined the insurgent group. Amidst the wars and the regulated life there are also issues that revolve around families as in “The Night”. Behind the guns and violence, there is the story of a young girl betrayed by a man who has left her with an unconceived child. The skilled labour of a woman suggests the security of not only the family but that of the village too, as in “The Pot Maker”, Arenla, a skilled potter refuses to pass on the art to her daughter. “Shadows” tells the story of the young Naga boys driven with the “romantic idealism” of fighting for the cause of the state wake up only to the harsh reality of the situation of the tragic power struggle. Insurgency turns out to be the motive of the marginalized group of people who have been neglected of their rights and “cherished political goals”, and hence act out through the means of violence with an attempt to overthrow the existing structure, to replace it with one of their choice. Insurgency has become like a “disease” of the contemporary world which breaks down the security of a nation. It has become a “tool in the hand of the powerless” Equanimity Bursts through Verses Songs from the Other Life is an exquisitely crafted collection of poems by Temsula Ao, alive with the spirit of the Ao-Naga culture. Here she says that the past and the present meet and merge like rivers – flowing as one. Pure images, clear lines and visionary force are the hallmarks of these poems. Some of the poems in this collection deal with the Ao myth, their beliefs and practices. In the poem “The Old Story Teller”, the story teller emphasized his role as a narrator to let the young generation develop a propensity for poetry and folklores, so that they grow up in wisdom possessing original ideas and a love for their own culture. But towards the end of the poem, she laments the end of an era when she says: But now a new era has dawned Insidiously displacing the old. (“The Old Story Teller”) In another poem “When a Stone Wept”, the note explains “According to an Ao-Naga

47 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 myth, the first Ao people, three males and three females emerged from six stones, at a place called Lungterok. Ao also says that certain big stones ‘give birth’ to small stones, which move away from human sight to grow and become big stones themselves to procreate, thus making sure that they dominate certain landscapes where no life can ever exist”. “Trophies” recounts the age-old custom of head hunting practice among the Nagas. The head of one’s enemies were brought home as ‘trophies’, which was considered as a priced treasure to the villagers. The advent of Christianity in the region is a historical happening: it has deeply touched the lives of many communities in the Northeast. In “Blood of Other Days”, the poet laments the fact that even the hills never remained the same after the departure of the Britishers. She says:

We borrowed their minds, Aped their manners, Adopted their gods And became perfect mimics. (“Blood of Other Days”)

We can go through her lines Blessed are the unborn For they cannot mourn The loss Of what they Never had.

To all you children who are born, And are yet to be born, Just one word of advice- Never ask Why you were born To inherit The plunder of the ages

This is a place where Armaments become National policies, And diplomacy Another name CONCLUSION Provided that the stories are born out of the conflicting period that the state of Nagaland went through, it gives a clear account of the situation of the state at the backdrop of the stories where the writer mentions the disposed “land and belonging” where “countless young men were killed and women ravished”. The stories of Temsula Ao are seen to be an eloquent proof for the memories of the decades of strife, guerrilla warfare, plundering. Temsula Ao brings out issues on 48 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 how insurgency has caused problem not only towards the society but also for family. The stories document individuals, from young to old, regardless of gender, tribe or race, people that make up the different yet integrated society, and live under the fear of turmoil and war for their lifetime. In describing the situation of the home, the place, the culture, the people, the identity, the author also pens down the need to restore peace and bring about a change in the state that has been experiencing insurgency for decades. Each story in the book talks of how the characters got displaced with the conflict ravaging the homes and fields of the villagers, how some lost their prime essence of the youth by being forced to join the underground bodies, how young innocent girls became victims by being manhandled, or the rise of new groups that merged between the “two warring armies”, the third force which consists of the corrupt contractors. Nagaland has produced writers who have provided a new literature which has “sprung from the staccato cry of machine guns”. In the hand of writers such as Temsula Ao the prose becomes both spiritual and political. The only thing that remains now to be written with such end is the story of fostering memory, of remembering the shared history, of the difficult past and the struggles of life: of how the older “generation had lost their youth to the dream of nationhood and how that period of history was written not only with the blood and tears of countless innocents but also how youngsters (of those that were forced to join the group).... were transformed into what they became in the jungle.” Works Cited Ao, Temsula. “Sonny”, The Oxford Anthology of Writings from North-East India. Ed. Tilottoma Misra. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011. 238-248. Ao, Temsula: „Writing Orality in Soumen Sen and Desmond Kharmawphlang (ed) Orality and Beyond, New Delhi, Sahitya Akademi, 2007. Ao, Temsula: These Hills Called Home- Stories From a War Zone, New Delhi, Penguin Books India with Zubaan Books, 2006. Baron, R. A. Psychology. New Delhi: Pearson Education. 2002. Print. Baruah, Sanjib: „Dams and Livelihoods in The Assam Tribune, March 3, 2012. Baruah, Sanjib: Beyond Counter Insurgency- Breaking the Impasse in Northeast India (ed), New Delhi, Oxford University Press, 2009. Bhabha, Homi(1992): The World and the Home, Source- Social Text, No. 31/32, Third World and Postcolonial Issues, Duke University Press. Changkija, Monalisa. “The Hunter’s Story”, The Oxford Anthology of Writings from North-East India. Ed. Tilottoma Misra. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011. 249-254. Choudhury, Arupjyoti and Dilip Gogoi(2012): Marginal Frontier- Select Essays on North East India,(ed) Guwahati, Bhabani Offset Pvt. Ltd., Daiya, Kavita: „Home and the Nation- Women, Citizenship and Transnational Migration in Postcolonial Literature, Journal of Postcolonial Writing, Vol.44, No.4, 2008. Dasgupta, Anindita(2004): „Civilians and Localization of Conflict in Assam in Economic and Political Weekly, Bombay. Deka, Harekrishna(2012): “India s North East: An Imperial Look” in Arupjyoti Choudhury and Dilip Gogoi (ed) Marginal Frontier- Select Essays on North East India, Guwahati, Bhabani Offset Pvt. Ltd. Gooneratne, Yasmine (rev)(2007): In Search Of Home- Interpreting Homes in South Asian Literature (ed) Malashri Lal and Sukrita Paul Kumar, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd.. James, Henry(1975): The Portrait of a Lady, New York, Norton. Misra, Tillottama(2011): The Oxford Anthology of Writings from North East India, Fiction (ed), New Delhi, Oxford University Press

49 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

THE MOULDING OF ‘WOMANHOOD’ : A CLOSE READING OF ROSE MARY’S RE-TELLING OF SEVEN FOLK STORIES

Ann Mary Jacob Assistant Professor in English, Girideepam Institute of Advanced Learning( GIAL) Vadavathoor, Kottayam Dist.

ABSTRACT This paper attempts to study the influence of ancient fairy tales upon the gender consciousness of generations. The demarcation drawn between the two sexes and their roles in society are the product of the wide web of socialization. Heavily charged words and badly biased images get instilled to the budding minds through these seemingly harmless” bed-time pills”. Limiting the horizon of girls and constructing the so-called” brave young men” are the two direct effects of these kinds of narrations. Fairy tales undoubtedly place boys and girls in a hierarchy which grows slowly but steadily in their minds.

Regardless of their linguistic and cultural backgrounds, folk stories serve as the primary pills that induce gender consciousness in society. The ever green folk tales of Korea, Sweden, Italy and Argentina proclaim male superiority and prescribe submissive roles for women. Irrespective of the anonymity of their author, we can identify certain ideological threads that run parallel through these tales. Crossing the generations, they continue their conquest of the ‘unbiased’ child psyches. On the journey of folk stories from oral tradition to literary genre, however the ideas of power and roles were altered to suit a patriarchal agenda. Feminist critics have argued that the most popular and enduring tales both present and encourage female ‘objectification’ and ‘passivity’ as in Snow White, Rapunzel, Sleeping Beauty and Cindrella. This, as Angela Carter states, “projects both notions of the nature of women and men” (Carter 23) Patriarchy or the rule of the father, victimization of women through slavery, expulsion, confinement, denial of identity and choice for women, woman as an object of male gaze, as a well earned ‘prize’, marriage as a contract between father and eligible young Princes, stereotyping of women as submissive, docile beings, portrayal of men as icons of courage, juxtaposing of good and bad women, biological determinism, sexism are all woven tactfully to the narrative of these sweet but short stories. Sarpavum Penkidavum, Naadu Kadathappetta Rajakumari, Moongayude Pravachanam and Manthravadiniyude Thottam are Italian folk stories compiled by Italo Calvino.

50 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Pettikkulile Mayavi is a Swedish folk tale, Thadavilakkappetta Rajakumari is Korean in origin and Manushyane Snehicha Mohini is one from Argentina. Rose Mary, a renowned writer of Malayalam literature has re- told these stories and created a make-believe world before us. In the Swedish folk story, Pettikkullile Mayavi, Larz is the protagonist who luckily gets a genii as his slave who does everything at his beck and call. As per the demands of Larz, the genii helps in procuring all possible material benefits and the most precious ‘possession’ of all is a woman – a Princess. He even shamelessly peeps into the private room of this Princess with the help of the genii. Woman very often merely becomes an ‘object of male gaze and curiosity’. The gaze of the other inevitably degrades ‘my’ being-for-oneself and transforms it into a being for others. (Buchanan 196) Larz befools her father and gets her hand in marriage. We find a typical ‘submissive’ wife in the Princess when she tells her husband that her love for him shall remain the same even if he is not a rich man. She is willing to live a life according to his life situations. Marriage is shown as a contract between a wealthy Prince and the girl’s father wherein the girl has no choice at all.. Tolerance and flexibility are the hall mark of angelic wives. Later, unfortunately, Larz stops receiving favours from the Genii and lost all his belongings. Having realized the pretentious nature of his son-in-law, the King gives orders to kill Larz. At this instance, the poor daughter pleads to save her husband’s life, but no one listens to her. She has no ‘voice’ at her father’s domain. She is bluntly told that she shall be offered another husband. The father as well as the husband turns out to be dominating figures in the story. Anyhow, the story ends with a re-union of Larz and his wife which proclaims the evergreen idea of a ‘satisfactory’ ending. The understanding that a girl imbibes out of such clichés is that their life may be fulfilled only through the establishment called “marriage”. Expulsion from the mainstream and longing for a male care-taker are the common threads that link the female characters of all folk stories. We find the same in the Italian folk story, Nadu Kadathapetta Rajakumari. Here, the King is flattered by his elder daughters and he arrogantly expels his younger daughter from his Kingdom. Unquestioned authority of the father reigns through the story. She takes refuge at a wild man’s palace who shows much sympathy to her. There she happens to meet a talking parrot and its frequent visit eventually leads to the arrival of a Princess who rescues her and offers her a life by marrying her. The description of her beauty in exaggerated terms reiterate woman’s passive role as an ‘object of beauty’ that simply awaits a male suitor and attains self satisfaction once they get married. The idea that women are a category ‘to be protected’ is directly conveyed to every young mind that reads the story. Women being ‘pawned’ and ‘sold’ is a recurrent theme in folk stories. In the Italian story Manthravadiniyude Thottam we find a mother who promises to offer her daughter to a witch when the daughter turns 16. The mother was caught by the witch while she was stealing cabbages from the witche’s garden. As a compensation, the witch demands to submit the daughter. Woman as a scape-goat image is evident here. Also, the juxtaposing of angelic women and devilish women are portrayed here. Confinement of women characters is a typical feature of folk stories. In the Italian story, Sarpavum Penkidavum, we find the youngest daughter of the farmer being locked up in the attic by the treacherous means played by her elder sisters to convince their father that she is a girl of ill- 51 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 omen. She is yet another Rapunzel who awaits a savior. The Korean folk story Thadavilakkappetta Rajakumari portrays another female character who is a beautiful Princess captivated in a tower. A grotesque and cruel demon has kept her under control and she awaits the arrival of a handsome Prince who shall recue her. Her beauty doubles as years pass by and her youth is not susceptible to ageing. This exaggerated depiction of female physique degrades her to a mere ‘seat of beauty’. Iconisation of beautiful women is another evil effect of folk stories. Surprisingly, the female characters of folk stories do not have a name of their own. Identity of a woman is not a matter at all. The narratives create a unanimous image of all women without any unique feature to differentiate one from another. The name of the character in this Korean story is ‘Venmuthu’ which itself declares that she is a valuable ‘prize’ for the bravery of the young man who rescues her. The much reiterated ‘happily-married’ ending also inculcates an expected and socially acceptable ‘life-style’ in women. Deprival and injustice to women is seen in Manushyane Snehicha Mohini, the Argentinean story that narrates the life and pathetic death of Kopahwe, the head of the red Indians in the Andis mountain range who fell in love with an exceptionally beautiful supernatural woman. The tribals objected to their inter-creed marriage and sentenced Kopahwe to death. The beautiful lady wept at the bank of the river where they met each other for the first time. It is believed that her tears gave rise to a hot spring which came to be known as Kopahwe. This place is located in the northern part of Newken Province and is visited by many tourists. Unfortunately, she is no longer remembered by anyone. This character reminds us of the legendary character Vaishali, the poor girl who undertook risks to bring Rishyasringan to Angarajya to conduct some rituals to save the country from terrible drought by bringing rainfall. Ultimately, she is pulled into oblivion just like the beautiful lady in this Argentinean story. The Italian folk story, Moongayude Pravachanam, presents a self-effacing mother who serves her husband and sons in the best way possible. Her routines prove that she is a subservient woman who worships her family. Later in the story the mother who is abducted by the Turks, is sold in a market as a slave. Woman as a commodity is exemplified here. Fairy tales are not harmless narratives: not only do they reveal the dominant social values of the time, but they make those social values easy to digest with beautiful illustrations, simple plot and the ‘happily ever after’ ending. In short, fairy tales have come to perform a ‘civilizing function’. The fairy tales we are familiar with today have their origins in oral folk tales. As folk tales were transformed and appropriated by the upper class into published, illustrated fairy tales they became forces of civilization portraying appropriate modes of behavior for the ideal upper class citizen. The fairy tales were cultivated to assure that young people would be properly groomed for their social functions. These stories show us how European cultures of the past expected women to dress, behave and speak. However, the world is still in the thrall of fairy tales. It has been suggested that the process of turning oral folk tales into publishing literature gradually erased the strong independent heroines from our social history. What remains in these tales are the archetypes that are the bulwark of patriarchal society past and present: passive, self-sacrificing women and active, competitive men. 52 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

The act of telling a story is a collaborative process of one person sharing a story with others. It is an act of self-determination and rebellion against oppressive forces. The narration of a story can be taken as one of the ways in which disenfranchised, marginalized people express their dissatisfaction. Such tales would be entertaining, comforting and perhaps may express a wider range of personalities and possibilities. References 1. Mary, Rose, Lokaprashastha Naadodikathakal (Retold). Kottayam; Manorama Books 2011 2. Ian, Buchannan, Oxford Dictionary of Critical Theory, Canad: OUP, 2010 3. Angela, Carter. Angela Carter’s Book of Fairy tales, London: Virago, 2005

53 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

PARTITION AS A MAJOR THEME IN COMMONWEALTH LITERATURE: A READING OF MANOHAR MALGONKAR’S A BEND IN THE GANGES

Ajith R Research Scholar, Department of English, M.S. University, Tirunelveli T.N. e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Fiction from the formerly colonized nations highlights the colonial past. Hindu-Muslim conflicts in South Asia are in part attempts by the British administration to play the two groups of against each other .Indian fiction about these conflicts rarely points to such colonial causes. In most of the Indo-Anglian novels certain themes recur; the freedom movement, the partition and all the holocaust created at that time figure in Kushwant Singh’s Train to Pakistan, Malgonkar’s Bend in the Ganges and Chaman Nahal’s Azadi, which deals directly with the partition of India from an almost exclusively Indian perspective. Manohar Malgonkar is a committed writer, has been acclaimed “a down to earth teller of tales”. A Bend in the Ganges is concerned with the theme of individuals quest for fulfillment of moral identity. Mangonkar presents the political side of the partition of the country from the point of view of Gian, Debi Dayal, and Shafi Usman. The novel contains a well-contrived structure, an artistically- designed plought, a gripping narrative and imaginary carved characters and effective symbols. The novel portray conflicting loyalties and various forces at work at the time of partition, the situation offers a gripping account of rioting and bloodshed. An attempt is made here to depict partition as a major theme in the literatures of the South Asian countries, especially from india.

INTRODUCTION Literature from the formerly colonized nations highlights the colonial past and is termed Commonwealth Literature. Indo-English literature can be seen as an avant-grade of this genre. Indian fiction points to conflicts of colonial causes. Hindu-Muslim conflicts in South Asia are in part attempts by the British administration to play the two groups of against each other. In most of the Indo-Anglian novels themes of freedom movement and partition recur. Indo-Anglian Novels made a steady growth during the1950’s and now holds a position among the world literature. Indian novels were not only mere portrayal of the politics of freedom struggle or partition, but it was actually a parallel movement to fight against- Superstition, Casteism, Poverty, Illiteracy and many other social evils.

54 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Historical events of great magnitude like wars, genocide, holocausts and natural calamities inspire writers and artists to create great works of art.. The partition of the Indian Sub-continent in 1947 is of great importance in the Indian history, innumerable literature has been produced in Punjabi, Urdu, Hindi, Bengali, English and Sindhi highlighting various themes of trauma of partition of the country. Many novelists including authors from the Pakistani side of Punjab as well have dealt with this theme. There is a big difference between the historical romances that flourished in the early days of the Indian struggle for Independence and the modern narratives that dealt with the theme of partition. Novels written on the nationalist theme would show that the success or failure of a particular novel largely depends on the kind of approach the writer adopted towards this particular situation. Indo-Anglian noves like- Kanthapura, Kandan the Patriot, Conflict, Mother-Land, Waiting for the Mahatma, Intransit, Inquilab, Chronicles of Kedaram, A Time to be Happy, House at Adampur, A Bend in the Ganges, I Shall not Hear the Nightingale, Some Inner Fury, Leaves in the August Wind, So many Hungers, Train to Pakistan, Sunlight on a Broken Column, Whirlwind, We Never Die, Karmayogi, The Sword and Sickle, The Private Life of an Indian Prince, Princes … all these deal with nationalist theme. A large number of these novels throw light on- communal riots, the Chinese aggression, disputes between India and Pakistan, differences between the political parties of the country, the rise of parochial parties of the country, and the rise of parochial tendencies. The Hindu-Muslim riots of 1947 have been treated in Manohar Malgonkar’s A Bend in the Ganges, Chaman Nahal’s Azadi and Khushwant Singh’s Train to Pakistan. Manohar Malgonkar’s A Bend in the Ganges take up the same theme and portray conflicting loyalties and various forces at work at the time of partition. It deals with India’s Independence and the holocaust that followed in the wake of the partition of the country. The novel seek to provide a brutally realistic story of political hatred and violence, of mass passions during those turbulent and fateful days that preceded and followed the partition of the British India, when people were seized by communal frenzy. The novel take up this theme and seek to portray the “conflicting loyalties and various forces” that resulted into the ghastly tragedy of blood and horror.”..,.the novels of Khushwant Singh and Manohar Malgonkar are prismatic tales of partition and post partition life in India”. (V.A. Shahane 74) Manohar Malgonkar, a committed writer, has been acclaimed “a down to earth teller of tales” (Khushwant Singh 14). Depth of characterization and devotion of story telling sublimated his works. His description of the background always keeps its authenticity, whether it is the Indian Army in Distant Drum (1960), or a tea plantation of Assam in Combat of Shadows(1962) or the Indian princely states in The Princes (1963) or the 1857 anti-British revolt in the Devil’s Wind(1972). The novel for the present study A Bend in the Ganges(1964) is concerned with the individuals thirst for moral identity. The novel runs in to thirty six chapters, which can be later divided in to three main parts. The first set of chapters, include one to thirteen, set in West Punjab, deal with a period between 1937 and 1939 .The second set of chapters include fourteen to twenty three, set in the Andaman and deal with a period from 1939 to 1942. The third set includes chapters twenty four to thirty six, deals with a period between 1942 and 1947. The partition of India and its communal odor created tragedy of great magnitude. On one

55 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 side when the country was at the heights of Independence, the other side witnessed savage massacres. …over 6,00,000 of them were killed…children, they were picked up by their feet and their heads smashed against the walls… female children, they were raped and their breasts were chopped off…(Mosley 9). Violence become a predominant theme in Malgonkar’s A Bend in the Ganges, it is all about killings, lootings, rape and a lot more. The novel explores the brutal reality of violence. All the episodes of the novel illustrate this reality of human nature. The novel presents among the factors responsible for the Indian predicament, the Second World War and the Partition of India. A Bend in the Ganges is a novel of Psychological in-sight into human nature, a study of the everlasting problem of man’s cruelty to others … there is this harsh fact which we are all forced to confront - man is incapable of rooting out violence altogether. And this is the essence of the novel. (Arulandram 15-16). The novel deals with the background of Indian independence and the communal riots in the Punjab. The principal characters are Gian Talwar and Debi Dayal. The novel moves at two levels-one centred on Gian Talwar and another on Debi Dayal. In the opening chapter of the novel, the novelist describes the ceremonial burning of foreign cloth. THEY were burning British garrments. The fire that raged in the market square was just one of hundreds of thousands of similar fires all over the country. (3) Gian Talwar a follower of Gandhi also joined in the ceremony. He gazed upon the words of Mahatma and found himself muttering “Bharat -Matha - Ki Jai! The path of ahimsa is not for cowards” (6). He folded his hands in a reverent namaskar. The words were almost like a private prayer to him. But his faith in non-violence is put on trial as soon as he goes back to his village Koushet. Gian is very much affectionate with his elder brother Hari. He has made a great financial sacrifice to send him to college for higher studies. Hari also spent a lot of money in winning the case of Piploda Land that was given to his grand-father, Dada Talwar, by the Big house. Gian and Hari take efforts to possess the disputed land. When Gian was out of Koushet, Hari is killed by Vishnu Dutt, Gian is badly disturbed. His affection for his brother resulted in a tragic climax of vengeful murder of Vishnu Dutt. He confesses his guilt to the police. He is given life- sentence as a punishment and is condemned to the Andamans. Debi saw the rape of his mother in a moonlit night. He was helpless. It shows the rape of India by the British. He hates the British and has joined the terrorist movement. He embraced violence to send the British out of India. He supplied explosives from his father’s store to the terrorists. Shafi Usman, another young man also embraced violence after his father’s death at Jallianwala bagh. Burning of the military plane gives Debi a great satisfaction and a sease of fulfillment.By this, Debi Dayal ingeniously graduates in terrorism and earns transportation to the Cellular Jail in the Andamans. Gian is shocked to see Debi in the Jail. The Second World War breaks out. The Japanese stand poised to Liberate their Indian brothers from the British tyrant. While pulling out of the Andamans, Gian escapes to India. Debi co-operates with the Japanese. They want to use him as their secret agent. Debi cannot tolerate

56 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 human misery, filth, squalor, hunger, and disease which have been his inescapable companions on his track to India.”They were ruthless, overbearing, and cruel - far more cruel than the British could ever be; he had no doubt about that…” (248) Japanese sent Debi to India, From Silent Hill Debi Dayal goes toIndia. He met his old fellow terrorist Basu at Calcutta. They discussed about the violence happened in the country. There is only bloodshed, women are abducted and children were killed with out humanism. What had been aimed against the British has turned against itself. And the ugliest thing it has bred is distrust. No Hindu can trust a Moslem any more, and no Moslem trusts a Hindu. The country is to be divided. (278) On the eve of Independence, partition riots break out in Duriabad. Tekchand feels that these riots are somehow different from the usual Hindu - Muslim discord. Gian goes to find out the latest situation about the convoy. Sundari tells her father that Debi was back from the Penal colony and he married Mumtaz, a Muslim girl. On the other hand Debi Dayal and Mumtaz take a train to Duriabad. On the way they witness scene of carnage And holocaust across the boundary of the West Punjab. The train is stopped by muslim rioters to search out Hindus. Debi is dragged down and killed. Shafi Usman, along with his companions, comes to Kerwad House to kidnap Sundari. Because Shafi purchased Mumtaz, from a brothel colony.But Mumtaz loves Debi and eloped with him. Gian hides himself, Sundari and her parents lock themselves in the Museum. Shafi and his companions break open the main door and hammer against the Museum. Sundari’s mother is killed by Shafi Usman. Sundari gave a violent death to Shafi who wants to take away and molest as a measure against Debi. Malgonkar also touched the theme of Exodus in the novel, more of a willing exodus, except Dewan-Bahadur Tekchand. The title of the novel ‘A Bend in the Ganges’ itself significantly comes from the Ramayana, which means- “take a look at the land they were leaving”. For the life sake every body joins in the migration. The fleeing of people is seen throughout the novel. The technicians and employees also joined the migration. So the railway service is also come to a grinding halt. The people are unaware of what is happening around them. Their only aim is to flee from the place. They flee like bees. In Kerward house Sundari and her parents are excited about the surrounding. They do not know the present situation. … they could hear the roar of the mob, like the din of a migrating swarm of bees, punctured by shrieks, catcalls, and the occasional report of firearms. What had happened during the night? What was happening now? There was no way of knowing. (322) Then they also prepared themselves to leave the place. But Dewan-Bahadur Tekchand was unwilling. He was unable to leave the house. He decides to send his daughter and his wife with the convoy, as he felt sick with emotion. Later Tekchand consoled himself and enquired about the convoy. On the other hand Debi-dayal is able to make the journey in the opposite direction from the flow of the migration. He travels towards Duriabad. Later, he and Mumtaz took part of the

57 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 migration for the sake of Mumtaz a Muslim girl. Because the gang of hooligans on a house-to- house search for Muslims to kill. They went to the railway station. They find that the train service only moves between East Punjab and West Punjab for the refugees. Debi-dayal desperately waits to save his love, decides to move with her to Pakistan. But fate works against their will. The lovers are intercepted by the mob. Mumtaz is very careful to address Debi as Karim. But the riotors find Debi - a Hindu boy and they bring down the curtain to his life. Gian comes to Kerward house to join Sundari. And they joined in the convoy. Dewan Bahadur unwillingly joins the convoy. He was very much affected with the death of his wife Radha. He felt for his disability to cremate her. Sundari is heartbroken to hear the words. The journey seems to say nothing to him. He feels it is an unwanted thing. He wishes to live in the same house in the memory of his wife. On the way the convoy ground to a halt for an hour, it is because to let another convoy to pass that is going in the onoosite direction They are nervously waiting for the convoy to leave. They are not sure about their fate. The convoy which is in the opposite direction went rumbling past. Suddenly Sundari said Gian, “My father is missing”. Gian made an attempt to search for Sundari’s father. But the convoy cannot wait for someone’s old man. Patrick Mulligan ordered Gian to move with them. Thus the novel ends and the author let to the readers to guess about Dewan-bahadur Tekchand. Gian and Sundari continue their iournevy of freedom as refugees.The novel show Malgonkar’s deep involvement in the history of this country and his concern for values. A Bend in the Ganges can be seen as a multi dimensional novel with multiple view points. In the novel Shiva Nataraja statue is used as a Symbol. The statue of Lord Shiva serves a powerful symbol in A Bend in the Ganges. The statue of Shiva is the deity in the prayer room of the ‘Little House’. It was discovered by Dada Talwar, Gian’s grandfather while digging up his field. It was the Dada shifted his devotion from Vishnu, the preserver, to Shiva, the destroyer and though Shiva brought prosperity and triumph to the “Little House”. As soon as Gian reaches home, Aji the grand mother remained him to “Remove your shoes and wash your feet”, “And then go and do your namaskar to Shiva” (25). He entered the small prayer room to seek the blessing of the family deity Shiva. There is a belief that every thing happens due to the grace of Shiva. In the mythical belief Shiva is the god of destruction, hence in this family he is considered as a preserver. He offers grace to his devotes, he blesses the Little Houses. Gian returns from the Cellular Jail. He visits Konshet. Gian is inneed of a job so he decided to meet Dewan-Bahadur Techand. Gian sells the Shiva statue to Debi’s father for job. From this Shiva had selected the right place to continue his further actions. It also denotes Gian’s connection with Sundari. Shiva in the Kerwad House from Little House, Preserves both the houses and destroys the evil. Shafi Usman the evil thing who takes revenge upon Debi come to the Kerwad House and killed his mother. Shafi tried to kill Debi also, but he was saved by the Shiva statue. Gian protects himself from Shafi’s bullet with the Shiva. Sundari is very much angry that her mother fired infront of her eyes. Then she takes Shiva statue and crushed shafi’s head. Gian uses the Shiva statue as a shield to protect him from the bullet. Sundari uses it as a weapon and kills Shafi. Shiva statue plays the role of destroyer and preserver. He preserves his devotees and destroys the evils that 58 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 come upon them. Thus Shiva symbolizes life and death. CONCLUSION Through the novel Malgonkar gives the message that- none of the religions of the world supports violence. Violence is unjustifiable and inhuman whatever may be the cause – whether it results from a sense of injustice done to a person, or to his family, or to his near and dear, or from a sense of patriotism and thirst for freedom, or from an open war, or from racial discrimination. Thus to conclude we can say that Manohar Malgonkar’s A Bend in the Ganges is an avant-grade novel with ‘partition’ as its central theme. The novel highlights on the colonial past of India. Through Hindu- Muslim conflicts, and many such conflicts the narrator actually throws light on the sufferings of colonial India. WORKS CITED Malgonkar, Manohar. A Bend in the Ganges. New York: The Viking Press, 1965. Amur, G.S. Manohar Malgonkar. New Delhi: Arnold Heinemann, 1973 Arulandram, H.G.S. “A Bend in the Ganges: A study of Violence”.Rajasthan Journal of English Studies. 6 July 1977. Mosley, Loenard. The Last Days of British Raj, London: Weidenfed and Nicolson. Shahne, V.A. “Theme, Title and Structure is Khushwant Singh’s Train to Pakistan”. Literary Criterion. Vol. 9. Mysore, 1970. Singh, Khushwant “A Forgetful Nation in with Malice towards One and All”. The Hindustan Times, January 31.

59 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

WOODS FOR LEARNING: ECOPSYCHOLOGY IN JEAN CRAIGHEAD GEORGE’S MY SIDE OF THE MOUNTAIN

Susan Joshi Assistant Professor, Department of English St. Aloysius College ,Elthuruth, Thrissur dist. e-mail: [email protected], Mob-9846331203

ABSTRACT When we look far into history we see that humans evolved in natural settings and were deeply connected to their ecological environments. In the 18th century, poet and writer, Samuel Johnson, wisely stated, “Deviation from nature is deviation from happiness.” Could those natural settings not only become an avenue by which we find happiness in the 21st century, but also provide new psychological insights that help motivate generations toward environmental sustainability?

The highly engrossing consumerist culture and the consequences of globalization have discernibly influenced our thoughts and lives. Under the sway of the social media and visual culture , devaluing the rich natural bounties man is on a mad pursuit after technology. Instead of experiencing things for real and sensing the rejuvenating vibes of nature, humans are trading them for virtual reality. Its high time for an introspection on our preconceived notions and judgments on life ,lifestyle ,nature and man. In today’s atomized disjointed technological society with so little attention paid to the individual , men need more than ever the inner strength to carry them through the daily pressures. In this context it would be justifiable to have a comprehensive analysis of the immense possibilities of practicing a nature centered life right from childhood . What is learned as kids stay for long and this understanding promotes educators to instill values , morals and eco-friendliness in young age itself so that it grows with them. But the threatening fact is that even the kids are getting addicted to technology and loosing contact with nature. The young generation prefers to remain indoors and stay wired .We are fast approaching a time when children would no longer play outdoors, their laughter would vanish from woods and fields, and they no longer make out the wonder and joy of nature. Today, kids are aware of the global threats to the environment but their physical contact, their intimacy with nature, is quickly fading. Ecopsychology studies the relationship between human beings and the natural world through ecological and psychological principals. A fundamental 60 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 concept for ecopsychology is that it is psychologically damaging for humans to live disconnected from their ecological context, as most of us do in contemporary urban industrial cultures. Since the early 1990s, ecopsychology has been primarily concerned with healing the break up through therapeutic techniques that encourage mindfulness, daily ritual, heightened awareness, wilderness experience, the development of a sense of place, and other practices that help people experience their ecological embeddedness— thereby relieving them of the depression, stress, anxiety, longing, and grief that are characteristic of the disconnected state. Child psychologists Phenice and Griffore are of the opinion that it is important to help children discover what has been termed as their ecopsychological self. Its the child’s natural sense of self in relation to the natural world. Children are born with a natural sense of relatedness to nature and this innate and developmental tendency towards biophilia or affiliation with nature need to be nurtured in their earliest years .Children display instinctive feelings of continuity with nature .It is well established by their fascination for fairy tales set in nature and populated by animal characters. Research has also demonstrated that children’s positive encounters with nature can formulate an enriching environmental ethic. If children’s developing sense of self becomes disconnected from the natural world, then nature comes to be seen as something to be controlled and dominated rather than loved and preserved. The child develops biophobia that can range from discomfort and fear in natural places to a prejudice against nature and disgust for whatever is not manmade, managed or air-conditioned . Jean Craighead George’s My Side of the Mountain is a novel that sketches vividly the child-nature interaction . It features a boy who learns about courage, independence, and the need for companionship while attempting to live in a forested area of New York state. It skillfully blends themes of nature, courage, curiosity, and the balance between the need for solitude and the desire to find one’s place in society. The protagonist of the novel is Sam Gribley, a 12-year-old boy who intensely dislikes living in his parents’ cramped New York City apartment with his eight siblings. He loves nature and wants to live in the wilderness, away from people and material possessions. He decides to run away to his great-grandfather’s abandoned farm in the Catskill Mountains to make a home among the trees, the birds, and the animals that inhabit the mountain . The novel begins in the middle of Sam’s story, with Sam huddled in his tree house home in the forest during a severe blizzard. Every page of the novel is replete with the theme of emotional attachment to the land . Sam knows that in order to live solely off the land, he must trust and respect his new surroundings. Without all the uproar of the city to distract Sam, he can spend long hours watching how the woodland creatures interact with one another and with the environment. From these observations, Sam learns how he can take advantage of the natural bounty to feed, clothe, and house himself. Child psychologist Sobel advocates that in addition to regular contact with nature, one of the best ways to foster empathy during early childhood is to cultivate children’s relationships with animals. Young children feel a natural kinship with and are implicitly drawn to animals and especially baby animals .They are an endless source of wonder for children, fostering a caring attitude and 61 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 sense of responsibility towards living things. Children interact intuitively and naturally with animals, talk to them, and invest in them emotionally. Sam too has an innate liking for the flora and fauna around him. He establishes an emotional connection with the animal and plant life and observes all kinds of wondrous events. Some of them are creepy, some others are inspiring. The reader meets Frightful, Sam’s pet peregrine falcon,and The Baron, a weasel that Sam befriends. They become his close associates . Sam’s observation of his first sunrise on the mountain sets the stage for the theme dealing with his connection to nature.”When the sky lightened, when the birds awoke, I knew I would never again see anything so splendid as the round red sun coming up over the earth.” (MSM 27).These moments give him increasing respect for nature and its offerings. As he observes the wildlife, plants, and changing seasons around him, he learns how to survive by making use of his knowledge. If he couldn’t turn his observations into practical skills, he can’t endure the harsh conditions. He understands which plants and vegetables are edible and which ones can be put to other uses. He learns how Frightful and the Baron manage to survive during winter, helps the local deer find nourishment by cutting down tree branches for them to eat, and overcomes his own vitamin deficiency by eating the right foods. He had stored food, built a stove to warm his home, and even created a ventilation system for himself and Frightful. So, when the winter finally ends, Sam knows that he has survived his ultimate test. Another insightful aspect is the reintegration of Sam into the society. He who desired complete solitude in the early part of the novel later realizes that he needs human friendships as well and admits people back into his life. Though he is torn about his father’s plan to erect a real house in the woods, and is concerned about sharing his space again, instead of running away he decides to stay. He has learnt to be sensitive to his family that cares enough to change the way they live just for him. He has already proven that he can survive in the wilderness on his own and it has given him much independence. . Ecopsychologists recognize that a capacity to live in balance with nature is essential to human emotional and spiritual well-being .Richard Louv in his book Last Child in the Woods: Saving Our Children From Nature-Deficit Disorder reveals why children (and the rest of us) need direct experience with nature and includes new research that shows the necessity of direct experience in nature to healthy development. Louv coined a new phrase, nature-deficit disorder, to characterize “the human costs of alienation from nature”. He listed it as diminished use of the senses, attention difficulties, and higher rates of physical and emotional illnesses. More than just raising an alarm, Louv offers practical solutions like following the traditional nature activities of gardening, hiking, fishing etc. to get reconciled with nature. He considers a first hand experience of nature as a curative therapy for every malady. In keeping with the observations of Richard Louv, it’s found that Sam masters the lessons of survival while living in the open . His interaction with nature makes him focused, observant and self reliant. He does things which were impossible for him till then. The confidence and self-sufficiency he gained in his woodland life would have been just a dream if he had stayed in his city home .

62 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

In the contemporary society it might be difficult to replicate a similar scenario as in the novel or make children live in the wild without parental care for long. But it could be compensated to a great extend through revising the curriculum with a green motif and incorporating diversified field programmes offering nature experience. Foremost among them is the medium of forest schools. They use the woods and forests as a means to build independence and self-esteem in children and young adults. It’s a type of outdoor education in which children (or adults) visit forests/woodlands and learn personal, social and technical skills. Forest school is both a pedagogy and a physical entity, with the use often being interchanged. CONCLUSION Environment friendly campaigns and sustainable living practices can further enrich the ecopsychological self developed in the children and create greater awareness and empathy in children for the environment .If they are deprived in childhood of the inspiration that derives from exploring freely in the natural world, they are unlikely to seek nature as their life’s work. Therefore the ecopsychologists view the reconnecting of humans and nonhuman nature not merely as an end in itself, but as a step toward healing the planet. Works Cited Barrows,A.”The Ecopsychology of Child Development” Ecopsychology, Restoring the Earth, Healing the mind . Eds. T. Roszak, M.E. Gomes & A.D. Kanner . New York: Sierra Press, 1995,Print. Faber Taylor, A, Wiley, A, Kuo, F.E., & Sullivan, W.C. “Growing up in the inner city: Green spaces as places to grow”. Environment and Behavior, 1998, Print . Phenice, L. & Griffore, R.”Young Children and the Natural World.” Contemporary Issues in Early Childhood. 2003.Print, 167-178 George,Jean Craighead . My Side of the Mountain . New York: Penguin ,2004.Print Knight,S. Forest schools and Outdoor Learning in the Early years. London:Sage Publications,2009,Print. Louv, Richard. Last Child In The Woods: Saving Our Children From Nature-deficit Disorder. Chapel Hill, NC : Algonquin Books Of Chapel Hill, 2005. Print. Sobel, David. Beyond Ecophobia: Reclaiming the Heart of Nature Education, Great Barrington, MA: The Orion Society,1996.Print.

63 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

VERONIKA DECIDES TO DIE: A MODERN NOVEL DISPLAYING THE BLACK AND WHITE SPECTRUM OF MODERN LIFE

Megha Elizabeth Raju Assistant Professor on Contract, Department of Communicative English Deva Matha College Kuravilangad, Kottayam Dist. Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT “Nowadays people know the price of everything and value of nothing” said, Oscar Wilde in The Picture of Dorian Gray. Even if we feel our life is worth living, there are times when our soul encounters a question; ‘is life really worth living?’ The reason for such an encounter could be either unique to one’s self or common to the entire mankind. We all move on without bothering about force and power of the word “Life”. Ours is not an easy journey, its destination and purpose are not always precise and worthy, its wings are not always strong, its visions are not always sharp, its perceptions and preaching are not always true, its companions are not always trustworthy and its dreams are not always colorful. So we should not forget the fact that our life is not monotonous, but its mood and tune changes, which can be either pleasant or the most unpleasant.

Life has become more complicated for the modern man dealing with complicated technology and complex targets. Human being, the only specie who is blessed with the power of reasoning is standing puzzled, staring at the reflection of his life which has lost its meaning and worth. In Scott McCracken’s essay titled “Imagining the Modernist City,” we could analyse the issues and crisis of modern population dwelling in cities of today’s world. The essayist says; Urban life was qualitatively different, if contradictory. On the one hand, the opportunity was there to break free from family ties, religious supervision, social prejudices, and the inhibiting oversight of one’s neighbours. On the other hand, the lack of these social anchors could be disorienting, leaving the city dweller lost and rootless, and lacking a history or the common memories that give rise to community and solidarity. Nor should the primary economic reason for growing urban populations be forgotten. People were drawn to the city by the prospect of work. The breakdown of traditional bonds was useful to the owners of large industrial concerns as it offered a workforce without other resources. The experience of urban was, therefore, caught between the excitement of liberation and fear of isolation and exploitation. (643) 64 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Veronika Decides to Die by Paulo Coelho is something more than a mere psychological thriller. It touches the conscience, and directs the thoughts and concepts of humans about their life. It has a profound influence on human race especially on the generation titled as “New Generation”; bearing a fragile mind in their sound body. When life fails to bring in home the colors, merry and jubilation which the young people of today expect, they readily reach at a conclusion that their life is boring and leading a life of this sort is completely absurd. They are living in the world of technology where everything is at their finger tip. The role of science and technology in the human life has shifted the entire concept about human beings and human life. In Technological Revolution and Human Evolution, we read; With the ever deeper incursion of science and technology into the natural world, society, everyday life, and our very bodies, human beings and technology are imploding. A growing number of theorists contend that the age of humanism is over and that we are morphing into a new ‘posthumanist’ condition. With the eruption of new forms of media culture, the internet and cyberspace, transgenic species, cloning, frozen embryos, and nanomachines built from atoms, the reality principle of modernity and all Western culture has been irrevocably altered. Together, science and technology are undermining firm boundaries between reality/unreality, natural/artificial, organic/inorganic, biology/ technology, human/machine, and the born/the made. In a world of virtual reality, biotechnology, surrogate, mothering, neural implants, and artificial intelligence and life, reality just ain’t what it used to be. We’re becoming cyborgs and techno-bodies, while our machines are becoming “smart” and more human-like. (151) Paulo Coelho, the author of the novel we have chosen for our study, was born in 1947 in Brazil. His father was an engineer and his mother was a housewife. His parents wanted him to follow in his father’s footsteps and become an engineer. Paulo had other ideas, ideas of being a writer. His first success with literature came when he was a young boy, in school poetry competition. His parents totally opposed his wishes and did their utmost to ensure he never followed his dream. As Paulo got older, he began to rebel. He became more determined not to stick on his parent’s wishes and rules. Due to Paulo’s bizarre behaviour, his father thought that he was mentally ill. And he took action. At the age of just seventeen, his father had him admitted to a psychiatric hospital, not once but twice. In spite of everything Paulo ignored his father’s wishes and joined theatre group and obtained a job as a journalist. Worried about their son his parents readmitted him in the mental hospital. Paulo moved totally out of his parent’s control and wish so they sought the help of more psychiatrists. The doctors said to his parents that there was no way that Paulo was mad; he was just a youngster struggling his way in the world. These experiences were a major influence in writing of his book; Veronika Decides to Die. If we are ready to discover our own lives and adventures and are ready to live, our life is not an absurdity. But, if we fail to realize the value of each day we have in this world, if we see our relationships as a burden and our life an unworthy free gift then we have only one conclusion that our life is nothing but an absurdity. So, start loving life than just living life. Albert Camus, in his essay “Myth of Sisyphus”, tells us about the absurd hero Sisyphus. 65 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

We may feel Sisyphus is a completely absurd fellow. He strains his whole body to raise the whole stone, roll it and push it up a slope a hundred times over. At the very end of this long effort Sisyphus watches the stone rushing down in a few moments towards the plain. He will then push it up again to the slope and thus repeats the task. But, Camus is not ready to title Sisyphus ‘An Absurd Hero’. He says in his essay: It is during that return, that pauses, that Sisyphus interests me. A face that toils so close to stones is really stone itself! I see that man going back down with a heavy yet measured step toward the torment of which he will never know the end. That hour like a breathing-space which returns as surely as his suffering, that is the hour of his consciousness. At each of these moments when he leaves the heights and gradually sinks toward the liars of gods, he is superior to his fate. He is stronger than his rock. (10) Sometimes we may feel that our life is just absurd like the deed of Sisyphus. We may feel our actions, thoughts and struggles are useless and futile. We may even think it would have been better if we were not born. But when we go deep into the situation and examine it in favour of our existence, we can see a spark of worthiness in all our tasks. Just like Sisyphus we should feel happy and proud that at least we are doing something no matter whether it is best or worst. As Camus says, In a universe suddenly divested of illusions and lights, man feels an alien, a stranger. His exile is without remedy since he is deprived of the memory of a lost home or the hope of promised land. This divorce between man and his life, the actor and his setting, is properly the feeling of absurdity. All healthy men having thought of their own suicide, it can be seen, without further explanation, that there is a direct connection between this feeling and the longing for death. (15) What seems worth in eye of one may not be worth in the eye of another. So, never be in a hurry to judge our life worthless after encountering mere tragedies or failures. We should not label the moments in this world useless. Everything has a meaning and light of its own. Life throws us a basket of experiences. There are good and bad experiences. What we have to do is to just throw away the bad experiences and fill it with good experiences and memories. We are a ‘sea’ of potentials, we can do miracles. But for that we need a belief in our ability and strength. If we get bored with our job, change it. If we have no fun in life, make new friends. We have to discover the hidden treasures of life, never chain our lives in four walls of our office or home, instead just move out and explore different places and cities. The characters, in Veronika Decides to Die, were carefully chosen and cautiously placed as the major part of the novel surrounds a mental hospital named VILLETE. The chief characters are Veronika, Mari, Zedka and Eduard. Each of these characters has their stories and a life to reveal to the readers which, for sure, at certain points resemble our own life and circumstances we were in or are in. First let’s trace the past and present of Veronika, the chief character of this novel. Veronika, as already mentioned in the introductory page, was a girl of twenty four who decided to put an end to her meaningless life. She had cooked up an eccentric story to make her suicide look more 66 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 extraordinary and worthy that she had attempted suicide because a magazine did not know where her country (Slovenia) was. So she wanted her suicide attempt to be something in honour of her country’s cause. But, the actual reasons behind her decisions to die were something seemingly absurd yet serious. The first reason was that everything in her life was the same and once her youth was gone, the old age would begin and there would be illness and departure of her friends and so she would gain nothing by continuing to live. The second reason was more philosophical, Veronica read newspapers, watched TV and so she was aware of what was going on in the world and in her eyes everything was wrong and she had no way of putting things right and that gave her a sense of powerlessness. Using the original words of the author we could say: “that’s why she had chosen suicide; freedom at last. Eternal oblivion”. (Coelho 5) When we go deeper into the life of Veronika, we could meet her as a girl who was not given the freedom to think and do as she wished or dreamed in her life. She deliberately or forcibly tuned her life in accordance of her parent’s wishes especially her mother. Veronika’s dream since her childhood was to be a pianist. Her teacher recognized her talent and encouraged her to be a professional. But, when she told her dream to her mother, she looked at her with much love and affection and said that no one made a living playing a piano. And when Veronika asked her mother why she wanted her to have lessons on piano she replied; “To develop your artistic gifts that’s all. A husband likes that kind of things in a wife; he can show you off at parties. Forget about being a pianist, and go study law, that’s the profession for future.” (Coelho 85). Veronika did as her mother told and finished her studies, went to university, got a good degree but ended up being a librarian. If her wishes were granted, if her dreams were cherished, she would have become one of the most famous pianists in the world. She would have led a happy life enjoying moments of her life calling it the most meaningful and purposeful life. Her decision to leave the world of music and entering into a legal profession was a mistake. Veronika never viewed her life from an angle of her own passion and desires, instead she hired the views and dreams of others, pawned her valuable life for the pleasure of people around her. Veronika was a girl who forgot to live for herself, who forgot to give colours to life with her dreams. As one of the characters in this novel says; “We are allowed to make a lot of mistakes in our life except the mistakes that destroys us”. (Coelho116) Mari is powerful character who was carefully included into the novel by the author so as to reveal the complications of in the life of married women. Mari was a lawyer by her profession. She loved and respected her career a lot and so she was a successful and satisfied lawyer. But in her life too fate played its role wildly. She, who was living a normal and happy life with her husband and children, suddenly began experiencing something strange in her body. With no reason sweat was pouring down in her body and strange light in her eyes. She could not walk properly. She had never felt so frightened in her life. But Mari experienced similar pain and fear again and that led to drastic changes in her simple and quiet life. She felt intense fear and sense of alienation from reality, the same loss of self-control. Moreover, she started to feel guilty about her husband, obliged to do his own job as well as all the housework. As the days passed and the situation remained totally unresolved, the slightest thing made 67 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 her lose her temper and she started shouting and then sobbed hysterically. And so on the advice of one of the colleagues of her, she herself went to Villete, the mental hospital. Dr. Igor, the director of the hospital told her not to worry as she was suffering from nothing serious but a mere panic disorder caused by just a chemical imbalance in the body like depression. So, Dr. Igor told Mari to go back home. But to his surprise, Mari told him that she didn’t want to go back because her husband needed time to recover from those months he’d spent looking after her. Dr. Igor accepted her as a patient making it absolutely clear that it wasn’t necessary. Mari got the necessary medication and proper psychiatric treatment and fortunately her illness completely disappeared. And so, she was preparing herself to leave Villete and join her family. Unexpectedly, one day the colleague who advised her to consult a Psychiatrist came to Villete and told her that Mari had to retire from her profession. Mari could not believe her ears. She could not argue because she knew the fact that they could no longer bear a lawyer who got admitted in a mental asylum. But Mari wanted her life back. So he begged him asking: Inside here, I have lived with two sorts of people: those who have no chance of ever going back into the society and those who are completely cured but who prefer to pretend to be mad rather than face up life’s responsibilities. I want and need to learn myself again, have to convince myself that I’m capable of taking my own decisions. I can’t be pushed into decision not of my own making. (Coelho 62) The colleague was not ready to pay attention to her words. He was stubborn in implementing the company’s cruel decision on the life of a poor soul. After that incidence Mari was slowly accepting the reality, heartless deeds of people, and was slowly overcoming the shock. But fate was not ready to spare Mari. A few days later a lawyer visited her at Villete, smiled at her and said that he was there at her husband’s request. And told her: “This is an application for divorce. Obviously, though he will continue to pay all your hospital bills as long you remain in here”. (Coelho 64)Mari didn’t utter a word, she didn’t argue and she signed everything. She stood up and went to Dr. Igor’s consulting room and told him that her symptoms had returned and she can’t go back home. Dr. Igor knew that she was lying and he didn’t say anything but accepted her desire to stay in Villete. If the world was a bit merciful to Mari, if the colleagues and seniors of her firm had realized the true worth and talent of Mari, if her husband called her back to his life and hugged her with love and care which only he could provide in the world, Mari would never have chained her life in a bizarre world like Villete. Eduard’s case is not much different from that of Veronika’s. His father was a Yugoslavian Ambassador and very rich. His family had been preparing Eduard to follow his father’s footstep. But one day he met with an accident and that led to a tremendous change in his life. While he was admitted in the hospital a nurse gave him a book which was about Visionaries whose ideas had shaken the world, people, with their own vision about paradise, like Jesus Christ, Fransis of Assisi, Ignasious Loyola, Anthony, Columbus, Karl Marx, Theresa of Avila and so on. He decided to learn painting and show the world the visions those men and women had experienced. And so, he went out in search of painters and artists. His parents were worried about the life and deeds of Eduard and his eccentric affinity for 68 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 art. His father told him to finish his secondary education, so that he could set him on the path to a diplomatic career. Eduard said that he did not want to be a diplomat and he wanted to be a painter. Eduard soon heard the heart-breaking words of his father that turned his life upside down; Since you were born, we’ve built up such dreams of hoe our lives would be. You’re everything to us, our future and our past. Your Grandfathers were civil servants and I had to fight like a lion to enter the diplomatic career and make my way up the ladder. And I did all this just to create a space for you, I’ve got the pen with which I signed my first document as an ambassador and I lovingly saved it to pass on to you the day you do the same. Don’t let us down son. We won’t live forever and we want to die in peace, knowing that we’ve set you on the right path in life. ( Coelho 96) Eduard thought about his father’s words deeply. He knew very well that if he gave up his painting the Vision of Paradise would never see the light of day and nothing else in this world could give him the same feelings of joy and pleasure. Yet something forced him to tell his parents that they were right, it was just a youthful dream, and his enthusiasm of painting had passed. But Eduard’s life was not easy and normal since then. He lost the control of his mind. He was treated by specialists and was diagnosed with a rare form of schizophrenia; to feel without touch, to hear without words, to see without being near. It was too problematic for the family to look after him and so they had no choice other than to leave him in Villete. So, like Veronika, Eduard too pawned his dreams and life for the peace and happiness of his parents. When he lost the focus and destination of his soul he missed the track of his life and began leading a life reaching nowhere. Life is a miracle. It‘s a big island with hidden treasures which many of us fail to realize. Veronika, in ‘Veronika Decides to Die’, never expected that she could regain her life with a complete realisation of its purpose and meaning. She began enjoying the sun again, the mountains and even the life’s problem and she began to accept that the meaninglessness of life was no one’s fault but her alone. She never thought her life become an inspiration for people around her, to know to real worth and destination of their lives; “The young woman’s (Veronika) case though was drastic because she was so young and because she now wanted to live again, something they all knew to be impossible. Some people asked themselves “What if that happened to me? I do have a chance to live. Am I making good use of it?’ “ (Coelho 101). Yes, Veronika changed the perceptions and attitudes of people, in Villete, who decided to spend their entire life in the mental hospital and not to move to the world outside. Mari thought about her own life and future and, realized that the days she had in her hands were really worth than she expected. And so she prepared herself to leave Villete and to begin a new life serving the poor people at Bosnia. Mari said: I asked myself what I was doing in this hospital. And I thought how very interesting to be down in this square, at the Three Bridges, in the market place opposite to the theater buying apples and talking about the weather. Obviously, I’d be struggling with a lot of other neighbours, the ironic look of the people who don’t understand me, solitude, my children’s carping. But all that is just a part of life. I am thinking of going round my ex-husband’s tonight, just to say “Thank You. (Coelho 138) 69 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

The piano hall at Villete was a great relief to Veronika. She spent hours there, recollecting the musical chords she had learned and practiced at her school. There was a silence to her music, Eduard, the Schizophrenic. It was the music and the presence of Eduard that helped Veronika regain the meaning of her life. She loved Eduard beyond everything in her life and was ready to accept him because Veronika was sure her love could bring him back to his normal life. Veronika achieved the heart of Eduard. They moved out of the meaninglessness world of Villete to the new meaningful, poetic, romantic world awaiting them outside. Veronika helped Eduard to move into his world of art and ‘Vision of Paradise’. Thus Eduard fulfilled the purpose and destination of his life holding the hands of Veronika. And Veronika with a heart filled with hope and eyes wet with tears of love and gratitude said: Thank you for giving meaning to my life. I came into this world in order to go through everything I’ve gone through, attempted suicide, ruining my heart, meeting you, coming up to this castle letting you engrave my face and soul. That is the only reason I came into the world, to make you go back to the path you strayed from. (Coelho 186) Veronika Decides to Die is not an ordinary novel with one hundred and ninety-one pages. It’s a flowing river of the experiences and perceptions of its author Paulo Coelho. The plot of this novel carries sparks of suggestions and views proving the worth and worthlessness of life and takes the reader to a different world which forces him to think about his life, his actions and attitudes. We could see that Veronika bears many traits similar to a girl of modern day. The author placed her in the novel giving all the necessary elements of a modern girl; in the way she talks, the way she thinks and the way she receives her life. She is a girl who once attempted suicide as she felt her life useless, a girl who thought she had enjoyed all the pleasures of this world, a girl who believed that the future would bring her nothing new. Suicide was not a shelter for Veronika but an ultimate rest for her busy, monotonous, meaningless life. Paulo Coelho also wants to pass on his views about how we receive spiritual guidance or wisdom. His perspective involves talking about both mind and heart. In The Alchemist by Coelho one of the character says, “There are those who are vague because they do know what they’re doing but also know that the language of alchemy is addressed to the heart and not to the mind “(8). Coelho thinks that spiritual guidance comes to us in a particular form. For Coelho, spiritual guidance is more emotive. Someone tells us to change gear and to find some soul, which is certainly a part of Coelho’s message. Contemporary spirituality encourages us to spend some time on ourselves, thinking about the deep stuff, getting spiritual and finding some peace of mind. For many people, spirituality has less and less of a supernatural dimension. Rather, it has simply become a synonym for caring the inner self. One of the key stresses of Coelho’s writing is that we need to take some time to reflect: to zoom out from a routine life and think about the big questions: Am I really happy? Is what I live out each day real? Is what I believe true? He is right in proposing that spending some time for us, without reaching the experience or narcissism, can be an important part of dealing realistically with the blows that life sometimes gives us. He tries to offer something for the mind to turn over, as well as something that appeals to, and engages with our emotions. In fact, his writing is so existential, ‘so feely’, that the expression of the deeper philosophical and spiritual concepts is 70 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 rarely more than a step away from some real-life situation that we can relate to. CONCLUSION Human relations and ethics have lost their grip in today’s ‘rat-race’. A life of material achievements cannot fill the desire for peer support and solace that human mind longs for. Man is a social animal, he/she is the only specie who has given the power of choice, but in the modern world of today, we want a life least exposed to the people around us, we tenderly call it ‘privacy’ without knowing the exact implications of a life with all doors shut with suffocating air of tension and targets. Sharing and caring are precious than anything we could afford with the money we gain by pawning the same sharing and caring. Veronika Decides to Die brings before us many characters who are the reflections of our own self, our own life and our own future. It pleads us to look into our own life so as to prevent the sprouting up of more ‘villetes’ in this world. The characters are skillfully chosen from different spheres of modern life and they have been attributed with human qualities closer to a typical modern human. Veronika represents the youth of today who has given no freedom of choice. Parents ‘devote’ their life for choosing everything for their children and in turn making their children incapable of doing anything on their own. These children would lack the strength and will power to accept the turmoil and hardships in life. Depression is an inevitable term in the ‘vocabulary’ of modern man. Smiling faces and helping hands have become a part of history. Gone are the days of mutual concern and respect. We should not forget the fact that the fragmented life depicted in modern novels is not a mere literary imagination of author or his play of words. It’s a mirror reflecting our life, our mind, our thoughts, and our dreams and longings. Work Cited Coelho, Paulo. Veronika Decides to Die. New Delhi: Harper Collins Publishers India, 2010. McCracken, Scott. “ Imagining the Modernist City” from The Oxford Handbook of Modernisms.(eds) Peter Brooker, et al, Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 2010, pp. 637-654. Camus, Albert. The Myth of Sisyphus and Other Essays. New York: Vintage International,1991. Print. Coelho, Paulo. The Alchemist. New Delhi: Harper Collins Publishers India, 2005. Print. “PauloCoelho’s Blog”. paulocoelhoblog.com. 8 October 2011. web. 18 November 2013. Wilde, Oscar. The Picture of Dorian Gray. London: CRW publishing house, 2003. Print.

71 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

GLOBAL ‘CONNEXION’ AND YOUNG CHALLENGES: A STUDY OF CHETAN BHAGAT’S ONE NIGHT @ THE CALL CENTER

Neena Puduvath Guest Lecturer, English Department, Vimala College, Thrissur

ABSTRACT India has a unique culture. The wave of globalization hilted India at the end of the last century and still the country is flowing with the current of global changes. Depending on how one defines the age of youth, the majority of India’s population is young. Indian youth is embracing globalization in a unprecedented way .Chetan Bhagat is an author who has earned a distinguished reputation for his exploration of youth and national development based issues. This paper focuses on his second novel One Night @ the Call Center to explore the cosmopolitan culture of five young call centre trainees .Indian Youth is drifting away from traditional Indian culture because what the global world offers them is appealing. The paper tries to examine the identity crises faced by global Indian youth. Literature is the reflection of the society and the theme of any literary work reflects the scenario of the society. Culture is the core of the society- the source of our human identity. Culture defines us-who we are as people, how we aim to live of lives, what sort of behavior is acceptable or unacceptable and who should be rewarded or punished according to societal norms. Most important, our culture contains the implicit rule by which we live our values. India has a unique culture. The culture of India is the oldest culture of the world around 5,000 years. Indian culture is considered as the first and supreme culture of the world. Young generation is the asset of any country. India’s median age is 28 and 70 percent of the population is below thirty five. Globalization is transforming the internal dynamics of India and India’s interaction with the world. Indian youth is embracing globalization in such a way that previous generation had never imagined. For the youth worldwide, what global culture has to offer is appealing. So the young generation of India is drifting away from Indian culture. Key words: Indian youth, cosmopolitan culture, Indian culture, global culture

All the novels of Chetan Bhagat has depicted Indian youths who are influenced by globalization. In his novels, the writer teals with the problems faced by the Indian youths, the ups and downs in their lives, their friendships, and the opposition that they face from each other. The author himself belongs to the generation influenced by globalization and therefore knows very well the mental set up of young India. Like his first novel Five Point Someone, his Second novel One Night @ the Call Center is also set in Delhi, which is similar to other metropolitan cities like Mumbai, Bangalore and Chennai. The novel deftly exfoliates the cosmopolitan life style of five

72 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 young call center employees working in Connexion call center, Varun, Priyanka, Esha and Radhika, set in one night .Indeed drinking, dancing, and partying at 32 milestones, working for a company headquarters at Boston, dating at Mocho cafe with its colored Arabian lights and at Pizza hut at Sahara Mall and going to the night club for ‘Bed’ for break, the call center executives may easily be recognized with any young upcoming generation of any ultra modern society. These six characters are forced to change their names (Shyam to Sam, Varun to vroom and Radhika to Regina James and Esha to Eliza singer). Their business names also have the taste of cosmopolitanism. Apart from the erosion of identity, the employees are trained to use an Americanized form of English. Before begin to work, the call centers teach their workers “accent neutralization”. They take pronunciation classes and are given handbooks that refer to the “elimination of regional influence” and encourage trainees to become more comprehensible to native speakers of English by ‘improving pronunciation’. Vroom compares his dehumanizing call center work to prostitution. Vroom implies new materialistic culture in India that mirrors American consumerism. Told through the eyes of the protagonist, Shyam, it is a story of almost lost love, thwarted ambition, absence of family affection, Pressure of patriarchal set up, and the work environment of a globalized office. Shyam loves but has lost Priyanka, who is now planning an arranged marriage with another. The problem of identity crises is explicit in Shyam-Priyanka relationship. Priyanka loves Shyam but her mother like any other Indian mother hastily decides her wedlock with a ‘suitable’ boy. Undoubtedly she finds in Ganesh Gupta, who packs close to hundred grand a year at Microsoft in the U.S, a suitable bride for her daughter. Unlike shyam Priyanka who is not firm and decisive accepts the proposal due to the immense pressure from her mother and Ganesh. Even though Priyanka is a part of globalised world, she continues to have deep rooted traditional Indian value which forces her to go ahead with the proposal. The mother of Priyanka emotionally blackmails her daughter as she already enjoyed her life, now wants to enjoy the life of her daughter as well. However, things turn out to be different in the end and Priyanka chooses her love over her mother’s wishes for the sake of her own happiness. Another relationship that is being narrated in the novel is that of Varun and Esha. Vroom, the highly masculine character loves Esha. But the aspirant Esha wants to be a model. She does not mind sleeping with a big gun of fashion industry for getting a break to walk on a modeling ramp. Only to realize later on that she has been rejected as a model. She could not refrain herself from thinking of attempting the unnatural way of terminating her life. Radhika is the only character in Which Some traits of Indianess or Indian womanhood is found. She works hard day and night to keep her parents in law in good humor. However, in course of chance upon the infidelity of her husband Anuj and decides to walk out from her marriage and her in- laws. The revolt of Radhika is the sheer display of rejection of the traditional Indianess. The Novel takes a sudden change when the executives desperate in their effort to overcome the pressure opt to visit a night club that is going to be a temporary escape from the event of night. While retuning they face a threatening situation when their quails crash into a construction site hanging over a mesh of iron construction rods. AS the rod began to yield slowly, they started to panic. They are unable to call for help as there is no mobile network at that place. However, it is at this point that Shyam’s mobile phone rings, in spite of the non-availability of network in that

73 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 area. The phone call is from God. He speaks to all of them and gives them suggestions to improve their life. The conversation with God motivates the group to such an extent that they get ready to face their problem with utmost determination and motivation. They were already almost scared to death, now they start grasping when God promises, “Bye now. Remember, I an inside you when you need me”. Soon after the incidence of God, the six people save themselves not only from death but also from professional and personal crises. The business at the Call Center is saved. Priyanka reunites with Shyam and Radhika walks out of her infidel husband and starts living with Esha, who quits her modeling aspirations and works for an NGO, apart from continuing in the Call Center. Vroom and Shyam fulfill their lives ambition by opening their own web designing company. Reflections of the Bhagavath Gita can be deciphered in the works of Chetan Bhagat. The message to ignite oneself when in the doldrums by listening to the inner conscience can be interpreted from this novel. The concept of ‘Aham Brahmasmi’ is identical to the invigorating long distance phone call in One Night @ the Call Center. CONCLUSION Globalization is transforming the internal dynamics of India and India’s interaction with the world. The primary ambition of young Indians from the smallest villages to the largest cities is to become rich. Young people hope to achieve this through enterprises and education. High paying jobs in Hi-tech and media have replaced the once most highly regarded carriers in India like Civil service and Medicine. Youth are driven by the new social contract created by liberalization that ‘making money is respectable’. They demand a more cosmopolitan society that is a full-fledged member of the global economy. They wish to start their own business and contribute to a more vibrant economy. Cosmopolitan young characters of Chetan Bhagat have nothing essentially Indian in them. They are not intrinsically cosmopolitan but it is expected of them. In an exclusive global society they could not be but one. India needs to mould a generation who assimilates the positive from all cultures. Bibliography 1. Bhagat, Chetan. One Night @ the Call Center. New Delhi: Rupa andCo, 2005. Print 2. Milner, A. Literature, Culture and Society: UCL press London, 1995.Print. 3. Barry, Peter. Beginning Theory: An Introduction to Literary and Cultural Theory. New Delhi: Viva Books, 2008 Print. 4. Nayar, Pramod K. Contemporary Literature and Cultural Theory. Delhi: Pearson, 2010, Print. 5. Nayar, Pramod K. An Introduction to Cultural Studies. New Delhi: Viva News Papers: 1. The Business Line: Taking points from the pages of IIT life. Saturday May15, 2014. 2. The Hindu: Five Points, Paranthas and Some friends. May 25, 2004.

74 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

VARIED VOICES OF SYMBOLS: A SEMIOTIC STUDY OF THE PLAY THE GLASS MENAGERIE .

Sangeetha T.S. Assistant Professor on Contract, Dept.of English, Sree Krishna College Guruvayur Thrissur Dist.

ABSTRACT To Saussure, semiotics is a science which studies the role of signs as part of social life. Symbols could be anywhere. The shortest definition is that it is the study of signs, or the theory of signs. This paper is focusing on the theory of semiotics and its implementation in the play The Glass Menagerie, by Tennessee Williams. For doing so, the key symbol in this play ‘unicorn’, has been taken for detailed discussion. As semiotics is the study of signs or symbols, my attempt is to study this play from the semiotic perspective. The whole story is centered on Laura, one the four main characters in this play. Since the ‘unicorn’ is the mirror image of Rose, it won’t be unsuitable to say that the whole story is very much connected with this unicorn. Though it does not have any life, it communicates a lot of things in both the play and the play. As pantomime tells a particular story with the use of movements and facial expressions, the unicorn also tells a story regarding Rose’s turmoil in her inner psyche. So the study of the unicorn as a symbol of this play opens the way for a comprehensive analysis of the other numerous symbols used in this play. So, here, my attempt is to discuss this play in detail, on the matrix of semiotics.

Semiotics could be anywhere. The shortest definition is that it is the study of signs, or the theory of signs. To Saussure, Semiotics is a science which studies the role of signs as part of social life. Beyond the most basic definition, there is considerable variation amongst leading semioticians as to what Semiotics involves, although a distinctive concern is with how things signify and with representational practices and systems (in the form of codes). Semiotics, also called semiotic studies or (in the Saussurean Tradition) Semiology, is not only the study of signs and sign processes (semiosis), but also of indication, designation, likeness, analogy, metaphor, symbolism, signification and communication. Semiotics is closely related to the field of linguistics, which for its part, studies the structure and meaning of language more specifically. Tennessee Williams believed that symbols are nothing but the natural speech of drama. The Glass Menagerie, by Tennessee Williams, is a touching elegy rather than a tragic play, put forth a lot of symbols. The Glass Menagerie was published in New York in 1945. It created a new epoch in the history of Western theatre, and Williams seemed to succeed O’Neill in the field 75 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 of American drama. The play ran over a year in New York and it won for Williams the New York Drama Critics Circle Award for having produced the best American play of the period. In addition, it won the Sidney Howard Memorial Award and the fourth annual award of the Catholic monthly, The Sign. The play The Glass Menagerie contains four characters, one of them being the narrator. The play is centred round a mother’s unsuccessful attempt to find a suitor for her daughter who consoles herself with the collection of glass animals. It mirrors the human experience in depth and clarity. This play grew up in the Depression and underwent the common collapse of family fortunes. This play is presented in the background of the early 1930s when the Great Economic Depression strode like a colossus in the American society. Williams was then working in the warehouse in the International Shoe Company in St. Louis. The sense of frustration that dominated his mind in those days is depicted in the character of Tom in The Glass Menagerie. Amanda Wingfield, Tom’s mother, often goes to her past and boasts of her youth, when she has been a popular belle who enchanted seventeen gentlemen callers. But her vanity does not stand in the way of being a loving mother. The portrait appears to be that of Edwina, the playwright’s mother. Tom’s father, who never appears on the stage and is recalled by the others as a man who fell in love with long distance seems to be Cornelius Coffin Williams, the author’s father. The author’s sister, Rose, is presented in the character of Laura. Her short-lived business studies, disappointing relationships and withdrawal from reality are all portrayed in Laura. The title refers to the collection of little glass animals that Rose collected and kept in her room. It has often been said by many critic that Tennessee Williams showed exceptional skill in the writing of dialogue that is at once poetical and colloquial. A gold ‘memory’ play, The Glass Menagerie, is a passive nostalgic family portrait. The Fire Escape, Blue Mountain, the photograph of Mr. Wingfield, the warehouse, the movies, the Paradise Dance Hall, The Merchant Marine, Rubicam’s Business College, the gentleman caller, blue roses and jonquils constitute some of the symbols in the play. But the major symbol in this play, as the title suggests, is the glass menagerie itself. Glass menagerie is the collection of glass animals belonging to Laura. Thus the menagerie represents the imaginative world to which Laura devotes herself – a world that is colorful and enticing but based on fragile illusions. The glass animals are very delicate and it is very nice to see, but vulnerable to easy breakage. Despite being very pleasant objects these can make no impact in the modern world. These little glass animals suggest the beauty in fragility. They are protected from the harshness of reality. Williams also suggests that the little animals are cold and lifeless; their world is a sterile one. All the members in the Wingfield family also lead their life in a cold way. The glass unicorn is Laura’s favorite piece among her glass animals. Symbolically the unicorn mirrors Laura herself, as it represents her peculiarity. Being her favorite piece amongst her menagerie, both unicorn and Laura share many similar psychological and physical characteristics, in turn resulting with similar fates at the end of the play. The unicorn is a creature of myth, not of reality. It is a graceful creature from fantasy, which has the physical appearance of a horse but with a horn protruding out of its head. This animal has no existence in the real world. So it is unique among the other animals in Laura’s glass menagerie. Having no complaints to anybody, this single piece remains lonely and silent among other glass animal pieces of Laura. Laura says to Jim, “Well, if he does he doesn’t complain about it. He stays on a shelf with some horses that don’t have horns and all of them seem to get along nicely together” (80). 76 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Like the unicorn, Laura too is unusual, lonely and ill-adapted to existence in the world in which she lives. Laura is fragile and has a strange kind of beauty which the world makes no place for. Being crippled, a kind of inferiority complex renders her overly shy. As she is not like other girls, Laura does not want to mingle with them. Her thoughts, interests, attitudes, behavior and everything is different from those of other girls. She lives in a world of illusions where she is befriended only by some old phonograph records and her glass menagerie. She is unable to face reality as it is. As the single horn makes the unicorn different from all other horses, this strange character of Laura makes her different from all other girls in the society. In this way Laura is as unique as the unicorn. The unicorn is a legendary animal from European folklore that resembles a white horse. Its single horn at the forehead has another signification. In the encyclopedias, its horn was said to have the power to render poisoned water potable and to heal sickness. While the single horn makes the unicorn unique from all other animals, the introvert nature and strange hobbies make Laura unique from other girls. The single horn, of the unicorn, helps Laura to heal her ‘sickness’; ‘sickness’ which is nothing but the harsh reality. When she sees this glass unicorn, she identifies it with herself. Both are different from others. Then she feels to be a little bit consoled and become satisfied with the present position. She escapes into the world of illusion or a world of imagination. And that escapism to the illusions is the only remedy for the ‘sicknesses’ of bitter, reality about which Laura is afraid of too much. Another specialty of this unicorn is that it is considered to be the symbol of purity and grace. And it is believed to be captured only by virgin. Here the possessor of the unicorn that is Laura is a virgin and she is very pure. She has a special kind of grace which other girls lacks; the grace of innocence and simplicity. Laura is nicknamed as Blue rose by Jim. She explains to Jim how she got such a name: I was out of school a little while with pleurosis. When I came back you asked me what was the matter. I said I had pleurosis – you thought I said Blue Roses. That’s what you always called me after that! (73) The name Blue Rose is very suitable to Laura. Like blue roses she is also strange in this real world. Blue roses will be very nice to see. But we enjoys its beauty by imagine them since it is not exist in the real world. Like that Laura’s character also highly attractive but it has no place in the modern world of reality. Blue roses are often portrayed in literature and art as a symbol of love and prosperity to those who seek it. It does not exist in nature as a result of genetic limitations being imposed upon natural variance. Laura is called Blue rose only by Jim whom she loved in her heart. When he called her that name, she was becoming happy. Whenever she is reminded of Jim the image of blue roses come to her mind. It suggests the deepness of love of Laura to Jim. In this way also blue rose is an important symbol in this play. In this modern world Laura has no place. In this modern world of sophistication, she is not provided any space to expose her imaginative world. The world of reality can never more admire her inner beauty full of childlike innocence. So she has no friends other than her loneliness and illusions. Like the unicorn, she hasn’t any complaints against any one. Though she cannot get along with the realities in the modern world, she can understand the silent motionless language of her glass animals which might be impossible to any other girl of her age. She has not heard any complaints from this glass unicorn. That means unicorn is satisfied with its present position among

77 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 other animals, in the same way Laura is satisfied with her present existence in the modern society. She says to Jim, “I haven’t heard any arguments among them!” (80) Jim, the gentleman caller, compels her to dance with him and gives her confidence by insisting her that her crippled leg is nothing but a small defect that she must try to ignore. Then she starts dancing with Jim. In her waltz, each step that Laura puts forward is her step to a new world. This waltz is not a mere joke to Laura, but it gives her a new spirit and strength to enter into the world of reality. Suddenly the glass unicorn falls down while they are dancing clumsily and then its horn breaks off. Now it is never more unique. But Laura does not feel any sorrow. She simply says, “I’ll just imagine he had an operation. The horn was removed to make him feel less – freakish!” (82). This fragile beauty of her glass animals brings her into the world of immense joy to where she wants to escape. When Jim takes the glass unicorn in his own hands, it suggests that, now Laura herself is in his arms. He can destroy it or handle it with good care. She says to him, “Oh, be careful – if you breathe, it breaks!” (79). It is true in the case of Laura too. Mere breath is enough to break her heart and dreams. Jim’s words – “I go out all of the time with a girl named Betty. She’s a home-girl like you, and Catholic, and Irish, and in a great many ways we-get along fine.” (85) – shatter all the dreams of Laura. Words are produced by taking breathe in or out. In that case, words can be considered as breathe. Since a mere breathe is enough to breaks the glass animals, Jim’s breathe or word break Laura; her dreams, hopes, everything. This incident happens towards the last part of the conversation between Laura and Jim. The single horn having been broken, the unicorn is no more different from other animals in Laura’s glass menagerie. Now it is like other horses existing in this world of reality. Sans the strange horn; the unicorn has also entered into a new world, the world of other animals. Now it enjoys the company with other animals, in the same way Laura wants to be like other girls around her. So, both Laura and unicorn enjoy their new position in the real world. When Jim kisses her and admires her beauty, she firms her position in her new world of reality and is transformed into a typical modern American girl. But after realizing the truth that Jim is engaged to another girl, again her new position in this world of bitter realities is being questioned. She feels to be rejected from her new world of realities to which she has entered a few moments before. Again she retreats into her old world of illusions to escape from the realities. Then what’s the use of this unicorn which has no horn on its forehead! Now it is no more her favorite piece because it is not unique and it doesn’t mirror Laura. Laura can not love that piece anymore like she did before. So she gives that broken glass unicorn to Jim as a souvenir. This suggests that she sends away all her dreams with him. Her buds of hopes regarding her future, dreams and worldly existence are going away with Jim. He should be reminded of her when he sees this broken glass piece. He must read the broken heart of Laura from this broken glass unicorn. In the modern world man is often caught in a net of illusions, created by himself. Under different unfavorable circumstances he tries to visualize that he is different from what he really is, and tries to escape from the harsh realities of life which he faces. He may be taken into drinking to forget the in-tolerable present. In The Glass Menagerie, Tennessee Williams traces the effect of illusion upon the individual in difficult situations by exploring the physical, mental, and spiritual

78 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 state of the Wingfield family. The members of the Wingfield family – Amanda Wingfield, Tom, and Laura – are hell-ridden creatures conditioned by extreme poverty, constant ill-health, and the consequent mental distress. The father of the household has escaped from his responsibilities by deserting his wife and children. The harsh and bitter realities of life haunt every member of the family incessantly, but they all seek an escape from the harsh truth into a world of comforting illusion. The chief problem which faces the family is Laura herself. She is crippled and one of her legs is shorter than the other. This defect has resulted in various complications. She is unable to face the external world and therefore escapes into a state of psychic withdrawal into her own self. She has created a small artificial world of her own, the world of glass animals, and she herself has almost become one of these animals living in their beautiful but fragile world. A women already belonging to the world of the illusory past, Amanda is creating and artificial almost theatrical world of her own, to tide over her desperate condition. She assumes that the “slight disadvantages” (26) in Laura could be overcome, if she can develop charm and vivacity. She thinks it is possible for her to transform her ‘crippled’ daughter into an irresistible beauty by artificial means. We see that Amanda work hard in the preparation to receive the gentleman caller. The whole apartment is given a glittering new appearance. Laura herself is transformed into a piece of glass, given a brief glow, not actual, not lasting. Thus in her attempt to save Laura from those pieces of glass animals, she uses her daughter as a fragile object of her own will and in the process renders her into a piece of glass. After knowing the truth that Jim is already engaged, Amanda thinks that her failure to catch Jim was due to the joke played on her by Tom. In the end the creatures of illusion see the truth about themselves for a moment and then quickly relapse to their world of illusion. Tom moves on to the movies, Amanda back to the family and Laura blows off the romantic candles and takes up the collection of toys once again. The world of illusion being a safer escape from truth establishes itself as the remaining form of the good and cursed. Unicorn has a passive impact on almost all the characters in this play. Laura, like the unicorn, is strange. And this strangeness creates a kind of distress to the whole family. For rescuing her from that strangeness Amanda and Tom get prepared to receive a gentleman caller for Laura. But that attempt also results in a total failure. And that failure has not been affected to Laura only, but it affects the remaining two of the family. The gentleman caller, Jim also feels to be guilt for giving hopes to Laura. All the people in the Wingfield family, have ‘wings’– as the family name suggests – to fly away from the world of harsh realities to their own worlds. The name Laura itself has a lot of meanings. The name Laura is believed to be originated from the name of a tree called laurel. The laurel leaves were thought to be a remedy against poison as well as tokens of peace and quiet. Here Laura also becomes a remedy for the ‘poison’ of sophistication in the modern society. Like the symbolic meanings of the laurel leaves, Laura also is very peaceful and quiet. She remains peaceful and wants peace. She is not argumentative like her brother Tom, she keeps quiet before everything. When Amanda scolds her for not attending the class regularly, she doesn’t try to justify her. She just tells her the truth. Laurel is the symbol of victory too. Laura won to some extent. By facing a harsh incident from the reality – Jim, her

79 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 lover, is being engaged to another girl – it is once more proved that the modern world of harsh reality is full of sorrows and frustrations. And the world of illusion itself is the apt one to those who want peace. Here Laura’s belief wins. In that perspective, it is no one but Laura won at last. What she does is the right thing; keep distance with reality full worries and live in illusions which are rather comfortable. Unicorn is an illusionary ‘home’ to where Laura is trying to escape when she is overwhelmed by the realities of the present. It takes a symbolism of escapism too. Almost all the characters in this play try to escape from the realities. Amanda find comfort with her past; Tom in movies and Laura in her glass menagerie. The play The Glass Menagerie is a mix of many symbols besides the glass menagerie and blue roses. The Fire Escape suggests that, the people in the Wingfield apartment—are figuratively—burning. Their only immediate escape is the fire escape which serves as an exit from the apartment. Blue Mountain represents the Amanda’s illusion, the gentle, beautiful life she led as a girl. The photograph of Mr. Wingfield is a very important symbol in this play. This picture dominates the living room—and in a sense, their whole life. To Amanda, it represents her tragic mistake, her marriage to the gentleman caller who was handsome and charming, but irresponsible. It is a sign of escapism also. The warehouse symbolizes the grinding dullness of commercial coldness. The gentleman caller is the symbol of expectancy for the Wingfield family. They have waited for him all their lives. Jim O’Connor also symbolizes the outside world from which the Wingfields are somehow separated. Since Jim himself is plagued by doubts and lives in his own world, he symbolizes the universalities of uncertainty and inability to live in a harsh reality. Another important symbol in this play is the Rubicam’s Business College. This is the everyday world which Laura cannot enter into. She is too shy to feel even partially comfortable there, and she leaves it in favor of the aviary and the park. It is her last attempt to go out into the world, just as the gentleman caller is the last attempt of the world to come in to her. Perhaps the name of the college is intended to recall the Rubicon River, the stream that Caesar crossed when he led his armies toward Rome. “Crossing the Rubicon” means making a decision that cannot be revoked. Therefore it is applicable to Laura’s life—her final attempt enter into the world of reality is getting failed. Paradise Dance Hall, overlooking the Wingfield apartment, symbolizes the illusion of beauty and love. Its very name is ironic. For it is more a Purgatory than a paradise. The Merchant Marine signifies travel and adventure to him, but he is mistaken, for his responsibility to his family is a permanent link which he cannot shake off easily. These are some of the other symbols discussed in this play. CONCLUSION The broken piece of unicorn is the broken heart of Laura herself. That broken heart of Laura hurts Amanda very much and for that she curses Tom for giving them hopes, though Tom was unaware of the fact that Jim is being engaged. So, the glass unicorn symbolizes Laura herself. Though mute, this broken piece of glass unicorn speaks volumes throughout the last scenes of the play. As the very title of this chapter suggests unicorn is a pantomime in this play. The term pantomime has been explained in the introduction of this dissertation, already. Like a pantomime, unicorn tells a story through out the play without having use any sophisticated language. That celestial mute voice can be heard only to Laura. Though it doesn’t use any language, it tells

80 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 the story by its actions and expressions. Actions and expressions of this unicorn are not like that of other living animal. As it is mere an inanimate object, its expressions should be read from its face. Having examined very closely we can understand its loneliness among other glass animals. Unicorn is a pantomime itself which tells the story of Laura’s psyche. BIBLIOGRAPHY Williams, Tennessee. The Glass Menagerie. New Delhi: Penguin, 2006. Buchanan, Ian. Dictionary of Critical Theory. New York: Oxford University Press, 2010. Cunliffe, Marcus. Ed. American Literature Since 1900. New Delhi, Penguin, 1993. Elam, Keir. The Semiotic of Theatre and Drama, New Accents. London: Routledge, 1980. Hassan, Ihab. Contemporary American Literature 1945-1972: An Introduction. New York: Frederick Ungar Publishing Co, 1973. Narasimhaiah, C.D. Ed. Students’ Handbook of American Literature. Ludhiana: Kalyani Publishers, 1973. Ray, Mohit K. Ed. Studies in American Literature. New Delhi: Atlantic Publishers, 2002. Wager, Willis. American Literature: A World View. Allahabad: A.H. Wheeler & Co. (p). LTD, 1971. Wehmeier, Sally. New Oxford Advanced Learners Dictionary. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.

81 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

TRACING CONFLICTING PLURALITIES :THE POLITICS OF MULTICULTURALISM IN “THE JOY LUCK CLUB” AND “A PAIR OF TICKETS”

Anuja Jose Guest Lecturer, St.Mary’s College, Manarcaud e-mail id: [email protected] Ph No: 8281975452

ABSTRACT Amy Tan in her magnum opus The Joy Luck Clubexplores the cultural ambivalence of the proto- Chinese immigrants in America who battle with the constant compulsion to compromise their racial identity in order to be assimilated into the society. Despite being addressed as a ‘potpourri’ of cultures, the writer shows through her subtle ways that the country has cultivated an ambiguous ‘American Culture’ that is now dominating other diasporic cultures within the community. But the novel’s prime focus is not only on the turbulent existence of the diasporic communities but also on the shifting notions of homeland and nativity for the first and second generation immigrants. Though the concept of multiculturalism may breed ideas about cultural wealth and prosperity, it can be seen that the writer is questioning this misconception through her novel. This paper is an attempt to investigate the politics of multiculturalism in the two stories of The Joy Luck Club.

INTRODUCTION Multiculturalism could be defined as the normative response to the cultural diversity existent in a society (Parekh 6). In order to understand the different aspects of multiculturalism in the two stories: “The Joy Luck Club” and”A Pair of Tickets” of the book The Joy Luck Club, one has to look at the relationship between Suyuan Woo and Jin-mei Woo. Besides, by analyzing their ideas and perspectives, their past and their present, a seminal understanding on multiculturalism could be obtained. Assimilating the Self To begin with, in “The Joy Luck Club”, the frame narrative explains how the mother, Suyuan Woo was unwillingly initiated into the American culture through the ‘American clothes’ that were provided by the First Chinese Baptist church and was also asked to improve her English through her choir practices. Though this benefited Suyuan Woo and her husband to a larger extent

82 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 where they got to meet other Chinese immigrants in the church gathering, they were nevertheless subjected to a process of accommodation where, surviving in America meant sacrificing a part of their liberties by participating in the country’s beliefs and practices. Thus the modern state that is seen here is built on meanings and values that are not shared by all the members (During 154). According to Parekh, modern societies also include several self- conscious and more or less well organized communities entertaining and living by their own different systems of beliefs and practices ( Parekh 3). This is precisely seen in the purpose of the Joy Luck club where, the four Chinese families unite to play mahjong, cook Chinese food and share memories of China. Apart from re-creating an image of their homeland in America, they also reassert their Chinese identity through their involvement in the club. The frequent stories narrated by the mother to the daughter, Jing-mei, also depict the same. Nonetheless, these stories initially have a negative impact on the daughter because she identifies herself more with America than with China. This leads to two consequences namely, the conflict between cultures and the creation of a dual identity. In “The Joy Luck Club”, the mother is seen as becoming severely critical about the Americans when she talks about the air force officers saying ‘habba-habba sounds to make her face turn red’, while the daughter considers the club as a ‘shameful Chinese custom’. Woo also describes about the above mentioned conflict in her Kweilin story where she says that ‘they were a city of Leftovers mixed together’. Therefore, as the conservative critics claim, multiculturalism threatens a return to cultural barbarism through a lowering of standards or a debasement of values (During 154). This conflict that takes place between the mother and the daughter is also because Jing-mei is unable to establish a strong connection with her motherland except through the stories narrated by the mother. Since the stories end differently on every narration, the reliability of the memory is also questioned. This aspect is brought out in “A Pair of Tickets” where Jing-mei realizes that her memory is totally different from reality. Her stay in Guangzhou shows her that China which she is witnessing is not the country portrayed through the image of the Orient by the Occident (that of communist China). Since the second generation immigrants are primarily influenced by borrowed knowledge, multiculturalism could expose a dominion of the host country over their mother country. Here, Jing-mei represents the Occident, therefore Said’s idea on the Orient that says “there were- and are-cultures and nations whose locations is in the East, and their lives, histories, customs have a brute reality obviously greater than anything that could be said about them in the West”(Said 25) seems applicable. Thus, in order to create a peaceful co-existence, multiculturalism would threaten illiberal coercion since particular policies would be designed to enable the survival of minority cultures, thereby limiting individual’s freedom (During 154). This would make multiculturalism a national policy. The second consequence being, the creation of a dual identity is seen in “The Joy Luck Club”, where the daughter is unable to relate to the Chinese culture. In the story, the mother makes a very striking statement to the daughter in the course of teaching her discipline. “Why do you think you are missing something you never had?”. Though the mother was partly referring to her lost daughters, for Jing-mei, this statement was a reflection of her own identity crisis. Despite the evident traces of Chinese descent like the food, physical features and the English spoken by

83 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 her mother,Jing-meiis invariably a part of America too. This issue becomes more complex in “A Pair of Tickets” where she realizes that she is a Chinese foreigner in China. This shows that due to multiculturalism, not all individuals in groups are members in the same way (Madood 119). At this point, the ending of the story becomes crucial because it shows that the sustenance of one’s mother culture in diaspora can only take place if one acknowledges the inevitable aspect of their homeland in them while still connecting to the circumambient culture. CONCLUSION Therefore, it can be asserted that multiculturalism is a political philosophy that does not always ensure the cooperative initiation of its members. As seen in the two stories, only the first generation immigrants have a closer identification with their homeland due to which; they create a pseudo environment of cultural festivity. For the second generation immigrants like Jing-mei, remnants of their racial identity are an unhealthy intrusion into their existence which Jing-meigradually learns to rectify. The inherent threat within multiculturalism surfaces when members of variant cultural background cease to claim their racial identity thereby favouring the ruling cultural politics. This would inevitably transformation multiculturalism into a tool of governance plausibly leading to unequal representation of its members. To conclude, as During says, “a commitment to a nation can encompass differences and indeed may be strengthened by them” (154). Works Cited During, Simon.”Multiculturalism.”Cultural studies: A Critical Introduction. London: Routledge, 2005. 153-160. Print. Madood, Tariq. Multiculturlaism. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2007. Print. Parekh, Bhikhu. Introduction.Rethinking Multiculturalism: Cultural Diversity and Political Theory. 2nded. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006. 1-15. Print. Said, Edward.W.”Orientalism.”The Post-Colonial Studies Reader.Ed.Bill Ashcroft, Gareth Griffith, and Helen Tiffin. New York: Routledge Taylor &Franscis Group, 2006. 24-27. Print.

84 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

RISK AND STOCK PRICE ANALYSIS OF INFOSYS AND TCS

Atheesh A. Kumar Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce, Sree Narayana Guru College of Advanced Studies, Chempazhanthy, Trivandrum Dist. Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT In finance, volatility is a measure for variation of price of a financial instrument over time. The symbol ó is used for volatility, and corresponds to standard deviation. Volatility as described here refers to the actual current volatility of a financial instrument for a specified period (for example 30 days or 90 days). It is the volatility of a financial instrument based on historical prices over the specified period with the last observation of the most recent price. The study on volatility of Blue-chip shares will give an exposure to different share market operations and also a detailed description regarding mutual fund. The study will provide information’s regarding historical volatility occurred in the Blue-chip shares. Through this study, an investor also gets a detailed idea about the risk associated with Blue-chip shares and the amount of return related with each share. This phrase is used particularly when it is wish to distinguish between the actual current volatility of an instrument and actual historical volatility. Actual current volatility refers to the volatility of a financial instrument over a specified period but with the last observation on a date in the past. Actual future volatility refers to the volatility of a financial instrument over a specified period starting at the current time and ending at a future date (normally the expiry date of an option). Historical volatility implied volatility refers to the implied volatility observed from historical prices of the financial instrument (normally options).

INTRODUCTION The vulnerable and unpredictable nature of the stock market, stock index and price prediction related techniques needs urgent attention. A stock index or stock market index is a measurement of the value of a section of the stock market. It is computed from the prices of selected stocks (typically a weighted average). It is a tool used by investors and financial managers to describe the market, and to compare the return on specific investments. Due to high relative changes in the market on account of various intrinsic and extrinsic parameters, make the prediction more complex and risky. The actual reasons behind this state of affairs can only be aptly described by the facts and figures available. A worthwhile study can only be undertaken through a detailed analysis is of utmost importance in formulating strategies to overcome the crisis felt by investors.

85 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Source of information . The present study purely relied on secondary data. The secondary data are collected mainly from the relevant websites, Department of Economics and Statistics, published and unpublished reports, documents, articles, working papers, published and unpublished research dissertations. Sample selection The sample stocks selected for the present study are INFOSYS and TCS. The data for the study covers a period of 30/6/2009 to30/09/2015. Since the above companies are market leaders in their business and shares of such companies are well rated, hence considered to be blue-chip companies. The data for the present study was taken from the official site of Bombay Stock Exchange. Period of study A 6 year and 3 months period from 30/6/2009 to 30/9/2015 has been selected for the present study. However, data pertaining to preceding years were also been incorporated in the appropriate places wherever found necessary to make the study more precise and perfect as possible. Calculation: Standard Deviation and Volatility are calculated using Excel. Hypotheses of the Study • The risk and stock price of selected blue chip shares are negatively/positively related. Empirical Review Aggarwal et.al (2005) examined the kinds of events that cause large shifts in the volatility of emerging stock markets. The authors determined the large changes in the volatility of emerging stock market returns and then examined global and local events (social, political, and economic) during the periods of increased volatility. An iterated cumulative sum of squares (ICSS) algorithm is used to identify the points of shocks/sudden changes in the variance of returns in each market and how long the shift lasts. Both increases and decreases in the variance were identified. Also they identified events around the time period when shifts in volatility occurred. Most events tend to be local and included the Mexican peso crisis, periods of hyperinflation in Latin America, the Marcos-Aquino conflict in the Philippines, and the stock market scandal in India. The October 1987 crash is the only global event during the period 1985–1995 that caused a significant jump in the volatility of several emerging stock markets. Damodaran (1996) reviewed the ingredients for a good risk and return model. According to him a good risk and return model should come up with a measure for risk that is universal. Specify what types of risks are rewarded and what types are not. Standardise risk measures, to enable analysis and comparison. Translate the risk measure into an expected return. He opined that a risk measure, to be useful, has to apply to all investments whether stocks or bonds or real estate. He also stated that one of the objectives of measuring risk is to come up with an estimate of an expected return for an investment. This expected return would help to decide whether the investment is a ‘good’ or ‘bad’ one.

86 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Dennis et.al (2008) studied the dynamic relation between daily stock returns and daily innovations in option derived implied volatilities. By simultaneously analyzing innovations in index- and firm level implied volatilities, we distinguish between innovations in systematic and idiosyncratic volatility in an effort to better understand the asymmetric volatility phenomenon. The results indicated that the relation between stock returns and innovations in systematic volatility (idiosyncratic volatility) was substantially negative (near zero). These results suggest that asymmetric volatility was primarily attributed to systematic market-wide factors rather than aggregated firm-level effects. They also presented evidence that innovations in implied volatility were good proxies for innovations in expected stock volatility. Fischer and Jordan (1994) analysed the relation between risk, investor preferences and investor behaviour. The risk return measures on portfolios were the main determinants of an investor’s attitude towards them. Most investors seek more return for additional risk assumed. The conservative investor required large increase in return for assuming small increases in risk. The more aggressive investor will accept smaller increases in return for large increases in risk. They concluded that the psychology of the stock market is based on how investors form judgements about uncertain future events and how they react to these judgements. Karolyi (1989) identified new measures of stock return volatility that were developed to increase the precision of stock option price estimates. With Bayesian statistical methods, volatility estimates for a given stock were developed using prior information on the cross-sectional patterns in return volatilities for groups of stocks sorted on size, financial leverage, and trading volume. Call option values computed with the Bayesian procedure generally improve prediction accuracy for market prices of call options relative to those computed using implied volatility, standard historical volatility, or even the actual ex post volatility that occurred during each option’s life. Although the Bayesian methods produce biased call price estimators, they do reduce the systematic tendency of standard pricing approaches to overprice (underprice) options on high (low) volatility stocks. Little bias improvement is observed with respect to the time to maturity and moneyless of the call options. Pereira and Zhang (2002) conducted a study on the empirical fact that stock returns decreased with an increase in the volatility of liquidity. The authors selected model liquidity as a stochastic price impact process and defined the liquidity premium as the additional return necessary to compensate a multi period investor for the adverse price impact of trading. The model demonstrated a fully rational, utility maximizing; risk-averse investor can take advantage of time- varying liquidity by adapting his trades to the state of liquidity. The authors provided new empirical evidence supportive of the model. The review of related literature presented above enabled the investigator to get an idea of what has already been covered in the area under investigation and realise the magnitude of the problem. Various areas on price mechanism and volatility of the stocks were surveyed in detail. Extensive studies covering all the aspects of price mechanism and volatility of the stocks in detail were not found among these studies. This observation has motivated the investigator to carry out the present study. The review has also helped the investigator to conceive the design of the study and execute it appropriately.

87 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table.1 - Historical volatility of INFOSYS

Company INFOSYS Period(Days) 20 Volatility Days 4 Start Date 30-06-2009 Close 1161.95 Current 279902.40% Average 210645.78% Maximum 279902.40% Minimum 124726.47% Date Close Price Change S.D Volatility Volatility (%) 30-06-2009 1777.65 30 -09 -2009 2303.9 526.25 31-12-2009 2604.7 300.8 31-03-2010 2615.95 11.25 30-06-2010 2791 175.05 217.1552531 971.1478153 97114.78153 30-09-2010 3050.5 259.5 128.1107138 572.9285296 57292.85296 31-12-2010 3442.75 392.25 159.5696576 713.6172031 71361.72031 31-03-2011 3241.3 -201.45 254.7281308 1139.178833 113917.8833 30-06-2011 2910.45 -330.85 350.084305 1565.624608 156562.4608 30-09-2011 2533.05 -377.4 355.6196573 1590.379456 159037.9456 31-12-2011 2767.65 234.6 279.0291159 1247.856142 124785.6142 31-03-2012 2866.3 98.65 306.3251078 1369.927528 136992.7528 30-06-2012 2509.2 -357.1 313.2995169 1401.118034 140111.8034 30-09-2012 2534.95 25.75 253.6083283 1134.170923 113417.0923 31-12-2012 2318.7 -216.25 211.5737317 946.1864928 94618.64928 31-03-2013 2889.35 570.65 408.4344631 1826.574448 182657.4448 30-06-2013 2498.85 -390.5 418.5419202 1871.77637 187177.637 30-09-2013 3013 514.15 494.0016892 2209.242716 220924.2716 31-12-2013 3701.1 688.1 496.0531104 2218.416951 221841.6951 31-03-2014 3282.8 -418.3 584.9775628 2616.099191 261609.9191 30-06-2014 3255.55 -27.25 506.7545634 2266.275303 226627.5303 30-09-2014 3747.75 492.2 502.1605029 2245.73004 224573.004 31-12-2014 1972.55 -1775.2 969.9384958 4337.696821 433769.6821 31-03-2015 2218.35 245.8 1028.184911 4598.182708 459818.2708 30-06-2015 984.35 -1234 1108.63011 4957.944574 495794.4574 30-09-2015 1161.95 177.6 1015.621325 4541.996646 454199.6646 Source: secondary data While analysing the information’s of tables 1 & 2 it can be understood that the volatility percentage of INFOSYS is higher than compared to that of TCS. Generally when the volatility percentage increases the risk of the investors also increase and when the volatility % decreases the risk of the investors also decrease. When the risk reduces the investors may come forward to invest their money and in the same way when the risk increases the investors may hesitate to invert their fund in the securities. While comparing the volatility with the stock price it can be 88 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table.2historical Volatility of TCS

Company TCS Period(Days) 20 Volatility Days 4 Start Date 30-06-2009 Close 2588.05 Current 111369.95% Average 67428.60% Maximum 108036.29% Minimum 41539.92% Date Close Price Change S.D Volatility Volatility (%) 30-06-2009 390.5 30-09-2009 619.8 229.3 31-12-2009 748.8 129 31-03-2010 780.65 31.85 30-06-2010 751 -29.65 113.465079 507.43126 50743.126 30-09-2010 926.95 175.95 92.9294838 415.59329 41559.3286 31-12-2010 1165.65 238.7 124.349852 556.10944 55610.9443 31-03-2011 1183.9 18.25 127.142488 568.59849 56859.8493 30-06-2011 1184.2 0.3 117.407673 525.06308 52506.3076 30-09-2011 1037.3 -146.9 159.003325 711.08449 71108.4486 31-12-2011 1160.65 123.35 111.238086 497.47184 49747.1842 31-03-2012 1168.8 8.15 110.761519 495.34057 49534.0573 30-06-2012 1277.45 108.65 124.488536 556.72966 55672.9658 30-09-2012 1295.9 18.45 59.7449579 267.18757 26718.7575 31-12-2012 1255.85 -40.05 62.0480728 277.48742 27748.7417 31-03-2013 1575.75 319.9 157.779553 705.61161 70561.1611 30-06-2013 1518.15 -57.6 176.176098 787.88346 78788.3462 30-09-2013 1927.8 409.65 241.692982 1080.8839 108088.387 31-12-2013 2156.05 228.25 202.463943 905.44628 90544.628 31-03-2014 2133.15 -22.9 220.665407 986.8457 98684.5699 30-06-2014 2425.4 292.25 182.638091 816.78237 81678.2374 30-09-2014 2736.6 311.2 154.206155 689.63089 68963.0892 31-12-2014 2558.25 -178.35 240.933895 1077.4891 107748.913 31-03-2015 2553.95 -4.3 237.917741 1064.0005 106400.049 30-06-2015 2550.95 -3 203.912524 911.92453 91192.4529 30-09-2015 2588.05 37.1 96.0830316 429.69638 42969.638 Source: Secondary data found that when the volatility increases the stock price also increases and when the volatility decreases the stock price also decreases. It is inferred from the table that the average volatility percentage of INFOSYS is 210645.778 and that of TCS is 67428.60. And the average stock price of INFOSYS is 2653.60 and that of TCS is 1525.82. CONCLUSION It can be concluded that when the risk increases the stock price also increases, and when the risk is low the return will also be low. The risk of securities in INFOSYS is higher as compared 89 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 to TCS and the return of INFOSYS is also higher compared to that of TCS. Here by we can conclude that risk and return go hand by hand Reference Avandi, V. A., (Fifth Edition), “Investment Management”, Himalaya Publication House (2003) Chandra, Prasanna, (second edition), “Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management” Tata McGraw hill publishing company (2005). Elton, Edwin J. and Gruber, Martin J., (fifth edition), “Modern Portfolio Theory and Investment Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons (2002) Fischer, Donald E. and Jordan Ronald J., (sixth edition), “Security Analysis and Portfolio Management”,– Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd. (2000) Madusudan V Jombodekar in the article Marketing Strategies of Mutual Funds (1996) Raja Rajan in the article “Chennai Investors is conservative (1997)” Damodaran, “Investment Valuation Tools and Techniques”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New York. (1996)

90 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

IMPACT OF VIZHINJAM PROJECT ON KERALA ECONOMY

Anjula C. S. Assistant Professor in Commerce N.S.S College Nenmara, Palakkad Dist. Kerala

Rinju Mol A. Lecturer in Commerce, MTCST, Ayur, Kollam Dist. Kerala

ABSTRACT The Vizhinjam Port was originally conceived about 25 years ago. The initial project model was suggested as the Public Private Partnership (PPP)- Private Services model. Two rounds of bidding and tenders called under the PPP model ended up as a failure as a result of various reasons including the inherent un-viability of the project’s economic rationale. The study focuses on the major attractions of Vizhinjam project and the impact it exerts on Kerala’s tourism sector. Keywords: Vizhinjam port, Public Private Partnership (PPP)

INTRODUCTION The Vizhinjam Port is a greenfield port project in the State of Kerala in India. The economy of Kerala is dominated by the Services sector, which accounts for 58% of the Net State Domestic Product. However the secondary sector has registered a high growth rate of 17.9% between 1999-00 and 2007-8. Though investment in the State is rising, it is still quite low compared to many other States in India. However, the Government has shown resolve to take steps to boost the economy and to attract investors. One of the key initiatives is to develop a greenfield port at Vizhinjam, near the State capital of Trivandrum. Vizhinjam International Seaport is a proposed port by the Arabian sea at Thiruvananthapuram in India. The total project expenditure is pegged at 595 crores over three phases and is proposed to follow the landlord port model with a view to catering to passenger, container and other clean cargo. Vizhinjam International Seaport Limited (VISL) is a special purpose government company (fully owned by Govt. of kerala) that would act as an implementing agency for the development of a greenfield port - Vizhinjam International Deepwater Multi purpose Seaport- at Vizhinjam in Thiruvananthapuram capital city of Kerala. Research Methodology: The study is entirely based on secondary data collected through journals , magazines and related websites. Objectives: The main objectives of this article are 1. Make an in depth study of Vizhinjam project. 91 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

2. Study the pros and cons on implementation of this project. Vizhinjam Project-An Overview The Vizhinjam Port was originally conceived about 25 years ago. The initial project model was suggested as the Public Private Partnership (PPP)- Private Services model. Two rounds of bidding and tenders called under the PPP model ended up as a failure as a result of various reasons including the inherent un-viability of the project’s economic rationale. The first round was granted to a Chinese company that failed to secure the security clearance from the Center, the second round which was first awarded to Lanco Group and then challenged in the Kerala High Court by Zoom Developers led to the eventual withdrawal by Lanco Group. The Kerala cabinet on June 10th 2015, decided to award the multi-thousand crore Vizhinjam international port and deep-water container transshipment terminal to Adani Ports and SEZ, the sole bidder. The International Finance Corporation, a member of the World Bank Group is currently the transaction advisor to VISL. The IFC was appointed in November 2009 as the lead advisor to the Vizhinjam Port. The IFC undertook in 2009 - 2010 a series of studies and reports that recommended the State to undertake the project under the Landlord Model. The Landlord model would see the State make the final investment of over 1 Billion USD to build the port. As opposed to the PPP model where the Private Partner would bear the cost of the port. The IFC has also undertaken the task of conducting the Environmental Impact Assessment Study of the Container Port. The port development is proposed to follow the landlord port model where the dredging, reclamation as well as basic external infrastructure work like construction of break-water and quay wall will be taken up by VISL. Further, it is also expected to monitor Land Acquisition, road/ rail infrastructure, water and power supply required for the construction and operations of the port on behalf of Government of Kerala (GoK). The port terminal will be developed under Public Private Partnership(PPP) model wherein the construction and operation of the port terminal would be on Build, Operate and Transfer (BOT) basis. The port development along with the external infrastructure work is envisaged to be carried out in phases with the cumulative cost estimated to be around Rs. 6595 crore. The port is envisaged to provide in total 2000m of quay length in three phases and is designed to cater primarily for containers transshipment, besides providing for other type of cargo such as Multi-Purpose, Break Bulk. The construction of basic civil infrastructure viz. dredging, land reclamation, construction of breakwaters and quay wall, as also land acquisition, road/rail connectivity and other external infrastructure required in phase 1 and the cost for the same is estimated to be Rs. 3040 crore. The said project cost is proposed to be funded through Rs. 1130 cr as equity from GoK and balance amount is proposed to be raised as debt through loans from banks/ institutions and through bonds. As per Gok,the followings are the objectives for setting up vizhinjam port • Develop a modern deep water port facility to improve the state’s transport infrastructure. • Facilitate trade and attracting investment in the state. • Promote private sector participation in port and transport sector.

92 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Social Responsibility 1. The port’s minister said that the VISL ,the Government entity in charge of the project ,would be spending for the people of vizhinjam 5% of the investment on the basic port infrastructure. 2. In the first stage of the project the VISL would spend Rs.140 crore on ‘CSR’ventures to mitigate the environmental and social impact of the project. 3. A sea food park and training centre for vocations connected with the port and fishing would be set up. Importance During the last decade, there has been a steady growth of container traffic at the Indian ports. Currently, the majority of these ports rely on direct services or use far off ports for their transhipment needs. This necessitates the establishment of an International Deepwater Seaport and Container Transhipment Terminal in the Southern Indian Peninsula. The port is proposed at Vizhinjam, 16 km away from Thiruvananthapuram ,the capital of State of kerala. Kerala being the southern most state in India beset by Arabian Sea. The proposed Vizhinjam port is just 10 nautical miles from the International Shipping Lane. The Vizhinjam port is endowed with a natural seawater depth of up to 24 m as close as one nautical mile from the seacoast. Due to this natural depth, Vizhinjam can attract the largest container vessels currently in operation and also the future mega container carriers. Site needs minimal capital dredging thus the project cost and maintenance cost will be minimum. Advantages • Vizhinjam is an all-weather port located on the Southern tip of the sub-continent, it is just 10-12 nautical miles from the busy Persian Gulf - Malacca shipping lanes which carry almost a third of the world shipping traffic. • Central to the eastern and western coast lines of India - can cater to the needs of both west and east coast. • The proposed transhipment terminal will be an ideal location for attracting mainline vessels ranging from Post Panamax to Malacca-max in a phased manner. • The proposed site is endowed with natural depth of more than 20 m as close as one Nautical Mile from the sea coast. • The proposed site has minimal Littoral drift and as such would hardly require any maintenance dredging during the years of operation. This will result in low O&M Costs. • The proposed port is a Green-field project, away from urban/city limits, and thus can be master planned and shaped by the professional and experienced developer as per his own efficient designs and needs. The Port can turn out to be an efficient, modern and highly productive port with design, expertise and experience of the successful developer having international experience in such ports. • Once the port is up, Indian exporters will not have to rely on foreign ports for trans- shipment of cargo. It is expected to save at least 1000 crores in expenditure annually.

93 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

• Apart from all these the project will attract tourists to kerala.Kerala is listed as one of the 10 paradises in the world by National Geographic. • Specialized cruise facilities charging competitive rates can promote significant tourism. Kovalam (2 km) and Varkala (50 km) are major tourist destinations in India.The port is very close to these tourist destinations. • Kollam a popular gateway for backwaters & lagoon excursions is less than 2 hours drive from Vizhinjam port. • Vizhinjam being a non-major port falls outside the jurisdiction of tariff authority for major ports and will thus enjoy the freedom to fix its own tariff based on competitive market environment. • Availability of skilled labour, particularly trained IT hands,in the state is yet another positive for Vizhinjam project. Criticisms Fisheries expert and marine scientist Sanjeeva Ghosh has demanded core changes to the project report for the proposed seaport at Vizhinjam, warning that the construction activities for the port would impact on the marine ecosystem and the livelihood of the fishing community and pose a serious setback to beach tourism. In a letter to the Member Secretary, Expert Appraisal Committee for CRZ (coastal regulation zone) projects, he said the construction of the seaport would alter the natural geography of the coast and affect the marine ecosystem along the coast of Kerala and Tamil Nadu, affecting over 100,000 fishermen. The impact will be felt on a highly marginalised and low income community. The destruction of marine resources is unavoidable and irreversible.” He said it would also affect the thriving beach resorts, hotels and tourist facilities in the Kovalam, Vizhinjam and Poovar areas. Another serious criticism raised is that construction activities involving underwater rock blasting, dredging, sand mining and reclamation could affect the narrow continental shelf, resulting in changes in the direction of waves and ocean tides. This in turn would affect the marine wealth and the coastal areas in Thiruvananthapuram and neighbouring districts. CONCLUSION The economy of Kerala has registered a steady growth of 8% between 1999 -2000 and 2007-08.The secondary sector registered the highest growth rate of 17.9% as compared to the tertiary sector (9.6%) and primary sector (2.5%) in 2007-08 over the preceding financial year. As a result the share of secondary sector has gone up from 20% in 1999-00 to 28% in 2007-08 at the expense of a fall in share of primary sector. However, the service sector has maintained its dominance, accounting for 58% share in Net State Domestic Product in 2007 -08. The Government of Kerala (“GOK”) wants to encourage investments on mutually beneficial terms to accelerate the growth of the Kerala’s economy. The government wants to attract both domestic and foreign investments. However, the amount of FDI inflow in the state is still very low, accounting for less than 0.3% of total FDI inflow into India in rupee terms. Service sector has registered a strong inflow of investments in Kerala, accounting for more than 50% of the total investments made, followed by manufacturing and construction sector at around 22% and 12% resp.GOK wishes to 94 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 develop Vizhinjam as a Deep water Transhipment hub catering to all types of vessels including Super Post Panamax and provisions for Futuristic Malacca Max Mega Carriers. As Kerala is located in a strategic position close to international shipping routes, the government seeks to tap this potential for a multi-purpose container transshipment hub port in the state. References 1. www.wikipedia.org /vizhinjam international sea port 2. www.vizhinjamport.in 3. The New Indian Express/vizhinjam project 4. The Hindu Business line/Promoter firm approves Adani Bid.

95 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURE PROFILE OF ELITE FOOD PVT. LTD. AROOR, KERALA

Ebe Robert E. Assistant Professor, School of Management, St. Joseph’s College of Engineering and Technology, Choondacherry P. O., Kottayam District, Kerala, Pin - 686579 (Part time Research Scholar, Manonmaniam Sundaranar University, Tirunelveli. T.N.) Mob: +91 9400356134, e.mail: [email protected]

Dr. A. A. Ananth Associate Professor, Department of Management Studies, Annamalai University, Chidambaram, Cadalure Dist. T.N.

ABSTRACT Organisational Culture related concepts (culture, climate, environment, atmosphere, ethos, etc) have been used loosely and interchangeably, although an attempt has been made to delineate some of them (Pareek 1991). Distribution and concentration of power can be one basis of classifying culture. From this angle organization culture can be of four types: autocratic, bureaucratic, technocratic and entrepreneurial. This study was conducted to find out the Organisational Culture Profile of Elite Food Pvt. Ltd., Aroor. This is a descriptive study using primary and secondary data. Standard questionnaire of Dr. Udai Pareek was used in this study. The study reveals that the employees of Elite Food Pvt. Ltd., Aroor have high Organisational Culture Profile.

INTRODUCTION Organisational Culture includes the organization values, visions, norms, working language, systems, symbols, beliefs and habits. It is also the pattern of such collective behaviours and assumptions that are taught to new organizational members as a way of perceiving, and even thinking and feeling. Organizational culture affects the way people and groups interact with each other, with clients, and with stakeholders. “Organizational culture is the key to organizational excellence and the function of leadership is the creation and management of culture” (Schein). Interpreting and understanding organizational culture is an important activity for managers and consultants because it affects strategic development, productivity and learning at all levels. Cultural assumptions can both enable and constrain what organizations are able to do.

96 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Need for the Study According to Udai Pareek, the organisational culture-related concepts also can be seen as a multilevel concepts. At the core (first level) are the values, which give distinct identity to a group. This is the basic ethos of the group. Pareek defines ethos as “underlying spirit of character or group and is the root of culture”. The second level concept is climate which can be defined as the perceived attributes of an organization and its members, groups and issues. The third level concept relates to atmosphere which is distinct factor that affects the development of someone or something. Hence this topic was chosen by the researchers for the study. Objectives of the Study • To identify the Organisational Culture Profile of Elite Food Pvt., Ltd., Aroor • To find out the factors that contribute more to Organisational Culture Profile of Elite Food Pvt, Ltd., Aroor This study is an attempt to uncover the Organisational Culture Profile of Elite Food Pvt., Ltd., Aroor. The Elite Food Private Limited has been in the field of manufacture and distribution of products for the last 28 years. The products of Elite Food Private Limited are recognized for its quality and safety. The organization has now poised for a lift from the domestic market to the international market. Elite Group is an ISO 9001-2000 certified company and also has the certification of HACCP (Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point). It works under the supervision of Japanese Institute of Productivity Management (JIPM) and is also known to have taken up Total Productivity Maintenance policy under JIPM. The factories of the company are quite well-equipped with the most advanced technologies of late the group has also implemented SAP in order to streamline business activities. The organization has its corporate office and manufacturing unit at Thrissur. The manufacturing units are located at Aroor, Kalamassery, Thrissur, Tamilnadu, Mumbai and Indore. All the location together employed around 1200 personnel. The major products of the units are different bread varieties. Elite is located in a 2.2-acre in the development area at Aroor, beside the NH 47, close to the commercial city of Cochin, this units was established in 1987. Review of Literature According to Uday Pareek, Culture is reflected in the artifacts-rituals design of space, furniture and way of dealing with various phenomena. Distribution and concentration of power can be one basis of classifying culture. From this angle organization culture can be of four types: autocratic, bureaucratic, technocratic and entrepreneurial. An autocratic culture is primarily concerned with following prominent protocol, dominated by dependency climate with affiliation. People are selected on the basis of relationship and they are trusted. Deaf climate is characterised as “the top managers control the organization and the employ their own in group members, who are extremely loyal to this leaders”. The ethos of such a culture is closed, mistrusting and self-seeking. In an autocratic leadership style, the person in charge has total authority and control over decision making. By virtue of their position and job responsibilities, they not only control the efforts of the team, but monitor them for completion – often under close scrutiny. A bureaucratic culture is concerned with the following proper rules and regulations. Its

97 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 climate is dominated by control and backed up by dependency. Such as climate have been characterised as “a bureaucracy and a rigid which dominate the organization. Because action are generally referred to the levels above for approval, decision are usually delayed. It is more important to follow rules and regulation than achieve results. Senior employees protect those subordinates who do not make any procedural mistakes”. The ethos of a bureaucratic organization is characterised by playing safe, inertia, lack of collaboration and closedness. A technocratic culture generally has an apex climate-expert power being dominant, with a backup climate of extension. “Specialist play a major role in the organization, working in a planned way on socially relevant matters. The organization plays the attention to the employee’s needs and welfare. The ethos is the positive proaction, autonomy, collaboration and experimentation. Technocrats are individuals with technical training and occupations who perceive many important societal problems as being solvable, often while proposing technology-focused solutions. An entrepreneurial culture is primarily concerned with result and customers. Its climate is generally that of achievement, or concern for excellence and extension or concern for larger groups and issues. In such a climate “employ work on challenging task, and develop equal attention to the social relevance of these tasks. The organization has developed highly developed sense of social responsibility, as well as strong sense of its responsibility to fulfil employee needs”. Research Methodology The area of study was Elite Food Pvt. Ltd, Aroor, Kerala. The researchers used descriptive research design in this research. Primary data were collected using a standard Organisational Culture Profile questionnaire of Dr. Udai Pareek. According to Dr. Udai Pareek Distribution and concentration of power can be one basis of classifying culture. From this angle organization culture can be of four types: autocratic, bureaucratic, technocratic and entrepreneurial. Since this questionnaire was found suitable in this research, no modification was done in the questionnaire. The sample size consists of 42 employees working in different units were included in this study. Convenience sampling was used in this research. The data were analysed using descriptive analysis and Factor analysis with the help of SPSS. Results And Discussions Factor Analysis Factor analysis is a data reduction method used to reduce the large number of variables resulting in our data to a few manageable factors we have conducted factor analysis for the variable which are coming under Organizational Culture Profile (OCP). The results obtained were given in Table 1. Table 1 KMO and Bartlett's Test Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling Adequacy. .377 Bartlett's Test of Sphericity Approx. Chi-Square 1086.985 Df 496 Sig. .000

98 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

KMO Bartlett’s Test results indicate that the factor analysis can be applied to the given set of data. The communalities were given in the table 2 Factoring The extraction factors for the given variables were moderately high values. There values indicate how much of each variable is accounted for by the underlying factors taken together. There is only one factor resulting from the analysis explaining a total of 82.325 of the variations in the entire data after varimax. Rotation is performed in the percentage of variation explained by the first, second and third factors are 22.174, 12.744, 10.552 respectively. The percentage of variance explained by the fourth, fifth and sixth factors are 7.224, 7.086, and 6.052 respectively. Seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth factors explained percentage variance 5.169, 4.209, 3.842 and 3.273 respectively.

Table 2 : Communalities

Initial Extraction S11 .816 .453 S12 .824 .753 S13 .893 .660 S14 .819 .648 S21 .788 .565 S22 .922 .659 S23 .921 .748 S24 .863 .910 S31 .872 .702 S32 .938 .858 S33 .910 .735 S34 .976 .953 S41 .889 .574 S42 .840 .769 S43 .844 .616 S44 .856 .524 S51 .890 .692 S52 .923 .788 S53 .946 .855 S54 .949 .729 S61 .972 .884 S62 .948 .759 S63 .969 .810 S64 .917 .850 S71 .986 .869 S72 .989 .922 S73 .872 .835 S74 .940 .802 S81 .959 .774 S82 .937 .733 S83 .943 .791 S84 .904 .708 Extraction Method: Principal Axis.

99 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table 3: The total variance explained Extraction Sums of Squared Rotation Sums of Squared Initial Eigenvalues Loadings Loadings % of Cumulative % of Cumulative % of Cumulative factor Total Variance % Total Variance % Total Variance % 1 7.096 22.174 22.174 6.868 21.464 21.464 3.395 10.609 10.609 2 4.078 12.744 34.918 3.836 11.988 33.452 3.293 10.290 20.899 3 3.377 10.552 45.471 3.132 9.788 43.239 2.685 8.390 29.289 4 2.312 7.224 52.694 2.077 6.491 49.730 2.631 8.222 37.511 5 2.267 7.086 59.780 2.014 6.294 56.024 2.530 7.906 45.417 6 1.937 6.052 65.832 1.707 5.334 61.359 2.502 7.818 53.235 7 1.654 5.169 71.002 1.391 4.345 65.704 1.802 5.630 58.865 8 1.347 4.209 75.211 1.064 3.326 69.030 1.790 5.593 64.458 9 1.229 3.842 79.053 1.009 3.153 72.183 1.683 5.261 69.719 10 1.047 3.273 82.325 .828 2.586 74.769 1.616 5.050 74.769 11 .877 2.739 85.065 12 .717 2.242 87.307 13 .581 1.815 89.122 14 .559 1.748 90.870 15 .491 1.534 92.404 16 .411 1.285 93.689 17 .336 1.050 94.739 18 .325 1.016 95.755 19 .265 .829 96.584 20 .203 .634 97.218 21 .177 .552 97.770 22 .145 .455 98.224 23 .140 .436 98.661 24 .109 .341 99.002 25 .090 .282 99.283 26 .067 .209 99.492 27 .052 .164 99.656 28 .041 .128 99.784 29 .032 .099 99.883 30 .023 .071 99.954 31 .011 .036 99.989 32 .003 .011 100.000 Extraction Method: Principal Axis Factoring.

The next task is to interpret the factor loading matrix in order to do so and to be able to interpret the research in a better way the factor rotates is desired. We perform varimax rotation and the rotated factor matrix obtained was given in table 5.

100 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

The ten factors were extracted and is given in table 4 Table 4: Factor Matrix

Factor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 S11 .280 .317 .062 .051 .409 -.014 .262 -.047 -.154 -.068 S12 .472 .148 .592 .121 .311 -.057 .083 -.072 -.162 z.067 S13 .566 -.189 .127 -.038 -.154 -.076 -.256 .272 -.094 .328 S14 -.600 .121 -.230 -.157 .096 .034 -.136 .282 .205 .213 S21 -.069 -.349 -.203 -.026 -.311 .183 .363 .250 .269 .025 S22 .236 .508 -.315 .189 .194 .062 .099 .334 .210 -.064 S23 -.348 -.443 .405 .133 .345 .192 -.238 .043 -.174 .065 S24 .307 -.071 .107 .590 .135 -.343 .039 -.238 .431 .266 S31 -.099 -.719 -.134 .174 .169 -.244 .033 -.091 -.167 -.045 S32 .616 .055 .126 .266 -.534 .150 -.184 -.045 .132 -.168 S33 -.607 .242 .492 -.068 .003 -.132 -.081 .053 .148 -.107 S34 -.228 -.595 .284 .522 .106 -.011 .381 .128 .095 .109 S41 .065 -.094 .178 .457 -.001 .492 .233 -.013 -.117 .101 S42 -.295 -.171 -.399 .300 .060 .535 -.223 .233 .019 -.102 S43 -.307 .421 .383 -.037 .412 .035 -.013 .151 .018 -.053 S44 -.435 .123 -.355 .257 .290 -.057 .131 .087 .092 .082 S51 .528 .110 .353 .206 -.100 -.168 -.305 .295 -.101 .079 S52 .673 .209 .377 -.019 .069 .303 -.018 -.193 .045 -.114 S53 .569 -.210 -.068 -.030 .105 -.449 -.040 .226 .102 -.454 S54 .294 .531 .200 -.122 -.404 -.102 .204 -.056 .287 .067 S61 -.331 .445 -.181 .576 -.089 -.411 .107 -.117 -.055 -.078 S62 -.354 .384 .024 .542 -.128 -.030 -.162 .056 -.203 -.322 S63 -.436 .480 .223 .305 -.296 .148 -.354 .049 .039 .089 S64 .746 .118 -.059 .195 -.141 .418 .122 -.124 -.115 -.003 S71 .711 .375 -.278 -.101 .060 .033 .295 .015 -.182 .105 S72 .545 .466 -.487 .054 .069 -.084 .103 .242 -.244 .164 S73 .222 .351 .531 -.149 .501 .139 .038 .192 .217 -.041 S74 -.695 .396 .264 -.076 -.169 .112 .189 .024 .001 .097 S81 -.533 .295 -.310 -.096 .211 .264 .007 -.396 .128 -.105 S82 .473 -.031 -.493 .136 .355 .169 -.190 .036 .198 -.125 S83 .415 .123 -.330 .047 .286 -.042 -.489 -.300 .151 .239 S84 .537 -.454 .245 -.036 .036 .187 .010 .015 .308 -.148 Extraction Method: Principal Axis Factoring. a. 10 factors extracted. 20 iterations required.

Factor: 1 - Factor 1 comprises of, Set: 1 - question number 1; Set: 2 - question number 2; Set:3 - question number3; Set:7 - question number 1; Set:7 - question number 2; and Set:8 - question

101 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table 5 : Rotated Factor Matrix a Factor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 S11 .437 .157 .049 .437 -.049 -.111 -.068 .032 -.142 .053 S12 .123 .410 -.033 .577 -.096 .301 .017 .050 -.318 .177 S13 .132 .134 -.273 -.088 .009 .723 -.008 .133 -.016 .031 S14 -.152 -.681 .022 .020 .083 -.159 .207 .006 .277 -.092 S21 -.013 -.069 -.289 -.357 .104 -.050 -.016 -.515 .253 .081 S22 .522 -.102 .176 .252 .325 -.013 -.140 .021 .379 .114 S23 -.469 -.030 -.051 .256 -.629 .088 .205 -.029 .110 -.008 S24 .027 .136 .073 .022 .015 .147 -.092 .147 -.064 .910 S31 -.124 -.067 -.108 -.324 -.674 -.012 -.241 -.086 -.084 .196 S32 -.006 .664 .091 -.230 .387 .398 -.121 .048 .151 .091 S33 -.566 -.296 .292 .381 .157 -.116 .111 -.138 -.149 -.071 S34 -.241 .017 -.019 -.007 -.503 .055 .071 -.587 .066 .533 S41 .080 .420 .070 .082 -.215 .009 .386 -.299 .247 .183 S42 -.031 -.062 .125 -.183 -.262 -.148 .156 -.032 .766 -.115 S43 -.118 -.212 .202 .694 .035 -.110 .121 -.010 -.012 -.081 S44 .156 -.448 .247 .026 -.147 -.335 .080 -.050 .223 .213 S51 .066 .240 .127 .198 .097 .730 -.111 .122 -.030 .073 S52 .133 .700 -.192 .375 .220 .153 -.019 .171 -.029 .015 S53 .168 .134 -.092 .009 -.022 .290 -.842 .021 -.045 .064 S54 .109 .172 .033 .086 .770 .095 .044 -.071 -.248 .096 S61 .139 -.200 .807 -.084 .095 -.193 .001 -.024 -.124 .322 S62 -.091 .028 .842 .057 -.006 -.062 .044 -.047 .163 -.052 S63 -.340 -.089 .584 .100 .305 .085 .437 .088 .187 -.045 S64 .476 .724 -.119 -.048 .143 .163 .090 .051 .154 .037 S71 .819 .269 -.151 .061 .249 .099 -.058 .099 -.116 -.042 S72 .884 -.024 .102 -.017 .199 .218 -.058 .176 .058 -.058 S73 .009 .090 -.180 .868 .168 .086 -.039 .025 .029 .036 S74 -.288 -.307 .300 .202 .255 -.278 .469 -.298 -.121 -.167 S81 -.070 -.182 .134 .038 .061 -.762 .223 .224 .150 -.099 S82 .411 .145 -.173 -.014 -.073 -.044 -.322 .369 .492 .152 S83 .236 .061 -.129 -.041 .022 .063 -.043 .793 .142 .242 S84 -.141 .473 -.507 .057 -.038 .213 -.301 -.080 .159 .188 Extraction Method: Principal Axis Factoring. Rotation Method: Varimax with Kaiser Normalization. number 2 which comes under the criteria values, rooms and furniture, beliefs, communication and celebrations respectively. Factor: 2 - Factor 2 comprises of – Set: 1 - question number 4; Set: 3 - question number 2; Set: 4 - question number 1; Set:4 - question number 4; Set: 5 - question number 2; and Set:6 - question 102 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 number 4; which comes under the criteria values, beliefs, leadership, rituals in meetings, primacy respectively. Factor: 3 - Factor 3 comprises of Set: 6 - question number 1; Set: 6 - question number 2; Set: 6 - question number 3; and Set: 8 - question number 4 which comes under the criteria primacy and celebrations. Factor: 4 - Factor 4 comprises of Set: 1 - question number 2; Set: 4 - question number 3; and Set: 7 - question number 4 which comes under the criteria, leadership and communication respectively. Factor: 5 - Factor 5 comprises of –Set: 2 - question number 3; Set: 5 - question number 4 and Set:3 - question number 1 which comes the criteria rooms and furniture, rituals in meeting, and beliefs respectively. Factor: 6 - Factor 6 comprises of Set: 1 - question number 3; Set: 5 - question number 1 and –Set: 8 - question number 1 which comes under the criteria values, rituals in meeting and celebrations respectively. Factor: 7 - Factor 7 comprises of Set: 5 - question number 3 and Set: 7 - question number 4 which comes under the criteria rituals in meeting and communication respectively. Factor: 8 - Factor 8 comprises of Set: 2 - question number 1; set: 8 - question number 3, and Set: 3 - question number 4 which comes under the criteria rooms and furniture, celebrations and beliefs respectively. Factor: 9 - Factor 9 comprises of Set: 4 - question number 2 which comes under the criteria leadership. Table 6 : Factor Transformation Matrix

Factor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 .479 .563 -.316 .032 .154 .428 -.296 .202 -.038 .127 2 .338 -.067 .467 .409 .613 -.125 .198 .213 -.060 -.133 3 - .299 -.005 .573 .018 .319 .155 -.222 -.346 .051 .534 4 .071 .244 .621 -.059 -.252 .123 .095 -.116 .302 .595 5 .221 -.200 -.175 .657 -.501 -.252 -.146 .273 .103 .168 6 - .429 -.240 .106 -.012 -.212 .499 -.096 .604 -.281 .005 7 .398 .057 -.156 .052 .053 -.369 .038 -.739 -.295 .195 8 .156 -.417 .012 .203 .039 .553 -.164 -.445 .426 -.215 9 - -.133 -.307 .074 .531 -.180 -.224 .010 .344 .545 .321 10 .178 -.332 -.301 -.091 .003 .319 .701 .154 -.147 .348 Extraction Method: Principal Axis Factoring. Rotation Method: Varimax with Kaiser Normalization.

103 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Factor: 10 - Factor 10 comprises of Set: 2 - question number 4 which comes under the criteria rooms and furniture. The ten factors results 82.325% of variation explained by the total Organizational Culture Profile (OCP). The remaining variation is due to some unforeseen factors which are not considered in our study. Rotation converged in 17 iterations.

Respondents Rating on Organisational Culture Profile

Table 7 Responses on Organisational Culture Profile

Cumulative Frequency Percent Percent Good description of your 41 97.6 97.6 organization Describes closely to the 1 2.4 100.0 organization Total 42 100.0

Chart 1 Responses on Organisational Culture Profile

Interpretation: Table 7 shows the per cent of response on Organisational Culture Profile. Out of 42 respondents 97.6 percent have rated good description of Elite Food Pvt Ltd 2.4% describes their group profile is closely to the organization. Inference: Majority of the respondents agrees that high culture profile exist in the organization. Findings, Suggestions and Conclusion Findings • The study reveals that the common factors that contribute to organizational culture profile at Elite Food is values, rooms & furniture, celebrations and rituals in meeting.

104 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

• It is understood from the study that high organizational culture profile exist in Elite Food Pvt. Ltd. Suggestions The study reveals that, organizational culture profile of Elite Food Pvt. Ltd., Aroor is very high. In order to maintain that, the company may implement the following recommendations. 1. Autocratic leadership could be maintained by improving proper protocol in relation to the persons in power. 2. Bureaucratic leadership could be maintained by making employees to follow proper rules and regulations willingly. This helps employees to avoid procedural mistakes, both behavioral rules and technical rules. 3. Technocratic culture could be maintained with a backup climate of extension. 4. Entrepreneurial culture could be maintained by developing a sense of social responsibility as well as strong sense of responsibility among employees to fulfill their need. It can also be achieved by using proactive entrepreneurial behavior, by optimizing risk, innovating to take advantages of opportunities, taking personal responsibility and managing change within a dynamic environment for the benefit of the organization. CONCLUSION Organizational culture refers to a system of shared meaning held by the members that distinguishes the organization from other organization. Distribution and concentration of power can be one basis of classifying culture. From this angle organization culture can be of four types: autocratic, bureaucratic, technocratic and entrepreneurial. In this study, it was found that the Organizational culture Profile of Elite Food Pvt Ltd Aroor is high. Elite Food should maintain the existing culture profile to achieve the organizational goal efficiently and effectively.

BIBLIOGRAPHY • Deepak Chawla & Neena Sondhi (2011). Research Methodology (1st Ed.). New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House Pvt, Ltd. • Fred Luthans (2013). Organizational Behaviour (12th Ed.). New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House. • Gary Dessler & Biju Varkkey (2011). Human Resource Management (12th Ed.). New Delhi: Pearson Publications. • Stephen P. Robbins, (2013). Organizational Behaviour (15th Ed.). New Delhi: Pearson Education, Inc. • Udai Pareek, (2007). Training instruments in HRD and OD (3nd Ed.). New Delhi: Oxford University Press. Websites • Retrieved on 15-07-2015 from http://www.eliteindia.com/ • Retrieved on 04-08-2015 from http://makeinindia.com/sector/food-processing/ • Retrieved on 07-07-2015 from http://www.india-opportunities.es/foodprocessing.php?lang=ing

105 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT: AN EMERGING DISCIPLINE

Jayashankar J. Assistant Professor Dept. of Commerce, The Chapter College, Kollam, Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Knowledge management is based on the fundamental concept that one of the most valuable assets of an organization is the experience and expertise that reside in the heads of its officers, managers and employees. In order to derive the maximum benefit from this intellectual capital, ways and means must be devised to manage this knowledge, capture it and share it with others, particularly the coworkers. If executed and implemented in a proper manner, knowledge management is expected to create a more collaborative environment, cut down on duplication of effort and encourage knowledge sharing. In the process, there will be considerable savings in terms of time and money. Key words : Knowledge, Management, Knowledge Management, Knowledge Structuring, Knowledge Auditing, Knowledge Creating, Knowledge Assets, Knowledge Capital

INRODUCTION Knowledge management is not one single discipline. Rather, it an integration of numerous endeavors and fields of study. Many of us simply do not think in terms of managing knowledge, but we all do it. Each of us is a personal store of knowledge with training, experiences, and informal networks of friends and colleagues, whom we seek out when we want to solve a problem or explore an opportunity. Essentially, we get things done and succeed by knowing an answer or knowing someone who does. Fundamentally, knowledge management is about applying the collective knowledge of the entire workforce to achieve specific organisational goals. The aim of knowledge management is not necessarily to manage all knowledge, just the knowledge that is most important to the organisation. It is about ensuring that people have the knowledge they need, where they need it, when they need it – the right knowledge, in the right place, at the right time. Knowledge management is unfortunately a misleading term – knowledge resides in people’s heads and managing it is not really possible or desirable. What we can do, and what the ideas behind knowledge management are all about, is to establish an environment in which people are encouraged to create, learn, share, and use knowledge together for the benefit of the organisation, the people who work in it, and the organisation’s customers. Knowledge management is based on the idea that an organisation’s most valuable resource

106 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 is the knowledge of its people. This is not a new idea organizations have been managing “human resources” for years. What is new is the focus on knowledge. This focus is being driven by the accelerated rate of change in today’s organizations and in society as a whole. Knowledge management recognizes that today nearly all jobs involve “knowledge work” and so all staff are “knowledge workers” to some degree or another meaning that their job depends more on their knowledge than their manual skills. This means that creating, sharing and using knowledge are among the most important activities of nearly every person in every organization. Objectives of the Study 1. To explore the concept of knowledge management. 2. To analyse the history and evolution of knowledge management. 3. To understand the goals, functions and stages of knowledge management. 4. To evaluate the needs of knowledge management in India. Methodology: The study is exploratory and analytical in nature, which is based on secondary data. The data for the study were collected from various published source like books, journals, research articles and websites. The main aspects of the study have been discusses in detail with experts, researchers, and other eminent personalities in this field in order to get an insight into the subject. Concept of Knowledge Management Knowledge: According to Webster dictionary, knowledge is defined as ‘the fact or condition of knowing something with familiarity gained through experience or association’. Thus knowledge is understanding of or information about a subject that you get by experience or study, either known by one person or by people generally . Management The organization and coordination of the activities of a business in order to achieve defined objectives can be termed as management. Management is a process consisting of planning, organizing, actuating and controlling, performed to determine and accomplish the objectives by the use of people and resources. Knowledge Management Coinciding the term Knowledge and Management, it is easy to describe the term knowledge management. Knowledge management is the systematic management of an organization’s knowledge assets for the purpose of creating value and meeting tactical & strategic requirements; it consists of the initiatives, processes, strategies, and systems that sustain and enhance the storage, assessment, sharing, refinement, and creation of knowledge. Efficient handling of information and resources within a commercial organization can be termed as knowledge management. Knowledge management (KM) therefore implies a strong tie to organizational goals and strategy, and it involves the management of knowledge that is useful for some purpose and which creates value for the organization. Thus knowledge management supports in finding solutions to various questions in an organisation, such as 1. Where and in what forms knowledge exists? 107 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

2. What the organization needs to know; how to promote a culture conducive to learning, sharing, and knowledge creation? 3. How to make the right knowledge available to the right people at the right time? 4. How to best generate or acquire new relevant knowledge? 5. How to manage all of these factors so as to enhance performance in light of the organization’s strategic goals and short term opportunities and threats.? Davenport (1994) offered the still widely quoted definition: “Knowledge management is the process of capturing, distributing, and effectively using knowledge.” Ron Young, CEO/CKO Knowledge Associates International, offered another widely quoted definition: “Knowledge Management is the discipline of enabling individuals, teams and entire organisations to collectively and systematically create, share and apply knowledge, to better achieve their objectives” History of Knowledge Management Intellectually, broad, present-day knowledge management has many origins. 1. Intellectually, broad, present-day KM has many origins. 2. Another comes from concrete concerns for requirements of expertise in the workplace. 3. Others come from perspectives of educators and business leaders. 4. Recent perspectives come from efforts to explain economic driving forces in the “knowledge era” and the 20th Century efforts to increase effectiveness. Some of the intellectual roots include: Historic Efforts 1) Religion and Philosophy (e.g., epistemology) to understand the role and nature of knowledge and the permission of individuals “to think for themselves.” 2) Psychology to understand the role of knowledge in human behavior. 3) Economics and social sciences to understand the role of knowledge in society. 4) Business Theory to understand work, and its organization. 20th Century Efforts to Improve Effectiveness 1) Rationalization of Work (Taylorism), Total Quality Management, and Management Sciences to improve effectiveness. 2) Psychology, Cognitive Sciences, Artificial Intelligence (AI), and Learning Organization to learn faster than competition and provide foundation for making people more effective. These and other perspectives on the roots of KM are discussed by many authors. A number of management theorists have contributed to the evolution and development of knowledge management. Some of among such theorists are Peter.F. Drucker, Paul Strassman and Peter Senge in the United States. Drucker and Strassman have indicated deeply the growing importance of information and explicit knowledge as organisational resources, and Senge has focused on the “learning organisation,” a cultural dimensions of managing knowledge. By the mid 1980 s, the importance of knowledge(and its expression in professional competence) as a competitive asset 108 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 was apparent, even though classical economic theory ignores (the value of) knowledge as an asset and most organisations still lack strategies and methods for managing it. Recognition of the growing importance of organisational knowledge was accompanied by concern over how to deal with exponential increases in the amount of available knowledge and increasingly complex products and processes. The computer technology that contributed so heavily to superabundance of information started to become part of solution, in a variety of domains. The 1980s also saw the development of systems for managing knowledge that relied on work done in artificial intelligence and expert systems giving us such concepts as “knowledge acquistion,” “knowledge engineering,” “knowledge base systems,” and computer based ontologies. To provide technological base for managing knowledge, a consoritum of US companies started the initiative for managing knowledge assets in 1989. Knowledge management related articles began appearing in journals like Sloan management review, Organizational science, Harvard business review, and others, and the first books on organizational learning and knowledge management were published. By 1990, a number of management consulting firms had begun in house knowledge management programs, and several well known US, European, and Japanese firms had instituted focussed knowledge management programs. Knowledge management was introduced in popular press in 1991, when Tom Stewart published “Brainpower” in Fortune magazine. By mid 1990s, knowledge management initiatives were flourishing, thanks in part to the internet. The International Knowledge Management Network(IKMN), begun in Europe in 1989,went online in 1994 and was soon joined by the US based Knowledge management forum and other knowledge management related groups and publications. Knowledge management, which appears to offer a highly desirable alternative to failed TQM and BPR initiatives, has become big business for such major international consulting firms as Ernst & Young, Arthur Andersen, and Booz-Allen and Hamilton. In addition, a number of professional organisations interested in such related areas as benchmarking, best practices, risk management, and Change management are exploring the relationship of knowledge management to their areas of special expertise. Goals of Knowledge Management The primary role of KM is to connect to “knowledge nodes” both the knowledge providers and the knowledge seekers. Based on a study of 31 KM projects in 24 companies, Davenport, De Long and Beers identified four goals of knowledge management: 1. To Capture Knowledge: This goal can be achieved by creating KM repositories. Those will consist of structured documents with Knowledge embedded in them memos, reports, presentations, articles stored in a way that they may be easily retrieved. 2. To Improve Knowledge Access: To facilitate the processes of knowledge transfer between individuals and between organizations. 3. To Enhance the Knowledge Environment: By proactively facilitating and rewarding knowledge creation, transfer and use. 4. To Manage Knowledge as an Asset: Some companies are including their intellectual capital 109 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

in the balance sheet, others are leveraging their knowledge assets to generate new income from or to reduce costs with their patent base. Functions of Knowledge Management Functions performed by KM are divided in five main categories: 1. Intermediation: Intermediation refers to the brokering or knowledge transfer between an appropriate knowledge provider and knowledge seeker. Its role is to “match” a knowledge seeker with the optimal source of knowledge for that seeker. By doing so, intermediation ensures a much more efficient transfer of knowledge. 2. Externalization: Externalization refers to the transfer of knowledge from the minds of its holders into an external repository, in the most efficient way possible. The function of externalization is to provide the sharing of knowledge. This is where Competitive Intelligence/ Business Intelligence comes in. Through KM tools it is possible to track the vast quantity of data about competitors from news stories to price changes. 3. Internalization: Internalization is the extraction of knowledge from the external repository, and the filtering of this knowledge to provide greater relevance to the knowledge seeker. Knowledge should be presented to the user in the form most suitable to its comprehension. This, this function may include interpretation and/or reformatting of the presentation of the knowledge. To implement this function, companies can build yellow pages thus mapping and categorizing the skills and work experience of the organization. Another aspect of internalization would be the documentation of best practices. 4. Cognition: Cognition is the function of systems to make decisions based on available knowledge. Cognition is the application of knowledge which has been exchanged through the preceding three functions. 5. Measurement: Measurement refers to all KM activities that measure, map and quantify corporate knowledge and the performance of KM solutions. This function acts to support the other four functions, rather than to actually manage the knowledge itself. These macro KM functions are combinations of many atomic functions, namely those of: • Finding, mapping, gathering, and filtering information; • Developing new knowledge (identifying relations among items and sharing information); • Converting personal knowledge into shared knowledge resources; • Understanding and learning; • Adding value to information to create knowledge; • Enabling action through knowledge (performance and management); • Processing shared knowledge resources; delivering (transferring) explicit knowledge; • Building adequate technical infrastructures. Stages of Knowledge Management Knowledge Creating Exploring knowledge creating stage where can be processed in organization leads us to focus which individual, group, and department on. Because if knowledge cannot be created in 110 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 organization; neither sharing nor auditing knowledge can be carried out. Organizational participants create knowledge through their intuition, ability, skills, behaviors, and work experiments. Key players, departments and their interactivity can play a critical role in creating knowledge in organization. Knowledge Sharing The second important stage of knowledge management life cycle is knowledge sharing. The ways and tools for effective knowledge sharing as follows: • Formal social communication network, • Informal social communication network, • Teamwork, • Communities of practices, • Organizational learning, • Rumors and, • Formal structured technological communication networks (e-mail, mobile communications, teleconferences, videoconferences, etc.) Knowledge sharing involves creating knowledge by individuals and groups with their interactivity and connectivity in organizations. Knowledge sharing is carried out by social and technical communication channels. If organizational infrastructure is suitable for aligning the knowledge management system infrastructure, the successful knowledge sharing can be carried out. a. Constructing Social Communication Infrastructure This infrastructure requires an effective interactivity between workers in informal ways. The main purpose of this infrastructure is not only converting tacit knowledge into explicit forms in the individual level, but also transmitting message from bottom to up and up to bottom in appropriate positions in the organizational level. Three types of network should be constructed while designing social communication channel: • Oral communication, written communication, and nonverbal communication b. Constructing Technical Communication Infrastructure Technical communication infrastructure refers to information and communication technology. Information networks, technical communities of practice, internet, web-based networks, intranets, and extranets should be considered in this context. Participants can share their expertise knowledge through e-mail, in-group computerized communication networks, databases, telephone conversations. Technical communication infrastructure which is known as formal communication networks provide in sharing, structuring, classifying and organizing explicit/tacit knowledge in the environment. Knowledge Structuring After constructing a perfect infrastructure system for knowledge sharing; data, information and knowledge should be structured in order to store in organization’s database for the future needs. Structuring knowledge is based on sorting, organizing, codifying, analyzing, and reporting

111 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 information that provides information retrieval what organization needs in the future. a. Information mapping Mapping knowledge puts forward determining textual/graphical, audio/visual, tacit/explicit forms of knowledge and finding suitable information sources in organizations b. Information storing Information storing that contains knowledge repositories such as databases, data warehouses, and information centers and indicates electronic environment of organizational memory. c. Information retrieving Knowledge is stored and retrieved via information retrieval systems such as surrogates, user interface, Boolean logic, Fuzzy logic, Vector query, and Extended Boolean logic. The aim of information retrievalis to access retrospective information of organization and to share for all users who need information. Knowledge Using: Organizations use knowledge for three reasons: a. Processes: Knowledge can be used for determining organization’s work processes and making strategies for sustainable competitive advantage. b. Product: Knowledge can be used for designing and marketing product. c. Services: Knowledge plays a critical role of organization’s services quality. Knowledge Auditing Knowledge auditing means analysing what amount of knowledge can be used in organization’s products, services and processes. The knowledge audit provides value when company is doing one or more of the following: § Devising a knowledge-based strategy, § Architecting a knowledge management blueprint or roadmap, § Planning a build a knowledge management system, § Planning research and development, § Seeking to leverage its ‘people assets’, § Facing competition from knowledge intensive competitors that are far ahead on the learning curve, § Striving to strengthen its own competitive weakness, § Looking for direction for planning a market entry or exist strategy. Another critical factor for auditing knowledge in organization is measuring intellectual capital, intangibles such as information, knowledge and skills that can be leveraged by an organization to produce an asset of equal or greater importance than land, labor and capital. Knowledge Management in India KM India is an endeavor undertaken to create a more robust Indian ecosystem that generates economic value through the effective harnessing of knowledge and intellectual capital, within knowledge-based organizations and industries. The intent is to create a better understanding

112 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 of knowledge management practices, research and practical applications. Stakeholders in this ecosystem include KM practitioners, policy makers, as well as academicians and researchers. As better knowledge management practices get instituted within India, the quality and quantity of knowledge being generated and consumed will be enhanced, thereby allowing the accelerated production of economic value. This initiative is intended to support India’s emergence as a knowledge superpower, in a connected global economy. The objective of Making India a Knowledge Superpower by 2020 and the emerging threat from countries like China, Vietnam, Taiwan there is an urgent need of knowledge empowerment and the challenges before us are to enhance the intellectual capital of country to become a global leader in knowledge led manufacturing and service industries. There is a need to be able to meet the indigenous needs for a knowledgeable and skilled manpower for various solutions without compromising on our ability to fulfill global needs. Towards realizing this object, CII has formed a Mission on Knowledge and Skills. The Core Purpose of the Mission is to Institute a sustainable framework that would assist industry across sectors in developing knowledge and skills abilities in our workforce to International Standards. Terminology related to knowledge management Knowledge capital: An intangible asset that comprises the information and skills of a company’s employees, their experience with business processes, group work and on-the-job learning. Knowledge capital is not like the physical factors of production - land, labor and capital - in that it is based on skills that employees share with each other in order to improve efficiencies, rather than on physical items. Having employees with skills and access to knowledge capital puts a company at a comparative advantage to its competitors. Knowledge gap An enterprise must state its business strategies and objectives. The knowledge requirements have to be identified to meet these goals. The difference between what the enterprise requires and what it currently has is what is called the knowledge gap. Knowledge work Job, process, or task that is distinguished by its information content or requirements. Knowledge worker Employees such as data analysts, product developers, planners, programmers, and researchers who are engaged primarily in acquisition, analysis, and manipulation of information as opposed to in production of goods or services. Popularized by the US management guru Peter Drucker (born 1909, in Austria). The most valuable knowledge in an organisation is in the heads of the employees. In general, knowledge workers are people who, when working, use their brain more than their muscles. Chief knowledge officer or Chief learning officer or Chief executive Officer A chief knowledge officer (CKO) is an organizational leader, responsible for ensuring that the organization maximizes the value it achieves through “knowledge”. The CKO is responsible for managing intellectual capital and the custodian of Knowledge Management practices in an organization.

113 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Knowledge assets ‘Information or skills within a business that make it more valuable or competitive. A useful or valuable quality person or thing, an advantage or a resource. CONCLUSION Knowledge can be classified into two broad categories: tacit and explicit. Tacit knowledge resides in the minds of people. The acquisition of tacit knowledge is usually developed through a process of trial and error during practical experience. Explicit knowledge is formal knowledge or information. The acquisition of explicit knowledge is usually achieved by formal study through some type of education process. What really distinguishes an organization from another is not its explicit knowledge. The key to its competitiveness resides in tacit knowledge, and one of the core objectives of knowledge management is to expand the understanding and application of tacit knowledge throughout an organization. To turn personal knowledge into corporate knowledge, subjective tacit knowledge must be externalized into an explicit form of representation. Once the knowledge is externalized, it is easier to move across communication networks. Several challenges are faced by an organization in this process. The first challenge is to capture and formulate tacit knowledge into a communicable form. The second challenge is to make the knowledge easily available to the entire organization. The third and ultimate challenge is to develop an organizational culture for seeking and using tacit knowledge. Preserving this knowledge and maintaining security checks through the transferring process are additional challenges for practitioners. References • Bhojaraj.G (2005)- Knowledge management: why do we need it for corporates. • Brian Newman, Kurt.W.Conrad(1999)- A framework for characterizing knowledge management methods, practices and technologies. • Karl.M.Wiig (1999) Knowledge management: An emerging discipline rooted in a long history. • Ludmila Mladkova (2004)- Knowledge management for knowledge workers. • William.R.King(2009)- Knowledge management and organisational learning. • Corporate Governance(2008)- Dr.K.Manoharan Nair, P.S Devakumar • Knowledge management in theory and practice(2005)- Kimiz Dalkir. Websites • www.aseanfoundation.org. • www.differencebetween.net • www.knowledge-management-tools.net • www.mit.edu/ecom • www.wikipedia.org

114 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

BACKWATERS OF KERALA, AN UNPARALLELED TOURISM ENVIRONMENT OF THE WORLD

Dr. A. Basheer Associate Professor, Head of the Dept. of Commerce, M.S.M. College, Kayamkulam.

ABSTRACT Tourism and environment are closely related. The environment provides the basic resources of tourism development. Only if a country is enriched with natural resources, tourism can be promoted. It is the foundation of tourism. All most all tourism products of Kerala are based on natural environment. The important tourism products of Kerala are backwater tourism, hill station tourism, beach tourism, wildlife tourism, waterfalls tourism, Ayurvedic health tourism, monsoon tourism, farm tourism, plantation tourism, village tourism, medical tourism, pilgrim tourism, cultural tourism etc. Among these, backwater tourism is the most important tourism product. Backwater of Kerala is the most important natural environment of Kerala tourism. It is unique in Kerala and not seen elsewhere in the world. Most of the backwaters of Kerala are located in the southern Kerala; mainy, Kollam, Alappuzha, Kottayam and Ernakulam districts.

INTRODUCTION Kerala is the land of canals, lagoons, lakes and rivers. These backwaters with their peculiar landscape have had a direct impact on the lifestyle of people who live along its banks. Kerala’s uniqueness lies in these backwaters found nowhere else in the world. This forms beautiful and economically viable features of Kerala. The 41 west-flowing rivers of Kerala form the backbone to this magnificent gift of nature. The backwaters are a gateway for the visitor to see first hand and the unhurried village life of rural Kerala.1 It can be called as a self supporting eco- system teeming with aquatic life. The coastal belt is relatively flat and welds with interconnected canals and rivers. The length of the coastal belt comes equal to the length of the state, around 450 km from south to the north. The largest three backwaters in the world is in Kerala; Vembanad lake, Ashtamudi lake and Sasthamkottah lake. Among these, the first two lakes are used for backwater tourism. The Vembanad lake is the largest one, which has an area of 2002 km and lies between Alappizha and Kochi. The comparative water –richness of the coastal belt can be partly gauged by the fact that Kuttanad, with its backwaters, canals and rivers, itself comprises more than 20 % of India’s waterways by length. During monsoon season the whole area looks as a one sheet of water. It has

115 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 an area of 7772 km. The most important rivers of Kerala are Periyar and Bharathapuzha, having a length of 244 km and 209 km respectively. The total length of inland waterways in the state is 1687 Kms. The State Water Transport Department operates passenger boats in the water lodged areas of Alappuzha, Kollam, Kottayam, Ernakulam, Kannur and kasaragod districts. The gross distance is 6018 Kms with scheduled trips of 689. There are 47 boats in operation2. The most prestigious tourism product of Kerala is backwater tourism. The facility of boating is the attraction of it. According to Abraham, one of the authors of the Rough South India Guide, “one of the most memorable experiences of travelers in India is the opportunity to take a boat journey on the backwaters of Kerala”.3 Different types of boats are used for boating namely, speed boat, luxury boat, houseboat etc. In the case of speed boat, the capacity of passengers are limited where as in case of big luxury boats, fifty to seventy five passengers can be accommodated. The most luxury product of backwater tourism is house boating. It is huge, slow moving exotic barge used for leisure trips. “In Kerala, houseboats are known as Kettuvalloms. Boats in a variety of shapes and sizes have traditionally been the chief mode of transport in the backwater for men and material since olden days. Thatched roof covers over wooden hulls, 100 ft in length, provided protection from the elements. Over time, simple facilities were added to the boats used exclusively for travel. For the royalty, these boats even became comfortable living quarters. Later, tourism provided the necessary fillip in transforming the age-old kettuvalloms into veritable floating cottages with all the modern amenities”4. Kettuvalloms and houseboats are constructed in the boat building yard at Allumkadave, 4 km away from Karunagappally, in Kollam district. Vembanad and Ashtamudi lakes are the main backwaters of Kerala. National water way from Kollam to Kottapuram, covers a distance of 205 km which facilitates both cargo movement and backwater tourism. Houseboat journey along the backwaters of Kerala is a most memorable experience of a tourist who passes through the state. Houseboat is operating from Kollam to Alappuzha, the longest and the most enchanting backwater experience, offering charming picture- postcard scenes of the interplay between the earth and water. For promoting tourism, department of water transport restart the boat service of Kollam-Alappuzha, this had stopped 12 years back. The service is aimed to enjoy the beauty of Ashtamudi Lake and Vembanad Lake with minimum cost of Rs 300 per head. Two luxury boats with a passenger capacity of 75 per boat will start at 10.30 A.M from Kollam and Alappuzha at the same time. The total distance is 79 km. and will take a running time of 7 hours. The total cost of the two luxury boats came to Rs 75 lakhs.5 There are a number of destinations popular for other tourism products like wildlife tourism, hill station tourism etc. and backwater tourism at the same time. Example are Periyar Tiger Reserve and Thattekad Bird Sanctuary. Here, boating through the backwaters is required for enjoying the beauty of the Tiger Reserve and Bird sanctuary. However, some destinations are particularly famous for backwater tourism. Some important backwater tourism destinations in Kerala are Thruvallam, Veli, Akkulam, Kappil, Kollam, Alappuzha, Kuttanad, QST&R Block Kayals, Pathiramanal, Kumarakom, Kochi, Bolgatty Island, Willingdon Island, Kozhikode and Valiyaparamba. More than one thousand house boats are operating in the Alappuzha, Kumarakom and Cochin region alone. In addition to this, numerous luxuries and other types of motor boats are there. Since, house boat operation is a highly profitable business, more and more private investors are attracted to it. 116 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

There are some complaints related to upkeep and maintenance of some house boats. For providing quality service to the tourist, the department of tourism was set up a scheme for classification of house boats for protecting the interest of the tourist. Accordingly, two types of classification are made for grading; Gold star and Silver star. Green Palm certificate is also issued to those house boats which adopt environment friendly practices. Ten percent investment subsidy is given to those house boats approved by the department of tourism under this scheme. The fast growth of number of boats created heavy pollution in the backwaters and protests have been raised by the traditional workers like fishermen, agriculturist and local people. The fishermen argued that they are losing their job and create threads to their livelihood because of considerable reduction in the fish stock. Moreover, they are not able to sell fish due to kerosene content in the fish. The paddy field is polluted due to oil contents, farmers are not getting workers due to health concerns. Most of the workers are suffering from skin diseases. Solid waste management is one of the most challenging problems of environment. Poor storage arrangement at transfer stations incinerators or treatment plants, can attract flies or vermin. Most of the environmental health problems arise from the municipal sewage system that pollutes the river water. The indiscriminate defecating of land and river water also contributes to the harmful viral, bacterial disease factors into the river water.6 The house boat is also create threads to cultivation. The oil and kerosene are spreading to the paddy fields. It is affecting the rice cultivation adversely. In the past, local people were depending on the backwaters for drinking and domestic purposes. But now it is very difficult to them to manage these problems due to pollution in the backwaters. The negative impacts arise out of unplanned and uncontrolled tourism flow in the destination. Pollution levels in the backwaters of Kerala are raising as the number of house boats increases, since fuel refilling is done without proper care and sewage and kitchen waste water are released directly into the waters.7 A film of oil has been fast spreading over the water in the lake. It is alarmingly thick in punnamada and Kumarakom where the largest number of house boats anchor.8 Oil and fuel from two-stroke engines is being released through motorized boating activity. Between 25 and 30 percent of the fuel and required oil that conventional two-stroke use is ejected unburned through the tailpipe and into the marine ecosystem.9 The gills, through which the fish breaths are coated with oil. They have been showing a tendency to migrate en masse to the area of the lake where the film is thin or absent. If the situation goes unchecked, fish and other aquatic organisms will perish soon.10 Cutting and destroying of mangroves for constructing resorts near backwaters create serous threads to environment. Most of the house boats are not using the facility of incinerator. They are discharging human excreta and other wastes directly into the lake. The bottom of the lake is filled with bio-no degradable wastes like plastic carry bags, plastic bottles etc. There is no strict rule to check this type of pollution. Animal and chicken wastes from meat shops are dumped into the backwaters are decayed, which spread bad smell and contaminated the backwaters and canal water. Moreover, in some places, toilet outlets of houses and hotel waste pipes are opened to the canals which create another thread. Wherever a proper sewage disposal system is not installed, there may be pollution of ground water from the sewage of places like hotels, resorts and tourist’s lodges. Also if the sewage has not being adequately treated before its outfall in a near by river or lake, it would

117 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 pollute the water of the area.11 During summer season, water level of lake falls, even below six feats. When boats are operating, the mud from the under ground of lake are spread to the bottom which create bad smell in the area. Omitting sensation is felt among tourists which results dissatisfaction. No effort has been taken by the tourism planners for dredging and cleaning the canals to facilitate easy boating. There is no fixed rate system for pricing of boating. It will vary from place to place, season to off-season and person to person. Often, middlemen are exploiting the tourists. This creates strong dissatisfaction among tourists because they felt that they are exploited by agent’s and boat owners. No fixed tariff rate is fixed by the controlling authorities. Some defamation against house boat is that it promotes anti-social activities. Hundreds of house boats anchor during night in the Vembanad Lake. Anybody can hire a house boat. There is no strict system of police checking on house boats because of liberal policy of authorities for promotion of tourism. According to R. Visakhan, former president, Kainakari Grama Panchayat, “the house boats are a big menace now. They are discharging human excreta, condoms and other waste into the lake. The bottom of the lake is full of plastic carry bags and bottles. The industry doesn’t have any social commitment”.12 The negative impacts arise out of unplanned and uncontrolled tourism flow in the destination. The development of tourism should be planned and regulated unless negative impact will appear immediately. Profit motive is the only motto of the entrepreneurs. They don’t mind whether the industry is to be sustained or not. They have no social commitment. The development of backwater tourism should be made after considering the carrying capacity. Carrying capacity means the maximum number of visitors that can be accommodated in a destination during a particular period without compromising the level of satisfaction to the tourist and not making damages to the environment and host population. The measurement of the carrying impacts of a tourism destination is effectively considered as a point from where the negative factors starts to operate. The most important criteria in this respect are the physical one. Since if an over crowding is done by the large number of visitor of a limited space available in the destination, it would cause damage to the environment.13 Even though there are so many tourism products in the state, the pioneer and most attractive among them is backwater tourism. All type of tourists, irrespective of their place origin attracted this product. Enjoying the beauty by boating through the backwaters of Kerala is an ever remember able experience to every tourist. So, there is a high demand on this product and backwater tourism has been achieved remarkable growth in recent times. The government is promoting tourism by giving investment subsidies to the investors of tourism sector to attract new and new investors. When tourism develops, side effects will also appear. The efficiency of the tourism planners depends on how the negative environmental impact can eliminated or minimized to sustain tourism. Hence, evaluating the carrying capacity of backwaters, environment evaluation assessment are highly wanted unless it will create dissatisfaction among tourists which will in turn hinder tourism development and strong protest from the part of host community will be invited.

118 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

CONCLUSION The backwater tourism of the state must be sustained. Fast development must be restricted. The carrying capacity of motor boats in the backwaters should be determined after scientific study and at the mean time non-mechanized boats should also be promoted. The backwater tourism resources of our state are not only meant for the present generation, but also for the use of generation to come. Hence, sustainable backwater tourism development is advisable. The development of backwater tourism of our state must be controlled and carefully managed so that it remains sustainable. Particular attention must be paid to tourism in ecologically and culturally sensitive areas, where mass tourism should be avoided. All parties concerned, including in particular the private sector has a part to play in bringing about the sustainable development of tourism, and voluntary initiatives (code of contact, quality labels) should be encouraged. Particular importance should be attached to local level, which is not only responsible for sustainable development of tourism but should also derive particular benefit from tourism.14 If the government, international community and the tourism industry wants to save the world’s major backwater destination, immediate action is required. The Government and the tourism industry must abide to the principle that environmental protection is an integral part of the backwater tourism development of our state. References 1. Nimi Dev. R & Gabrial Simon Thattil (2005), Kerala: Perspective on an All-in-one Tourist Destination, Tourism and sustainable Development, Edited by M. Sarngadharan & G.Raju, New Century Publication, New Delhi, P 243 and 244. 2 Economic Review (2008), State Planning Board, Thiruvananthaperam. 3 Dileep.M.R, (2007) Kerala Calling, April, 2007,Information and Public Relation Dept. Thiruvananthapuram P20. 4 Edited by Akbar Ayub, Maps & More Kerala, Stark World, www. Starkworld. Net 2006 Edition 1,p 47. 5 Deshabhimani Daily, Thiruvananthapuram, dated January 29, 2010. 6. Nevesh Nigam (2002), Tourism Environment and development of Garhwal Himalaya, Mittal Publications, New Delhi, p. 124. 7. K.K. Musthafah.The Hindu Business Line, 29 Aug, 2002. 8. K.G.Padma kumar, Kumorakom Regional Agricultural Research station, Indian Express, 24 January, 2005. 9. Bluewater Network,Tourismwatch/ KABANI 10. K.G.Padma kumar, Kumorakom Regional Agricultural Research station, Indian Express, 24 January, 2005 11. Goldsmith. E, (1974), Pollution by Tourism, The Ecologist, Vol:48, No.3, pp 47-48. 12. Bluewater Network,Tourismwatch/ KABANI 13. O. Reilly. A.M, (1986) Tourism Carrying Capasity Tourism Management, Vol.7, No.4, pp 254-258 14. M. Lakshmi Narasaiah, (2006), Tourism and World Trade Organisation, Discovery Publishing House, New Delhi, p.2.

119 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE AND BUSINESS ETHICS IN INDIAN PERSPECTIVE

Rajasree P.S. Research Scholar (Commerce), Kerala University, Trivandrum, Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Corporate Governance is highly related with ethical conduct of business. Business is a form of economic activities, which is governed by the principle of input and output. Ethics, on the other hand is concerned with moral behavior of an individual and clarifies what can be described as right or wrong behavior. Business is a part and parcel of human life and business organizations do not exist and function outside the society. Therefore, business can not alienate itself from the concept and norms of good and bad, developed by human society.The increasing number of Corporate Scandals in the last few years have stained Corporate Governance reputation and questioned the effectiveness of its current structure. In light of this, in the paper we would like to discuss Corporate Governance as well as Business Ethics in the changing scenario. Keywords: Corporate Governance, ethical conduct

INTRODUCTION Earlier, it was thought that it is only Government which can govern. So, long back Kautilya and other ancient Indian thinkers tried to establish norms which should be followed by king for better governance. But, the book under reference was ‘‘Kautilya’s Arthastra’’ which itself shows that governance is more required in Commerce, Management and Economics rather than Politics. It can not be followed effectively in politics due to overriding political interests but needs and objects of business are well defined so corporates should follow it. Corporates are managed by directors and professionals, accounts are prepared by accountants and auditor are required to check it. But, governance is somewhat different. Management is about running the business but governance is about seeing that it runs properly. If auditor is required to check about corporate governance also then definitely he cannot confine his duties up to checking of accounts. He should go for management audit and propriety audit also to find out whether all decision are taken properly or not. A company is required to follow various types of Rules and Regulations so auditor should go for compliance audit to check it. ICAI has issued many Accounting Standards (AS) to maintain transparency but it cannot ensure good governance as it cannot ensure about many aspects of

120 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 accountability such as quality, quantity, relevance and timeliness. Corporate Governance is the system of structural, procedural and cultural safeguard designed to ensure that a corporation is run in the “best” long-term interests of its shareholders, as well as, other stakeholders. Corporate Governance may be elaborate as under: Corporate Governance is - • Business Ethics • Philosophy of Business • Culture of Organization • Corporate Social Responsibility • Shareholder Value Creation • Dynamic Leadership • Clean and Green World Corporate Governance (CG) is not merely about “ethical conduct of business “as the SEBI report on the subject says. It is about leadership. For, Governance means leadership, especially top leadership at the level of CEO & CFO and the Board of the Directors. The manifesto of CG must not be merely a manual of procedure or a legal document or even an ethical code. N. R. Narayana Murthy has mentioned corporate governance as a reflection of company’s culture, policies, how it deals with its stakeholders and its commitment to value. In Short, good Corporate Governance practices enhance companies’ value and stakeholders’ thrust resulting into robust development of capital market, the economy and also help in the evaluation of a vibrant and constructive shareholders’ activism. The Ethical Viewpoint Corporate ethics play an important role in ensuring good corporate governance and better corporate management. Corporate ethics and corporate governance support corporate management. Ethical lapses and dilemmas are one of the root causes of many problems that corporate management is facing today. Ethics can be defined broadly as the study of what is right or good for human beings. It attempts to determine what people ought to do and what goals they should pursue. Business ethics, as a branch of applied ethics, is the study and determination of what is right and good in business settings. Unlike legal analyses, analyses of ethics have no central authority, such as courts or legislatures, upon which to rely; nor do they follow clear-cut, universal standards. Despite these limitations it is still expected to make ethical judgments for better corporate management. However, the question is how to ensure that the ethical or legal principles of the organisation have been provided with care. The quest may lead us to get a hint about the ethical principles that are mentioned below: Due Process Due process means following rules and principles so that an individual is treated fairly and uniformly at all times. It also means fair and equitable treatment to all concerned parties. Two types of due process exist: procedural due process and substantive due process. Procedural due

121 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 process ensures that a formal proceeding is carried out regularly and in accordance with the established rules and principles. Substantive due process deals with a judicial requirement that enacted laws may not contain provisions that result in the unfair, arbitrary, or unreasonable treatment of an individual. Due process requires due care and due diligence. Due Care & Due Diligence Due care means reasonable care which promotes the common good. It maintains minimal and customary practices. Due diligence requires organizations to develop and implement an effective system of controls, policies, and procedures to prevent and detect violation of policies and laws. Due diligence is another way of saying due care. Due Professional Care As the name implies, due professional care applies to professionals such as business managers and executives, accountants, auditors, engineers, lawyers, doctors, and others. Individuals should apply the care and skill expected of a reasonable prudent and competent professional during their work. Codes of Conduct Today professionals want to practice their expertise, not necessarily to become managers and deal with human challenges. They have different goals and motives.” The expert knowledge in different fields will make the professionals to tackle new challenges in their day to day’s working field. Such areas of knowledge include knowledge about the legal framework, knowledge about human resource management, knowledge about strategic management, knowledge about costing & accounts etc. The acquisition of such knowledge makes a professional to be more efficient in finding out a prompt action while facing with a challenge. However, apart from acquiring the knowledge there are some ethical issue or code conduct which a professional must adhere to. The code of ethics is the principle guidelines for the professionals beyond which they are not expected to violate. Corporate Governance and Business Ethics Good Corporate Governance an integral part of every company even for its existence. It inspires and strengthens investors’ confidence by ensuring company’s commitment to higher growth and profits. It explains about company’s policies and actions to those to whom it owes responsibilities. Corporate Governance signifies that the Board of Directors are accountable to the shareholders and management is accountable to the Board of Directors. It signifies that management must have the freedom to drive the enterprise forward. It means the existence of a system of checks to prevent misuse of power and facilities. Corporate Governance helps to maintain Business Ethics as follows: 1. Corporate Governance suggests for installation of a properly structured board which is capable of taking independent and objective decisions. 2. Corporate Governance ensures a properly balanced board capable of checking interest of employees. 3. Corporate Governance helps to check how far companies are considering interest of

122 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

local community by providing things at right price and by protecting environment though it is not yet mandatory. 4. Corporate Governance is the acceptance by management of the inalienable rights of shareholders as the true owners of the corporation and of their own role as trustees on behalf of shareholders. It is about commitment to values, about ethical business conduct and about making a distinction between personal and corporate funds in the management of a company. 5. Now disclosure regarding Corporate Governance is mandatory as per clause 49 of listing agreement. But many corporates are not providing it properly, so, if business ethics are maintained this situation can be improved. Corporate Governance in Indian Perspective In our country, the subject acquired importance in momentum in 90’ specially when CII Code – ‘Desirable Corporate Governance’ was introduced in 1998. Soon after this, a committee was constituted in the chairmanship of Kumar Mangalam Birla who submitted his report on Corporate Governance in the year 2000. This report was mandated by SEBI by inserting a special clause for listed companies in a phased manner within a period of three years. Government of India constituted a committee under the chairmanship of former Cabinet Secretary, Naresh Chandra to examine certain key areas of Corporate Audit and Governance. SEBI also appointed another committee under the chairmanship of N. R. Narayanmurthy to study the need for further refinement on new dimensions of Corporate Governance. Both, committees submitted their reports in the year 2002 and 2003 respectively. After this, Government of India mainly considered Naresh Chandra Report and proposed certain new/revised clauses relating to Corporate Audit and Governance in its Companies Amendment Bill–2003. Problems in Good Corporate Governance Success of corporate governance is based on complete transparency and “arms length” relationship between owners and managers. Historically there have always been reasons excuses and incentives to encourage, “beating the system” and unhealthy corporate practices like tax evasion, as an attempt to create a level playing field in an unfriendly business and regulatory environment. Therefore a transparency and accountability are generally resisted by corporate managers; including family entrepreneurs who are not enlightened enough to the change in their role. We have seen that in India, or for that matter, in any protected environment, market forces along cannot be depended upon to ensure change in corporate practices. Left to itself, the process of change in corporate governance would be very slow. Hence, the need for a regulatory mechanism which will ensure effective monitoring for good corporate governance is now realized. Suggestions for Value Based Governance Nowadays much is talked about value-based governance, a concept which has ethical flavor. It is similar to management by values. Value based governance involves creation and establishment of appropriate values to direct the corporate-functioning and observing these values while exercising using and controlling the corporate power and resources for performing those functions. Value based governance requires value-creation in respect of employees, customers, investors and society.

123 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Corporate governance does not mean more and more regulations; its main focus should be on creating an environment where respectability matters. The Followings are some suggestions for creation of such value based governance environment: 1. Better balance of power between the management and the board. 2. There should be a peer evaluation for each member of the board. 3. Shareholders must actively stop us as owners and engage directors on corporate issues. 4. Change to mindset of managers and workers for implementation of business ethics. 5. Corporations must integrate their value systems into their recruitment programmes. 6. Every employee has to appreciate that the future of the corporation is safe only if he/she does the right thing in every transaction. 7. Corporations have to create systems, structures and incentives to promote transparency, since transparency brings accountability. 8. Corporate leaders believe in the values of the company. They are powerful role models. 9. Broader market reforms to create incentives for good governance. 10. Acceptance of IAS-IFRS by all nations will make it easy to compare the performance of corporations in an industry across the countries, in a global environment. CONCLUSION In India, we need to develop a robust model of CG as a fundamental ingredient for strengthening economies and developing capital markets. No doubt, there are minimum standards that must be observed by all corporations as enshrined in the country’s laws or the rules of self- regulatory organization, the demand of good governance can vary from industry to industry, firm to firm and even circumstance to circumstance. Good and value based corporate governance also includes development of appropriate leadership values and perpetually in good governance. Development of leadership values require supporting and encouraging open communication, initiative, team-work, knowledge sharing, empathizing and sharing success with fellow workers. References 1. Business Ethics by Dr. A.K.Gavai, Himalaya Publishing House Page No.161-165 2. Corporate Governance Voluntary Guidelines 2009, Issued by The Ministry Of Corporate Affairs, Chartered Secretary, January 2010, Page 157-161. 3. GoswamyOmkar, “The Tide Rises, Gradually- Corporate Governance in India”, www.oecd.org/dev. 4. Baxi, C. V. (2007), ‘Corporate Governance– Critical Issues’, Excel Books, New Delhi. 5. Code of Conduct, ICWA, ICAI, ICSI Rules; 6. Corporate Governance Voluntary Guidelines 2009, Ministry of Corporate affairs, Govt. of India;

124 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

STUDY ON FINANCIAL SERVICES PROVIDED BY INSTITUTIONS

Reenu Mary Thomas Assistant professor on Contract, UG department of Commerce Malabar Christian College, Calicut, Kerala

ABSTRACT Financial service is of course a part of the financial system; it provides various types of finance by way of different credit instruments, financial products and services in credit instruments, financial services involve bonds, debentures, zero coupon bond, deep discount bond, floating rates notes, gold bond scheme, letter or credit, etc In case of financial products, financial service involve mutual fund, credit card, debit card, add on card etc. Among the financial services the important are leasing, hire purchase, venture capital financing, factoring, for fainting, securitization of assets etc. With the help of financial services, the user can obtain the asset; can enjoy the services as per his convenience, at affordable cost or reasonable rate of interest. It also helps the person who supplies the money, to go the best possible return on his invested money. And it is within the regularity frame work prescribed by both the regulators and the society. Financial services sector now offers a variety of the services as per the requirement of the users of money and the suppliers of money.

INTRODUCTION The flow of capital for production of goods and services in the economy is determined by the savings and investment of that economy. And the same has an important role in the economic development of a country. The core of the finance is formed by the surplus savings of the household sectors. The savers do not directly give the money to the needy ones. The savers are aware of market risk and default risk. So they are bothered about lending money. They always have a fear of losing their savings. So do not even the house hold saved lend their saved money directly. Here the intermediaries such as banks, non banking fincail companies, other fincail institutions came in to the middle of the savers of money and the users of money. They mobilize the savings of the entire public. And they make available these savings to the needy by way of lending. This is known as ‘financial intermediation’. The actual function of the financial intermediaries is accepting funds in the form of deposits then advancing the accepted funds as loans and advances. From 1990s in India there is a process of financial liberalization. It has bought in a variety of savings instruments to the savers. Now the performance of the savers has been shift from deposits to equity shares, preference shares, debentures etc. These are known as investment assets. A a result of this the process of intermediation transformed into the process of disintermediation. 125 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Disintermediation is the process where the savings are hitherto flowing to the ultimate borrowers though the financial intermediaries. Such as banks and NBFCs. And these are taken by the ultimate borrower directly from the savers. Now the one who are in a need of funds can mop up the savings of the public directly. With the help of growing capital markets now the corporate can enter into the equity market to attain the required amount of funds. The Indian financial system has been reshaped by the spreading of the equity cult. The finical institutions, finical markets, financial instruments and the finacial service are involved in the Indian finical system. After liberalization process the small as well as the medium size saver increasingly wanted to invest their money into shares, debentures etc of joint stock companies. This is to receive better return on their funds. This results in over subscription of shares of money public companies. During this time so many investors get bored on the money tied up in the application process till it get refund. To attract such investors the bankers introduced the stock invest scheme. As compared with the past, at present the middle class population becoming more upwardly mobile. And in the market, there is flood of consumer durables. It causes the necessity of credit cards, smart cards, debit cards and ATM cards to the middle class. Now these have been given by both banks and NBFCs in the late eighties and early nineties there happened and investment euphoria, millions of people in India have been gripped by these investment euphoria. As a result hundreds of public issues offered by companies across the length and breadth of India. However the commitment towards their investors and depositors have been defaulted by many companies. At this time the investors were in search of proper guidance from trusted sources. As a result of this search many credit rating agencies have been set up to rate the companies and instruments for the purpose of investment. Objectives 1) To understand the importance of financial service sector. 2) To discuss about merchant banking, mutual funds, lease financing, factoring, venture capital and retail banking services. Methodology Secondary data used for this study. The source of such data involves books, magazines, journals and websites. Nature of financial services 1) Intangible 2) Direct sale 3) Dynamism 4) Customer orientation 5) Wide range of products 6) Geographical dispersion 7) Labour quality Functions of financial services 1) Mobilization of savings 2) Allocation of funds 126 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

3) Specialized services 4) Economic development Scope of functional services Just as the financial sector, the scope of finical services is also very wide. To match with and to satisfy the differing needs, at present ever new services and instruments are introduced in the market to facilitate resource mobilization and allocation. As per general agreement on trade in service (GATS), financial services has two broad categories of services. They are; A. Insurance and insurance related services. B. Banking and other financial services. Besides this classification financial services can again be divided as A. Traditional financial activities B. Modern financial activities The first category involves capital market activities and money market activities. The same can be further divided as; a) Fund based activities b) Non fund based activities. Financial services – reasons for prominenice Because of the LPG area after199s economic scenario has been changed totally. There happened the replacement of the Hindu growth rate into the attractive GDP growth rates. During these period, the economy become a vibrant one and together with the good rate of growth, the financial services also got an important role and prominence because of the given below factors; 1) Deregulation of interest rate. 2) Free pricing of issues by corporate houses. 3) The abolishment of post of controller of capital issues. 4) For lure investors new instruments have been offered by companies. 5) World class rating agencies and credit research agencies. 6) International developments in the financial sector. 7) Encouragement for foreign funds. Types of financial services To meet the various kinds of needs and requirements of both the user of money and aupplier of money the financial services. It can be categorized as; 1) Provisions of funds or its substitutes 2) Managing investible funds 3) Risk sharing services 4) Consultancy services

127 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

5) Market operation services 6) Research and development Apart from the above, now bankers offer CASA (combination of saving bank alc and current alc), insurance along with housing loans to profit from NPA. Futures of financial services 1) Intangibility 2) Inseparability 3) Perishability 4) Customer –oriented 5) Variability 6) Dynamism 7) Requirement of massive advertisements Importance of financial services To include a country into the group of BRIC nations (they are knowing as the emerging tigers of the world) is that their GDP rate should be in growth. Now the GDP growth rate of India is increasing reasonably. It is now around 7%. The manufacturing sector’s share is now almost 16-16% only. The biggest contributory segment to the balance is the financial service segment. Indian citizens saving now touched a new high of 28.1% of the GDP. During the 2003 and 2004 the bulk savings of the households liked to invest in financial assets. Attractive rates of return is provided by the financial service providers. Financial services are mostly given by the NBFCs. The importance of the financial services can be briskly summarized as; 1) Promote investment 2) Promote savings 3) Minimize risk 4) Promote smooth productions 5) Maximizes return 6) Encourage and ensure greater field 7) Economic growth 8) Improve standard of living of the masses 9) The biggest beneficiary is the government 10) Vibrant capital market 11) Encourages domestic and foreign trade 12) Catalyst for financial inclusion 13) Encourages entrepreneurial growth Challenges faced by financial service sector In the globalized area, the Indian financial service sector is facing many challenges. The 128 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 demand for finance by the economy is ever increasing. But the sector has to solve a number of bottle necks for its development they are; 1) Lack of qualified personnel 2) Inefficiency of qualified personnel 3) Poor investment awareness 4) Lack of transparency 5) Lack of specialization 6) Absent of updated / recent data base 7) Lack of proper system of risk management Prospects of financial services in India 1) Dynamism Now the Indian financial system is in the process of a rapid transformation. There have happened changes in money market, capital market, security market, debit market and the foreign exchange market. In this changing world the importance of financial service in our country has increased significantly. Now the role of financial services has increased. And due to the standing of numerous new financial intermediaries, the investing public can make use of multifarious services in the area of financial institutions. Because of the regulatory bodies, at present the financial service sector has been transformed from being a conservative industry to a very dynamic one. 2) Growth of primary Equity market A very popular source of raising finance is the capital markets which were very sluggish. And there happens a spurt of private sector financial services. The stock exchange’s number is our country’s increasing. The number of listed companies on the stock exchanges and the aggregate funds that have been raised by the companies in the primary market are also increasing. The funds raised by the companies have crossed 100 billion. To provide a proper channel to channelize the savings of individuals and the corporate the primary equity market has originated it lauds to the promotion of both economic and industrial growth in India. 3) Concept of credit rating Usually the investors are taking their investment decisions on the basis of so many factors such as image of the company, operation of group, market sentiments, the promoter’s reputation and so on. It is helpful for the investors to consider grading from an independent agency. On the basis of such an agent’s grading the investor will manage his portfolio effectively. So in the investment decision making process, the equity grading has much importance. So in the investment decision making process, the equity grading has much importance. It helps the company to broaden the market for their pubic offer, to replace the name recognition by objective opinion and to have a wider investor base. Ant it also helps the investor to know the risk level of the corporate entities in which the investor wants to take part. Globalization Effect Innovative and sophisticated financial products have been introduced in the country as a result of globalization. To avoid and kind of interruption in the flow of foreign capital the government 129 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 is very careful. Soonly India is going to ether in the end of full convertibility. In our nation, there has much possibility to introduce more and more sophisticated and innovative financial services. Various financial services The financial services provided by both the various commercial banks and the other financial institutions can be divided in to broadly two. There are; A. Asset based services (Fund based activities) B. Advisory services (Free based activities) The first category that is the asset based services or the fund based activities includes the following; 1) Equipment lased financing 2) Hire purchase 3) Consumer credit 4) Bill discounting 5) Venture capital 6) Housing finance 7) Insurance services 8) Factoring 9) Securitization of Debit etc. The second section of financial service is fee based activities or the advisory services involve the following; 1) Issue management services 2) Portfolio management services 3) Corporate counseling services 4) Credit syndication 5) Advisory services for mergers and acquisitions. 6) Capital restructuring services 7) Credit rating services 8) Stock broking services etc. Financial Services as classified under GATS As per the classification under GATS, it mainly divided into two. They are; A. Insurance and insurance related. B. Banking and other financial services The insurance and insurance related financial services include the following; 1) Direct Insurance 2) Re-insurance intermediation 3) Auxiliary services

130 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

The re-Insurance intermediation has two sub divisions. They are; a) Life Insurance b) Non-life insurance The second category involves; 1) Acceptance of deposits 2) Trading in derivatives 3) Lending consumer credit, mortgage credit etc. 4) Issue participation 5) Leasing 6) Money transmission services (credit card, debit card) 7) Securitization of debt 8) Guarantees commitments 9) Money market instruments trading 10) Cash and portfolio management 11) Trading in foreign exchange Financial service companies The financial intermediaries who provides different financial services to both the corporate and individual customers are termed as the financial service companies. Those who provide the financial services fall in the following category. 1) Specialized financial institution 2) Commercial banks 3) Merchant banks 4) Insurance companies 5) Investment trusts and mutual funds 6) House building co-operative societies 7) Credit card issuer companies 8) Leasing companies 9) Venture capital companies 10) Credit rating Agencies 11) Non Banking financial companies (NBFCs) New services / Products in the Indian financial market 1) Hedge funds The unregistered private investment partnerships, those have the sophisticated investment strategies such as leverage, short selling, derivatives etc with a view to generate high returns in different markets. A flexible investment company for large investors of small numbers. The company

131 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 is using high risk-techniques as short selling and heary leveraging. Hedye fund is termed as risk man’s natural fund and the some can be defind as “any unregistered, privetly, financially sophisticated investor”. Innovative Banking Services In 1969 fourteen major commercial banks has been structurally transformed after nationalization. There has been a phenomenal expansion of brand network during the last three decades of nationalization. Such expansion is particularly in the hitherto under banking rural areas. 3) Venture capital The concept was originated in the US in 1970s and now spredded over the entire world. Presently it consist of large number of venture capital funds (VCFs). It combines management advice, marketing expertise and contribution to overall strategy. It has been especially designed for funding high risk and high reward projects in the form of equity financing. 4) Credit card A commercial bank product that can give better service to the customers and can help to have profit by the banks. It has place in the priority list of both Indian and foreign banks. It helps the card holder to purchase, travel, dine in hotel or somewhere without making immediate payment. 5) Debit Card It is an electronic card. It avoids carrying money (cash or even travelers cheque). The card holder can present it in front of the merchant and sign the sales ship. The amount of purchase will automatically reduced on credited to the account of card holder. To use the card, customers have to open either a SB account or current account. 6) Electronic Card Citibank master card is being converted into electronic card. It can be used in those places where electronic scan and identification is possible. Though the electronic tape is records all the transactions has been done by it. 7) Smart card It is used mainly in the retail payment system. Actually it is an e-money and has large potential usage. It has an integrated circuit with a microprocessor chip, it has wide capacity to perform money calculation. But it won’t maintain records, statement. It can used to draw cash to make payments 8) Securitization of Debt Securitization is a process where an owner of receivable sells of its receivables to an a third party, in return for a price payable immediately long tern assets are replaced with liquid cash. Financial service offered by the financial service companies 1) Merchant Banking: It various activities involve in this are management of capital issue, portfolio management, corporate counseling, project counseling, underwriting, loan syndication etc. any specialized financial intermediary who helps to mobilize and transfer capital from those who possess it to those who need it can be termed in the capital market can undertaken by the

132 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 merchant banker and can play various roles just as lead manager, co-manager portfolio manager, underwriter, consultant etc. 2) Lease financing: This is another vital source to intermediate long term financing. Lease is a contractual agreement between two parties for a definite period of time for an agreed amount of rent. The two parties are the lessor. ( he is the owner of the asset) and the lessee. The lessor though the agreement grants the lessee to use the asset. 3) Venture Capital : A long tern risk capital to finance high technology projects is termed as venture capital. 4) Credit rating: Here a credit rating agency declares the relative ability and willingness of any issuer of debt instrument to meet the obligations as an when they emerges. It is useful to investors, corporate, banks, financial institutions etc. Though this they can assess the credit quality of debt instruments. 5) Hire purchase and consumer credit a) Hire purchase: On the basis of some terms a transaction that is either purchase of goods or sale of goods are taken place. It is an alternative to leasing to equipment financing. Consumer credit: It helps the individuals to acquire durable consumer goods. It involves all asset based financing pains 6) Bill Discounting: It is the method through which the bank lends without any collateral security. The bank or the financial institution purchase the bills on the financial institution purchase the bills of exchange, the credits the account of the customer with the amount of bill less discount. 7) Financing service: It is a method to raise short term finance by way of account receivables credit offered by commercial banks, factors etc. It gives resources to finance receivables and facilitates the receivable’s collection. 8) Insurance services: It is a contract in which the insurance agrees, in consideration of an amount, to make good the loss suffered by the insurance against a definite risk. 9) Stock Broking: This service is offered by a stock broker. It is emerged as a professional advisory service. 10) Housing finance : It has been originated as a fund based financial service in India with the functioning of National Housing Bank CONCLUSION Every business either knowingly or unknowingly apply and uses the financial services. It is essential to develop, design and implement innovative financial instruments and process. To satisfy savers and borrowers, new products and innovative schemes are developed to serve the saver and user of money on the basis of their likes and dislikes. In basis of their financial service sector has witnessed a wide range of innovations. The banks, NBFCs and other players entered into diversified activities and the borrowers searching various sources of raising funds. Now the financial institutions who provides such services have a major role in the financial system in India. ICICI as a part of this as an existing financial institution has decided to convert into universal Bank to provide a number of banking and financial services under a single roof.

133 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Reference 1) Indian Financial System, Pathak, V Bharati 2) Financial markets and services, Gordon E, Natarajan K 3) Indian Fiancial System, Varshney P.N, D.K.Mittal 4) The Indian financial system Desai, Vasantha 5) Financial Institutions and markets, Kohn, Meir 6) Fiancial Institutions and markers, Bhole L.M 7) Indian Financial system, Machiraju R.H 8) Indian financial system, Khan.M.V

134 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

MOTIVATIONAL FACTORS OF TOURISM ENTREPRENEURS

Rinku Babu Research scholar, Department of Commerce, School of Business Management and Legal Studies, University of Kerala Kariavattom, Thiruvananthapuram

Dr. S. Resia Beegam Professor and Head, Department of commerce, School of Business Management and Legal Studies, University of Kerala, Kariavattom, Thiruvananthapuram.

ABSTRACT Tourism was identified by government as a vehicle to facilitate growth in the Kerala economy. Tourism was chosen due to its impacts on basically all other sectors of the economy; tourism shows a steady growth; and it creates many employment opportunities because an increase in tourists results in a direct increase in employment. International tourism to Kerala has also grown at an alarming rate. With the development of tourism, entrepreneurship in tourism sector is also developing in a substantial rate. Government subsidy, high revenue generation, substantial margin on investment, high social acceptance, ease of management etc pull entrepreneurs in to the golden treasure. This paper examines the prime motivating factors of entrepreneurs in tourism sector. Keywords: Tourism entrepreneurs, Incentives, Motivating factors.

INTRODUCTION The hospitality industry is a 3.5 trillion dollar service sector within the global economy. It is an umbrella term for a broad variety of service industries including, but not limited to, hotels, food service, casinos, and tourism. But tourism is regarded as the principal component of hospitality industry as it generates huge foreign exchange and provides with large employment. Tourism began to be recognized as an engine for economic development only after the Second World War that witnessed major damages and the revival of the extinct Economies was the order of the day. United States had taken initiative to introduce a master plan for the revival of the ravaged Economies of European countries. The European governments invested huge amounts for the revival of dilapidated hotels and other infrastructural facilities to attract more visitors. Many countries had set up official tourist organizations at the national level to assess the possibility of exploring new avenues for international tourism. The massive development during the postworldwar years created a number of international organizations like IUOTO (International Union of Official Travel Organization), WTO (World Tourism Organization), IATA (International

135 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) and PATA (Pacific Asia Travel Association). These organizations play tremendous role in promotion of international tourism. Technological inventions minimized bottlenecks in the travel trade by introducing various modes of transportation like steam engine, steamship and jet propulsion engine that fuelled the growth of travel on a larger scale in the successive periods. As a result, international tourism concept has expanded and tourism has become the second largest industry in many countries, next to oil industry. Tourism and Entrepreneurship At the beginning of XXI century, the entrepreneurship is extremely necessary and the knowledge of the entrepreneurial practices is not only in the interest of the enterprises that are confronting with more and more complex situations, generating more changes, but also in the interest of the entire society. The entrepreneurship represents essentially the process of identifying, putting in practice, developing a vision that may be an innovative idea, an opportunity or simply a better way to do something. The result of this process is the creation of a new venture under risk conditions and uncertainty. This is an active, creative and inventive process and its success depends on the ability to read and to answer to the market challenges that implies taking calculated risks using efficiently the material, financial, human resources. The specialists consider that the entrepreneurs are born not formed through education. It is true that many of the most efficient entrepreneurs in tourism and other fields are born businesspersons, without much formal education. However, many essential entrepreneurial skills can be learnt and the entrepreneurs can appear after a personal development at the job. A characteristic for many entrepreneurs is that they and their enterprises have evolved, changed and grown in time as an answer to the confidence increases and to the opportunities or difficulties existing on the market. The entrepreneurship offers various advantages to local, regional and national economies especially through its development. The field in which the individuals can initiate their own business are various: construction, trade, light industry, agriculture, food industry, IT, tourism and so on. In most countries, small and medium enterprises dominate the tourism industry where the entrepreneurial spirit is easier to identify. Tourism represents not only a solution for the rural population to become the artisans of their one social and economic progress, but also a real chance for them to be involved in other activities bringing incomes and social recognition. In most countries around the world, communities and business leaders around the world are focusing their attention on entrepreneurship development as part of a sound economic plan Objectives The main intent of the study being to investigate the motivational factors of entrepreneurs in tourism sector. In order to serve the main objective the following sub objectives are formulated. 1) To explore the economic motivational factors of tourism entrepreneurs. 2) To analyze the social and marketing factors of tourism entrepreneurs

136 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Methodology The study is explorative and analytical in nature. Both primary and secondary data are used for the study. Primary data are collected from a sample of 100 entrepreneurs from various districts of Kerala. Convenient sampling has used for selecting the sample. In addition to primary data, secondary data was also used for the study. Books, Periodicals, Magazines, Brochures and the internet source are used for collecting the secondary data. Tools of Analysis Various statistical tools such as measures of central tendency, percentages and mean score and co-variance are used for analyzing the opinion of respondents. Measure of central tendency has used for identifying the mean values of respondents and co-variance is used for analyzing the difference in opinion of rural and urban entrepreneurs. Data Analysis Item Number 1.1 of Table 1 is about the views of respondents on making money for comfortable living. 6 per cent recorded their level of opinion at 20 per cent and less. 20 per cent recorded an opinion level of 40 per cent and 28 percent recorded a level at 50 per cent 29 per cent recorded a level at 60 per cent. 6 per cent recorded at a level of 80 per cent and 11 per cent recorded a level at cent per cent. The mean score of which is 56 per cent with a standard deviation of 20 per cent and a covariance of 36 per cent which exceeds the combined mean of 49 per cent shows that this variable is important as far as motivating the owners or managers of tourismunits in Kerala . Item Number 1.2 of Table 1 is the opinion of respondents on satisfaction of ones core initiatives and values. 4 per cent recorded their level of opinion at 20 per cent and less. 10 per cent recorded a level of opinion at 40 per cent and 22 per cent recorded a level at 50 per cent. 28 per cent recorded an opinion level at 60 per cent. 31 per cent recorded a level of opinion at 80 per cent and 5 per cent at 100 per cent. The mean score of which is 62 per cent with a standard deviation of 18 per cent. This also shows a significant one because the mean score exceeds the combined mean which is 49 per cent. Item number 1.3 of Table 1 is about the views on more freedom and autonomy in personal life. 2 per cent recorded a level at 20 per cent and less. 9 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent and 16 per cent recorded a level at 50 per cent. 31 per cent recorded a level at 60 per cent and 33 per cent recorded a level at 80 per cent. 9 per cent recorded level of opinion at cent per cent. The mean score of which 66 per cent with a standard deviation of 18 per cent and a covariance of 27 per cent. The mean score also shows a high value than the combined mean ,so it is significant. Item Number 1.4 of Table 1 is about the views on providing employment opportunities to others. 7 per cent recorded their opinion level at 20 per cent and less. 17 per cent recorded their opinion level at 40 per cent and 24 per cent recorded level at 50 per cent. 24 per cent recorded an opinion level at 60 per cent. 25 per cent recorded a level at 80 per cent and 3 per cent recorded a level at cent percent. The mean recorded level is 58 per cent with a standard deviation of 18 per cent and covariance of 32 per cent. Here also this variable also shows significant since it exceeds the combined mean which is 49 per cent.

137 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Item number 1.5 of Table 1 is about the opinion on serving the society in a better way. 35 per cent recorded an opinion level at 20 per cent and less. 24 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent and 19 per cent recorded a level at 50 per cent. 12 per cent recorded a level at 60 per cent. Only 1 per cent recorded a level at 80 per cent and 9 per cent recorded a level at cent per cent. The mean score is 43 per cent with a standard deviation of 24 per cent and the mean score is less than the combined mean which shows that this variable is not so significant. Item number 1.6 of Table 1 is the views of respondents on self employment as an alternative to unemployment. 14 per cent recorded a level of 20 per cent and less. 17 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent and 27 per cent recorded a level of opinion at 50 per cent. Again 27 per cent recorded at a level of 60 per cent. 15 per cent recorded a level at and above 80 per cent. The mean recorded level is at 50 per cent with a standard deviation of 20 per cent. This also shows that this is an important variable. Item number 1.7 of Table 1 is about the views on channelisation of Surplus Financial resources. 37 per cent recorded a level of opinion at 20 per cent and less. 24 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent and 17 per cent recorded a level of 50 per cent. 10 per cent recorded a level at 60 per cent and 12 per cent recorded a level between 80 and 100 per cent. The mean recorded level is 43 per cent with a standard deviation of 25 per cent and this shows that this variable is not so significant. Item number 1.8 of Table 1 is about the views of respondents on encouragement provided by Banks and Government. A large majority of the respondents recorded a low level in this case. This was recorded by 57 per cent i.e, 20 per cent and less. 21 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent. 21 per cent recorded a level between 50 and 60 per cent. Only 1 per cent recorded a level at above 80 per cent. The mean score is also, very low as 29 per cent with a standard deviation of 18 per cent. This clearly indicate that this factor is not responsible for creating any motivation. Item number 1.9 of Table 1 is about the views on using technological competence in specialized area. 55 per cent recorded a level at 20 per cent and less. 22 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent and 16 per cent recorded a level at 50 per cent. 7 per cent recorded a level between 60 and 80 per cent. The mean recorded level of opinion is 30 per cent with a standard deviation of 17 per cent. This shows that this variable have no impact on motivating the entrepreneurs. Item number 1.10 of Table 1 is the views on inspiration from entrepreneurial development programs. 16 per cent recorded a level at 20 per cent and less. 9 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent. 19 per cent recorded a level at 50 per cent. 30 per cent recorded an opinion level of 60 per cent. 26 per cent recorded an opinion level at 80 per cent. The mean recorded level of opinion is 53 per cent with a standard deviation of 25 per cent and a covariance of 47 per cent. The mean score exceeds the combined mean which shows that this variable is significant and motivate entrepreneurs for starting new units and contributing the society for its development. Item number 1.11 of Table 2 is about the views of respondents on High incentives. The entrepreneurs of small units operate their business basically an account of various incentives such as export incentives, tax benefits and grants for government. 31 per cent recorded an opinion level at 20 per cent and less. 28 per cent recorded an opinion level at 40 per cent and 20 per cent

138 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table 1 - Motivational Factors of tourism entrepreneurs SCORE Sl. Sub Variables 0 20 40 50 60 80 100 Total Mean S.D Covari No. Score ance 1.1 Views on making money for (0) (6) (20) (28) (29) (6) (11) (100) 56 20 36 comfortable living 1.2 Views on satisfactions of (0) (4) (10) (22) (28) (31) (5) (100) 62 18 29 ones core initiative and values 1.3 Views on more freedom and (0) (2) (9) (16) (31) (33) (9) (100) 66 18 27 autonomy in personal life 1.4 Views to provide (0) (7) (17) (24) (24) (25) (3) (100) 58 18 32 employment opportunities to others 1.5 Views on serving the (0) (35) (24) (19) (12) (1) (9) (100) 43 24 55 society in a better way 1.6 Views on self employ-ment (5) (9) (17) (27) (27) (14) (1) (100) 50 20 40 as an alternative to unemployment 1.7 Views on channalise surplus (1) (36) (24) (17) (10) (1) (11) (100) 43 25 58 financial resources 1.8 Views on encouragement (14) (43) (21) (15) (6) (1) (0) (100) 29 18 62 provided by Banks / Govt. 1.9 Views on using technical (10) (45) (22) (16) (7) (0) (0) (100) 30 17 57 competence in specialised area 1.1 Views on inspiration from (13) (3) (9) (19) (30) (26) (0) (100) 53 25 47 0 entrepreneurial development programs *Figures in brackets shows percentage to total and combined mean 49. Source : SPSS output of analysis of primary data. recorded a level of 50 per cent. 13 per cent recorded a level at 60 per cent and 8 per cent recorded a level between 80 and 100 per cent. The mean recorded level is 41 per cent with a standard deviation of 19 per cent. This variable is not so significant. Item number 1.12 of Table 2 is about views of respondents on encouragement from Government. 15 per cent recorded a level of opinion at 20 per cent and less. 10 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent and 15 per cent recorded a level at 50 per cent. 32 per cent recorded an opinion level at 60 per cent. 28 per cent recorded an opinion level at 80 per cent and above. The mean recorded level of opinion is at 54 per cent with a standard deviation of 25 per cent and a covariance of 47 per cent. The mean score exceeds the combined mean which means this variable is significant. Item number 1.13 of Table 2 is about the views of respondents on demands from local people. 4 per cent recorded a level at 20 per cent and less. 18 per cent recorded a level of opinion at 40 per cent. 27 per cent recorded an opinion level of 50 per cent. 26 per cent recorded level at 60 per cent. 13 per cent recorded a level at 80 per cent and 12 per cent recorded an opinion level at 100 per cent. The mean recorded level of satisfaction is 60 per cent with a standard deviation of 20 per cent and a covariance of 34 per cent. This means that the entrepreneurs start organize and operate tourism units basically because of the motivations from the part of people by demanding

139 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 more and is significant which is clear from the mean score which exceeds the combined mean of 49 per cent. Item number 1.14 of Table 2 is about the views of respondents on generating income and remove poverty. 21 per cent recorded a level of opinion at 20 per cent and less. 17 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent. 23 per cent recorded a level at 50 per cent. 22 per cent recorded a level at 60 per cent and 17 per cent recorded an opinion level at 80 per cent and none of them recorded a level at 100 per cent. The mean recorded level is 47 per cent with a standard deviation of 25 per cent. This mean score is less than the combined mean which shows this variable is not so significant. Item number 1.15 of Table 2 is the views on Low Investment, simple operation and management . 41 per cent recorded a level at 20 per cent and less. 24 per cent recorded a level at 40 per cent. 19 per cent recorded an opinion level at 50 per cent. 12 per cent recorded a level at 60 per cent. 4 per cent recorded an opinion level at between 80 and 100 per cent. The mean recorded level of opinion is 37 per cent with a standard deviation of 18 per cent and a covariance of 49 per cent. The mean score in this case is less than the combined mean which shows that this variable is not significant.

Table 2 - Motivational Factors of tourism entrepreneurs SCORE Sl. Sub Variables 0 20 40 50 60 80 100 Total Mean S.D. Covari No. Score ance 1.11 Views on High (3) (28) (28) (20) (13) (7) (1) (100) 41 19 47 incentives – Tax etc. 1.12 Views on (14) (1) (10) (15) (32) (27) (1) (100) 54 25 47 encouragement from Government 1.13 Views on (0) (4) (18) (27) (26) (13) (12) (100) 60 20 34 Demand from local people 1.14 Views on (15) (6) (17) (23) (22) (17) (0) (100) 47 25 53 Generate income and remove poverty 1.15 Views on low (3) (38) (24) (19) (12) (3) (1) (100) 37 18 49 investment, simple operation and Management *Figures in brackets shows percentage to total and combined mean – 49 Source : SPSS of output of analysis of primary data Findings and Conclusion The entrepreneurship can bring significant benefits to the tourism being an important driving force, and its absence represents the main impediment to economic development and revitalization of the workforce affected by the restructuring. Those who want to promote tourism in an area must understand the nature of entrepreneurship and how can be encouraged and supported. Most of the tourism actions are based on the private sector or the organizations required operating in an 140 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 entrepreneurial spirit. In many cases, central and local governments are the promoters of tourism entrepreneurs being involved in training, provision of direct assistance, regional planning, the technical infrastructure, tax regulations, the development of tourist attractions, tourist villages support, drawing up marketing strategy, creation of tourist information offices, tourist guides, rural tourism indicators. Therefore, promoting entrepreneurship should be a more substantial part of local, regional and national development strategies The increasing pace of development of knowledge-based society requires opening to the assimilation of new and diversified knowledge, and the entrepreneurial training is vital for survival in a globalize economy. Local and central governments should encourage entrepreneurship in hospitality sector especially by increasing the knowledge and skills of those involved, the opportunities for local development and vocational training References 1. Akhtar & Javid (1980), Tourism Management in India, Ashish Publishing House, New Delhi. 2. Alister Mathieson and Geossrew Wall (1992), Tourism - Economic &Physical Social Impact, Pearson education Ltd., England. 3. Anand, M M. (1976), Tourism and Hotel Industry in India: A study in Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 4. Hans.W. Singer (1964), “International Development: Growth and change”, New York, Mcgraw Hill, p201. 5. K.K Rajan (1987) “Industries in Kerala vol-I”, Bhasha Institute, Trivandrum. 6. Nicholas Siroponies (1998), “Entrepreneurship and small business management”, Haughton Mifflin Company, Boston, P.17. 7. Ruddar Datt & K.P.N Sundaram (1999) “India Economy”, S. Chand and Co, New Delhi. P. 617. 8. Taneja & Chopra (1992), Economies of Development Planning, Vishal Publications , New Delhi, p.54.

141 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

CUSTOMERS’ PERCEPTION TOWARDS DISTRICT CO-OPERATIVE BANKS

Sangeetha S. Assistant Professor, Dept. of Commerce, All Saints’ College, Trivandrum

Dr. Soju S. Assistant Professor, Dept. of Commerce, S.N. College, Chempazhanthi, Trivandrum

ABSTRACT A co-operative bank is an agency which is in a position to deal with the small man on his own terms and conditions. The Co-operative Bank’s are an important constituent of the Indian Financial System, judging by the role assigned to them, the expectations they are supposed to fulfill, and its members and the number of offices they operate. The co-operative bank promotes economic activity and provides banking facilities and services especially to the rural people. Co-operative lending is one of the best means to promote thrift and savings among the people. Personalization of credit is one of the important features of Co-operative Banking. The importance of improving service quality in the banking industry is highly considered for achieving objectives of the industry in whole. Service quality considerations are comparatively less among co-operative banks in the State due to various reasons. An in depth analysis of the service quality perceptions of the customer’s is essential to achieve sustainable growth for the sector. The present study is an attempt to bring out the various facets in the working of District Co-operative Bank’s in Kerala in relation to Customer Satisfaction. Keywords: District Co-operative Banks (DCB), Customer Satisfaction, Public Distribution System (PDS)

INTRODUCTION Co-operative Bank’s are organizations which are operated jointly by its members. These members have some common aims. They work together to achieve the goals by mutual help. In almost all forms of business organizations, the ultimate objective will be to attain maximum profit, but a co-operative form of organization has some different objectives. Its foremost objective is to render services to its members. It is an enterprise which is formed by weaker sections of society to safeguard their own economic needs by eliminating middlemen.”The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) Act” has defined co-operative bank as “A State Co-operative Bank, a Central Co-operative Bank and a Primary Co-operative Bank”. The Co-operative Bank’s are an important constituent of the Indian Financial System, judging by the role assigned to them, the expectations they are 142 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 supposed to fulfill, and its members and the number of offices they operate. The Co-operative Movement originated in the West but the importance that such banks have assumed in India is rarely paralleled anywhere else in the World. Their role in usual financing continues to be important even today and their business in the urban and district areas also has been increased phenomenally in recent years. Nowadays there is no state in India without State Co-operative Bank, Central Co-operative Bank, Co-operative agricultural societies at state, district and village levels respectively, which is a proof of the urgent need and role of the Co-operative banking system in our economy. The Co- operative Credit Sector in Kerala is flourishing despite the economic slums affecting the country. A District Co-operative Bank in the context of our present time represents a middle way. The Co- operative sectors have been accepted at par with the other two sectors, Public and Private. Co- operative Bank at district level acts as a balancing factor because it combines the best of both. It fulfills the needs of the individuals without harming or exploiting them. It honors ethical values as well as stands for an efficient business. It safeguards the interest of the weaker sections of the society. It is essential that there should be an availability of well informed non-official leadership and trained personnel to manage the Co-operatives. It is in this context that, co-operative education and training programme assumed importance. Long before the official launching of the co-operative movement in India in 1904, the first experiment in co-operation was made in Baroda, Gujarat. The first Agriculture Co-operative Credit Society was registered in 1904, the Visalpur Co-operative Credit Society, Ahmadabad. The seed of multipurpose co-operative societies was sown in 1912 at all levels. The Co-operative Credit Act, 1904 provided for registration of Credit Societies whereas the Co-operative Societies Act, 1912 opened the way for organizations of societies for purposes other than credit granting. Very soon, primary societies for supply of funds and for special purposes such as housing and DCB’S and union of societies were formed. DCB’s are the Central financing agency in the entire district. At the district level, 18 DCB’s including Taluk Co-operative banking unions are functioning with their 1026 branches within their area of operations. DCB’s cater to the financial needs of the Urban Co-operative Credit Society. The financial sector including Co-operative banks has undergone rapid changes, followed by a series of fundamental developments due to liberalization and deregulation trends initiated in the country in early 1990s. There has been a change in the very concept of traditional banking activities and concept of quality in service has gathered attention of all customers. Increasing competition among a broad range of domestic and foreign institutions in product marketing area has become a prevalent practice and thus an attempt to be different from other banking institutions has become the priority consideration of the sector. It is predominantly seen that, in line with the increase in overall economic activities, financial institutions too, have modified themselves accordingly in all the spheres including customer services. To meet the demands of today’s marketing environment, organizations are looking to service initiatives as a means to create or sustain competitive advantage. Measuring customer satisfaction is a critical process. The importance of improving service quality in the banking industry is highly considered for achieving objectives of the industry in whole. The concept of service quality is complex due difficulty in measuring unlike a product quality, which can be measured with certain

143 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 yardsticks. It can be presumed that service quality lies within the minds of the customer based on his perceptions on quality parameters. In the present scenario of fierce competition, service firms strive to stay in the forefront of today’s marketplace by offering quality service. Research has shown that service quality is an essential strategy for winning and retaining customers. Indeed, the quality of service is more important than price in differentiating a service firm from its competitors and in fostering customer loyalty. It is very complex to analyze the impact of Service quality on customer satisfaction. However it is established that generally quality service creates satisfied customers and ultimately may lead to profitability to the firm. A study on Customer behavior gives valid insights about the customer which in turn helps the firm to develop quality yardsticks to cater the needs of the customer. Consumer behavior is very complex phenomenon, which is considered primarily in marketing decisions. Statement of the Problem The Central Co-operative Bank, widely known as District Co-operative Bank, occupies a cardinal position in the Co-operative credit structure. They constitute an important link between the Apex State Co-operative Bank and the Primary Agricultural Credit Societies. They are in fact a federation of Primary Agricultural Credit Co-operatives and other types of Co-operatives working within its jurisdiction. District Co-operative Bank (DCB) acts as the leader of the co- operative movement in a district and play an effective role in the all round growth of the co- operative movement. It has to undertake various promotional and developmental activities. Being a social banker, it has to take banking facilities to the rural and unbanked areas. So it has to deal with lots of customers both in rural and urban areas. Measuring customer satisfaction is critical process. The importance of improving service quality in the banking industry is highly considered for achieving objectives of the industry in whole. Service quality considerations are comparatively less among co-operative banks in the State due to various reasons. An in depth analysis of the service quality perceptions of the customer’s is essential to achieve sustainable growth for the sector. The perceived quality is normally assessed base on service quality dimensions such as tangibles, reliability, responsiveness, assurance, and empathy. “SEVPERF” instrument is treated as an ideal instrument to measure service quality. Significance of the Study Customer Satisfaction is one of the most central indicator when measuring and analyzing Co-operatives success possibility now and in future. This study is carried on in District Co-operative Bank to find out how to improve its activities to satisfy customers and to gain their loyalty. The reason for selecting this topic is that it is very important to find out where the Co-operative bank stands from the customers point of view. In today’s competitive world, the success of a bank requires a high understanding and respect of the customer. Customer’s demands are varying day by day according to our technological upgradations. So in order to satisfy customers, they must be able to listen to their feedbacks and improve services and their policies to keep of their clients. In this modern era of technologies almost all the banks are providing services to their customers through E-banking facilities. Even though such a competition exists from other banks, Co-operative banks have their own position in the economy and many people still opt for this type of banking. So in order to face the cut-throat competition from other banks Co-operative banks should satisfy their customers. 144 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Scope of the Study Financial institutions, especially co-operative banks play significant roles in the economic development of a country broadly by promoting the mobilization of resources and allocating these resources in the form of loans and advances. The resources available with the financial institutions are to be carefully managed and distributed inorder to maintain efficiency. Efficiency lies not only in the efficient mobilization of funds, but also in the effective and optimum utilization of the same. This argument is very much relevant in the present context, because out of the total resources of the co-operative banks, a good share is to be kept as reserves and the banks have to improve their spread by efficiently managing the remaining resources. The problem faced by banks becomes further complicated in the current environment of global economic reforms and the resultant cut- throat competition. Co-operative banks are also not free from this global problem. In the present era of computerization, co-operative banks are on its way to adopt e- banking facilities. So till they adopt such facilities they have to retain their customers by providing them with various customer-oriented policies. Customer satisfaction in DCB’s in Trivandrum has received only a limited attention. Studies were also conducted on Fund Management Activities of DCB, and role of DCB in promoting agricultural sector etc. Though customer satisfaction level is relative, and its precise and direct measurement is difficult there is a wide research gap in this topic. This study is mainly carried on in order to find out the satisfaction level of customers of DCB’s on the policies and services offered by them. The study is limited to the customer’s satisfaction on DCB’s in Trivandrum district. District Cooperative Central Bank, popularly known as DCC Bank is a co-operative banking network established in India to serve cooperatives and rural areas. It was established to provide banking to rural hinterland for agriculture sector with the branches primarily established at rural and semi-urban areas. Role and Functions of a DCB: The District Central Cooperative Banks plays multiple roles. Some of these are discussed below:- 1). Banking Entity The DCB’s are banking entities recognized by the Reserve Bank of India under the Banking Regulations Act. They accept deposits from general public and provide loans to individual and institutions including primary cooperative societies. They are governed by the various regulations stipulated by the Reserve Bank of India from time to time. Special provisions have been incorporated in the Banking Regulations Act 1949 considering the special nature of their ownership, development roles, etc. 2). Leader of Co-operative Movement One of the most important functions of the District Co-operative Banks is to provide financial support to the Primary Co-operative Societies that are affiliated to it in the district. These societies belong to highly diverse categories like the primary agricultural credit societies, the producers cooperative societies, handloom and handicrafts cooperative banks, etc. However, one of the most important role of the District Central Cooperatives Bank is to support and develop the Primary Agricultural Credit Societies. The officials of the DCB inspect the PACS affiliated to them periodically. The main source of funds for the PACS is the DCB and the lending programme

145 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 of PACS is regularly supervised by the supervisors of the DCB’S. Among the most important line of credit provided by the DCB to PACS is that for providing production loans for crops to members of PACS. Many PACS also undertake multiple activities like sale of fertilizers and other agricultural inputs and several acts as distributors of ration items under the Public Distribution System (PDS). The financial assistance for such activities and other loans provided to members are also sourced from the DCCBs as the PACS usually do not have major resource base of their own. The important source of own resources of the PACS is the deposits placed with it by the members. A specified percentage of such deposits collected by PACS are kept with the DCBs as reserve deposits to protect the interest of the member depositors. The DCB’s also provide capacity building support to PACS. They conduct training programmes for secretaries and directors of the board of the PACS. Periodical seminars are also conducted to update the staff and members of PACS on important developments affecting them. 3). Leader in Agricultural Lending Historically, the DCBS have been considered as the most important financial institution to support the short term credit requirements of the agricultural sector. These loans include both production loans and marketing loans provided to the members. Usually the production loans are provided on the basis of “Scale of Finance” which is fixed for each major agricultural crop in the district. The scale of finance is computed by taking the total cost of production of the crop based on average price of inputs, including labour. The yield and market value of the output are also computed and the credit required per hectare for raising the crop is determined. The scale of finance is fixed by a committee called the “District Level Technical Committee” and the DCB is the convener of this committee. The members of the DLTC include the representative of the agricultural department, banks, NABARD etc. Objectives The Study is proposed to examine the Customers Satisfaction level in District Co-operative Bank’s of Trivandrum District. • To study the role of District Co-operative Bank’s in promoting CRM Practices. • To evaluate the services provided by the District Co-operative Bank’s towards the society. • To identify the problems faced by District Co-operative Bank’s related to E-Banking Services. • To suggest measures for improving Customers Satisfaction. Research Methodology DCB’s in Trivandrum constitute the universe of the study, taking about 50 people who were customers of DCB as sample population. Trivandrum District is selected for the study, because it is the industrial as well as financial capital of Kerala, and also a place were a number of co-operative banks are functioning. Both Primary and Secondary data were used for this study. Primary data were collected through structured printed questionnaires and also through convenient sampling which is based on willingness and availability of respondents. Secondary data were collected through journals, magazines, websites, and from relevant publications. These data were processed manually. Mathematical tools like graphs, ratios, percentages.

146 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Limitations The customer behavior is very complex topic and hence any customer based studies face certain limitations. Following are some of the limitations of this study: • Non co-operative attitude of some customers. • Shortage of time. • Error due to bias of respondents. • Since the study is confined to Trivandrum District, it has geographical limitations. • Lack of customer awareness about real yardstick for judgment. • Sample restricted to 50 Customers. Analysis and Interpretations Timely performance of banking services: Timely performance of banking services is an essential component to retain the customers. The banks should perform its services correctly at the first instance itself.

Table 1 - Timely performance of banking services Opinion No. of customers Percentage Always 20 40 Sometimes 25 50 Never 5 10 Total 50 100 Source: Primary Data

It is clear from the table 1 that 50 percent of customers has the opinion that the bank sometimes provides timely services at the first instance itself. 40% of customers reveals that the bank always provides them timely services.10% argues that the bank never provides them timely services. Safety Regarding Banking Transactions People will always look into the safety of their money while investing. They will also see whether their transactions with the bank are safe and secure or not.

Table 2 - Safety Regarding Banking Transactions Opinion No. of Customers Percentage Yes 40 80 No 10 20 Total 50 100 Source: Primary Data Source: Primary Data It is evident from Table 2 that 80% of the customers of District Co-operative Bank treat their transactions with the bank as safe and secure. Remaining 20% are not satisfied regarding safety of their transactions with the bank.

147 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Facilities provided by the Bank People will make investment decisions by analyzing the facilities provided by banks. So in order to retain the customers as well as to get new customers the bank should provide excellent facilities. Table 3 – Safety Regarding Banking Transactions Opinion No. of Customers Percentage Excellent 24 48 Good 13 26 Average 11 22 Poor 2 4 Total 50 100 Source : Primary Data It is clear from the Table 3 that 48% of the customers has the opinion as excellent regarding the safety of Banking transactions,26% opined as good and 22 % opined as Average regarding the safety of E banking transaction and 4% opined that safety regarding banking transaction was poor. Type of Loans Preferred People will approach the bank for availing different types of loans such as agricultural loans, housing loans, educational loans etc. Table 4 - Type of Loans Preferred Opinion No. of customers Percentage Agricultural 20 40 Personal 8 16 Housing 10 20 Educational 7 14 Vehicle 2 4 Others 3 6 Total 50 100 Source: Primary data It is clear from the table 4 that 40 percent of customers taking loans for agricultural purpose , 16% for personal purpose,20% has the opinion that the loan they preferred was for housing purpose and 14% for educational purpose. E-Banking Facilities In this modern era of computerization most of the banking transactions are done through on-line system. District Co-operative Bank has adopted these facilities only recently. So it is important to know whether the customers are aware of such facilities. Table: 5 - E-Banking Facilities Opinion No. of customers Percentage Yes 20 40 No 30 60 Total 50 100 Source: Primary Data

148 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

It is clear from Table 5 that 40 percent of the customers are aware about the E Banking services and 60 percent are not aware of E banking services provided by District co-operative Banks Summary of Findings and Conclusion An attempt is made to summaries the major findings of the study with the help of both primary and secondary data. Findings 1. Sixty percent of the customers having the opinion that the physical features of the District Co-operative Bank was visually appealing 2. The materials provided by the District Co-operative bank are not considered as informative by its two third of customers. 3. Fifty percent of the customers are satisfied regarding the timely performance of Banking services. They also stated that District Co-operative Bank performs it services correctly at the first instance itself. 4. Eighty percent of the customers are satisfied regarding the safety and security provided by the bank 5. Among the loan scheme the most preferred one is Agricultural loan 6. Sixty percent of the customers have approached the bank to taking agricultural loan 7. Sixty per cent of the customers are happy that they are assisted by the employees of DCB in fulfilling the procedural formalities. 8. Forty percent of the customers are not satisfied regarding the repayment mode of loan 9. Forty percent of the customers are not aware of the e banking services introduced in DCBs 10. In agricultural sector DCBs are more active 11. The widely accepted measure adopted by District Co-operative Bank is to retain its customers CONCLUSION Customer service has a great significant in the banking Industry. The district Co-operative Banks should be oriented towards providing better customer services. Gradually the co operative banks will adopt more technologies for facing competition and make their services more qualitative one. Reference 1. Andrew Campbell (2007), “Bank insolvency and the problem of non-performing loans”, Journal of Banking Regulation, 25 45. 2. Beaver, W. H. (1966), “Financial ratios as predictor of failure-empirical research in accounting”, Journal of Accounting Research, No. 4, 71-111. 3. Bhaskaran R and Praful Josh P (2000), “Non Performing Assets (NPAs) in Co-operative Rural Financial System: A major challenge to rural development”, BIRD s Eye View Dec.2000. 4. Harish Kumar Singla (2008), “Financial performance of banks in India”, The ICFAI Journal of Management, Vol. 7, Issue 1 149 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

AN OVERVIEW OF THE INDIAN HOUSING FINANCE SYSTEM

Prabisha. A.T. Research Scholar, Dept. of Commerce, Mar Ivanios College, Trivandrum-15 e-mail: [email protected]

Dr. Biji James Associate Professor and HOD of Commerce, Mar Ivanios College, Trivandrum-15 e-mail:[email protected]

ABSTRACT Safe and secure shelter is one of the basic needs of human beings and right to adequate housing is a fundamental human right. The resources are always too limited and housing development heavily depends on the financial institutions for the supply of finance to meet their daily financial needs. A large number of financial Institutions have been providing assistance for housing construction along with the government agencies in the State. It is a descriptive study, which tries to identify the major Financial Institutions in the field of housing finance. The major financial institutions found in this respect are Scheduled Commercial Banks, Housing Finance companies (HFCs), Scheduled Co-operative Banks, Agriculture and Rural Development Banks (ARDBs), Apex Co-operative Housing Finance Societies (ACHFSs), Micro Financial Institutions (MFIs), etc. It is found that the share of banks in this sector is increasing highly as they have extensive network, broad customer base and access to stable low-cost funds. However, the share of Housing Finance Companies is also growing as they target the special customer segments, provide relatively superior customer services and significant growth plans. Besides, there are Co-operative finance institutions, Rural development institutions and Micro finance institutions which have their own role in providing housing finance assistance to the economically weaker sections of the society. It is suggesting that the competition between Banks and HFCs is likely to change the way in which they approach and deal with their customers. Hence, this paper tries to explain the various financial institutions in the field of housing finance. Key words: Housing Finance, Financial Institutions, Banks, Housing Finance Companies, Etc.

INTRODUCTION Safe and secure shelter is one of the basic needs of human being. Housing is an important component and a measure of socio-economic status of people. Good housing is a pre-requisite for human development and welfare. Housing has been termed as the “Engine of Growth for the Economy”. Housing, apart from serving the basic aim of providing shelter, plays an important role 150 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 in achieving some of the socio-economic objectives of the Nation. The housing industry is one of the largest employment generator in India, only second to agriculture. The demand for housing grows in line with the population growth, increased nuclear family structure and urbanization. Hence the need of financing the housing sector came up. Housing Finance is a set of all financial arrangements that are made available by housing finance companies to meet the requirements of housing. Easy access to institutional finance at affordable rate is an essential pre-requisite for accelerating the tempo of housing activity. As a result, number of financial institutions entered in the field of housing finance. Financial Institutions are the intermediaries who facilitate smooth functioning of financial system by making the investors and borrowers to meet. It facilitates the flow of money throughout the economy. Significance of the study Housing is a basic human need and owning a house is a dream for most families. Huge investment is required for housing and this necessitates the need for housing finance. Different financial institutions entered in the field of housing finance by designing their product to suite the varying housing needs of the people. It is very difficult to differentiate between these institutions. Hence, it is very important to study about the various financial institutions in housing sector. This study mainly intends to identify the various financial institutions in the field of housing finance in India. Statement of the Problem Housing is acknowledged as a basic human necessity for leading a safe and dignified life. The need for housing in India has been growing at a phenomenal pace over the year. With the emergence of National Housing Bank in 1987, the organised housing finance industry has been dominated by specialised housing finance institutions regulated by NHB and when priority sector lending norms of Central Government came, commercial banks became more dynamic in the housing finance business. This posed threats to specialised HFCs and their market share has considerably diluted. Lowering of interest rates, entering of many new players, insignificant products differentiations etc have made competition in housing finance industry very stiff. The majority of poor people living in the rural areas. There are many institutions providing housing finance to the rural people like Co-operative finance institutions and Rural development and Micro finance institutions. The complex nature of housing finance institutions necessitates to study about these institutions in the housing sector. Objectives of the study 1) To identify the various financial institutions in the field of housing finance in India. 2) To specify different types of home loans provided by housing finance institutions. Methodology of the study The major financial institutions in the housing sector are considered for the study namely Scheduled Commercial Banks, Housing Finance companies, Scheduled Co-operative Banks, Agriculture and Rural Development Banks, Apex Co-operative Housing Finance Societies and Micro Financial Institutions. For this purpose, the data related to the study is collected from various secondary sources like published and unpublished reports, books, journals, annual reports and websites relating to the study. 151 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

The Indian Housing Finance market The housing finance market in India is growing fast. Banks and housing finance companies are the dominant players in this market. Till the mid eighties, the responsibility of providing housing finance largely rested with the Government of India. The setting up of National Housing Bank (NHB), a fully owned subsidiary of Reserve Bank of India (RBI) in 1988, as an apex institution, marked the beginning of the emergence of housing finance as a fund based financial service in the country. It has strengthened the organization of housing finance system in our country. The number of specialized housing finance Institutions / companies has grown up. Now, access to housing finance is widened a lot. Home loans are available at every branches of banks and HFCs in at any corner of the country. The Indian housing finance sector is crowded with players of Government organizations, insurance companies, banks, housing finance companies, etc. Major players in the industry are HDFC, LICHFL, SBI home loans, etc. The Central & State Governments have introduced a number of schemes to promote affordable housing among the weaker and lower income segments of the people. Types of Home loans: There are different types of home loans available in the market to cater the different needs of borrowers. They are: Home Purchase loan: This is the basic type of a loan which has the purpose of purchasing a new house. Home Improvement loan: This type of loan is for the renovation or repair of the loan which is already bought. Home Extension Loan: It serves the purpose when borrower wants to extend or expand an existing home, like adding an extra room etc. Home Conversion loan: It helps the borrower to transfer the loan on current home to the new home, so the new loan pays the previous loan and fulfills the money required for new home. Home Bridge Loan: This type of loan helps to finance the new home of the borrower when he wants to sell the existing home. This is normally, a short term loan to the borrower. Home Construction Loan: This type of loan taken when the borrower wants to construct a new house. Land Purchase Loan: It is that loan which is taken to purchase a land for construction & investment purposes. Financial Institutions in Housing Sector A number of financial institutions are into the business of providing housing finance. National Housing Bank (NHB) operates as the principal agency for promoting, regulating and providing financial and other support to Housing Finance Companies (HFCs) at local and regional levels, while Banks and Non-banking Financial Companies (NBFCs) are managed and regulated by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI). A number of financial institutions have evolved to provide a variety of service in the housing finance sector. The following financial Institutions are providing housing finance in India. 1) Scheduled Commercial Banks

152 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

2) Housing Finance companies 3) Scheduled Co-operative Banks 4) Agriculture and Rural Development Banks 5) Apex Co-operative Housing Finance Societies 6) Micro Financial Institutions, Self Help Groups have also been lending for housing in a small way. (I) Scheduled Commercial Banks The commercial banks are the largest mobilisers of savings in the country. The banking system has the largest branch network. Initially, the banks were cautious in their approach in housing finance. Now, several banks setup their housing finance subsidiaries, which functioning as independent units. As per the guidelines issued by RBI, in the early 1990s, Banks are expected to allocate 3% of their deposits for housing finance. From April 2004, Banks are allowed to give housing loans up to Rs. 10 lakh to individuals, which were subsequently increased to Rs. 15 Lakh. Now its above Rs.25 Lakh up to 1 crore. The Scheduled Commercial Banks hold more than 70% of the share in the housing finance market.

Table 1 - Performance of 26 Public Sector Banks for the F.Y 2013 Disbursement and outstanding housing loans of PSBs (Amount in Crore) Data for PSBs 2012 2013 % Change Total disbursement of housing loans 73,831 71,857 -(2.67) As per the data available from 26 PSBs, for the period of 2012 and 2013, it is clear that the Total outstanding of housing loans 2,73,012 3,11,982 14.27 (Source:total Report disbursement on Trend and of housing Progress loans of Housing is decreased in India-2013, 2.67%. NHB) The outstanding housing loans of PSBs show an increasing trend of 14.27% for the same period.

Table 2 - Slab wise housing loan disbursement of major 26 Public Sector Banks for 2012-13 (Amount in Crore) Particulars 2012 % to Total 2013 % to Total Up to Rs.2 lakh 5,254 7.13 2,957 4.12 Rs. 2-5 lakh 5,571 7.55 4,028 5.60 Rs.5-10 lakh 11,760 15.93 11,281 15.69 Rs.10-25 lakh 26,614 36.05 29,912 41.63 Above Rs.25 lakh 24,632 33.34 23,678 32.96 Total 73,831 100.00 71,857 100.00 (Source: Report on Trend and Progress of Housing in India-2013, NHB) It is evident from the table that in case of housing loans in the slab of up to Rs.10 lakh, disbursements have a decreasing trend. However an increase in disbursement is observed in the slab of Rs.10 to 25 lakhs. In the case of above 25 lakh, there is a decline in the disbursement of housing loans.Some of the important Commercial Banks that provide housing finance in India are the

153 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

(1)-SBI home loans SBI is a major player in the Indian housing finance market with 26% market share as on December 2013. The SBI home loan schemes are specifically designed to meet the varied requirements of the customers. Home loan portfolio of SBI stood at Rs.1, 35,129 crore as on December 2013, a growth of 19.41% compared to Rs.1, 13,163 crore during December 2012. (2)-IDBI home loans It is founded in Jan 10, 2000. A New generation home finance company which combines the best attributes of the various providers of home finance. It offers loan from Rs.10000 up to a maximum of Rs.1 crore. It is one among the 26 commercial banks owned by the Government of India. (3)-PNB Housing Finance Ltd. (PNBHFL) It is registered housing finance company with NHB, commenced its operations on November 11, 1988. It is a subsidiary of Punjab National bank. The net profit of PNBHFL stands at Rs.12, 744 lakh on March 31, 2014 as against 9,151 lakh in March 31, 2013 which shows a 39% of growth. (4)-Can Fin Homes Ltd. (CFHL) CFHL is another big player in the housing finance market with an extensive network of 40 branches. It is also the first and one of the biggest Bank-sponsored (Canara Bank) housing companies in India. The important Schemes of CFHL are Grihalakshmi Rural Housing Scheme, loans under urban housing, individual housing loans, home loans for NRIs, commercial housing loans etc. The net profit of Canfin Homes for the year ending 31 March 2014 is Rs.7, 571 Lakhs. (II) Housing Finance Companies (HFCs) Housing Finance Companies, specialized lending institutions for housing, registered with the National Housing Bank, are one of the major players in the housing finance market in India. As on June 30, 2013, there were 57 HFCs registered u/s 29 A of the National Housing Bank Act, 1987.They had a network of 2,065 branches and other offices spread across the country. In addition, few HFCs had their representative offices for liaison work, in abroad Table 3 - Performance of 57 Housing Finance Companies in F.Y 2013 Disbursement and outstanding housing loans of HFCs (Amount in Crore) Data for HFCs 2012 2013 % Change Total disbursement of housing loans 68,221 92,589 35.71 Total outstanding of housing loans 2,22,225 2,90,427 30.69 (Source: Report on Trend and Progress of Housing in India-2013, NHB) As per the data available from 57 HFCs, for the period of 2012 and 2013, it is clear that the total disbursement of housing loans is increased 35.71%. The outstanding housing loans of HFCs show an increasing trend of 30.69% for the same period. It is clear from the table that in case of housing loans from the slab of up to Rs.2 lakh, disbursements have an increasing trend. However a decreasing trend in disbursements is observed in the slab of Rs.2 - 25 lakh. But, In the case of above 25 lakh there is an increase in the disbursements of housing loans. 154 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table 4 - Slab wise housing loan disbursement of 57 Housing Finance Companies for 2012-13 (Amount in Crore) Particulars 2012 % to Total 2013 % to Total Up to Rs.2 lakh 362 0.53 505 0.55 Rs.2-5 lakh 1,912 2.80 2,027 2.19 Rs.5-10 lakh 9,584 14.05 12,649 13.66 Rs.10-15 lakh 9,732 14.27 11,659 12.59 Rs.15-25 lakh 17,283 25.33 22,037 23.80 Above Rs.25 lakh 29,348 43.02 43,712 47.21 Total 68,221 100.00 92,589 100.00 (Source: Report on Trend and Progress of Housing in India-2013, NHB) National Housing Bank (NHB) NHB is a statutory body to shape and grow the housing finance market in India. It was established under an Act of Parliament (NHB Act in 1988) to operate as a principal agency to promote housing finance institutions and to provide financial and other support to such institutions. NHB is wholly owned by the RBI. The Bank is a multifunctional development finance institution and performs a range of activities including financing, regulation and supervision and promotional initiatives. This includes registration of housing finance companies for conduct of housing finance business, supervision of housing finance companies, consumer interface & protection and also Co- ordination with other regulators. Some of the important housing finance companies are the following (1) Housing Finance and Development Corporation (HDFC) It was incorporated in the year 1977. It was setup at the initiative of ICICI as the first formal housing finance Institution in the housing sector. Now HDFC is India’s premier HFC and enjoys a high track record in Indian as well as international market. The primary objective of HDFC is to enhance he residential housing stock in the country through the provision of housing finance in a systematic and professional manner and to promote home ownerships. It had a market share of 25% in the home loan market on June 2014. (2) LIC Housing Finance Limited (LICHFL) It was incorporated under the companies ACT 1956, on 19th June 1989.It was launched in association with UTI, IFCI and ICICI. On 15th September 1994, it became a widely held Public Limited Company. It is one of the biggest players in the market for housing loans with 18% market share. The main aim of establishing the company was to takeover the individual housing policy of LIC. It has a wide network of 67 area/ unit offices and 6 regional offices across the length and breadth of the country, besides about 5,000 LIC agents trained for housing finance. (3) Housing and Urban Development Corporation Limited (HUDCO) It was incorporated on 25th April 1970. HUDCO was an expression of the concern of the Central Government towards the deteriorating housing condition in the country and to assist various agencies. The principal objective of HUDCO is to promote the housing conditions of all groups and with a thrust to meet the needs of the low income groups and economically weaker sections. 155 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

The role of HUDCO is to provide long term finance for construction of houses for residential purposes in the urban and rural areas and also to administrate the amount received from the Government of India and other sources for the purpose of financing housing and urban development programs in our country. (4) Dewan Housing Finance Ltd (DHFL) DHFL is India’s second largest private sector housing finance company. The company was founded in 1984 by late Shri Rajesh Kumar Wadhawan, with a vision to enable home ownership amongst the low and middle income customer segment in semi-urban and rural India. DHFL has 550 branches in India & 2 international representative offices in UK and UAE. (III) Apex Co-operative housing Finance societies (ACHFS) The other set of specialized housing finance institutions are the co-operative housing finance societies. They essentially have a 2-tier structure, comprising the State level Apex co-operative housing finance societies and the Primary co-operative housing finance societies. NHB has formulated schemes to support these institutions and help them to cater to the housing needs of the community at large. The co-operative housing movement has made significant progress over the years with more than 1 lakh primary housing co-operatives functioning across the country. ACHFs have disbursed housing Loans of Rs.11971.21 crore up to 2012-13. (IV) Agriculture and Rural Development Banks (ARDBs) These are the term lending institutions operating exclusively in the rural sector. Housing finance was not originally their functions. Following the importance given to the housing sector in the late eighties and more particularly after the establishment of NHB, several states have amended their respective Acts to enable ARDBs, to lend for the housing in the rural areas. (V) Scheduled Co-operative Banks: - The State co-operative credit structure consists of scheduled State Co-operative Banks, Scheduled District co-operative Banks and Urban co-operative Banks. Scheduled State co-operative Banks are the apex level institutions of the state co-operative credit structure. The interest rates for housing Loan in scheduled co-operative Banks are slightly lower than a commercial bank. But these Banks are not very active in this field as commercial banks. (VI) Micro Financial Institutions Micro Finance Institutions or Non-governmental Organizations are present locally and have a participative approach. These institutions make various efforts to fulfill the housing finance needs of the low income segments of the society. These institutions work on the model of Self Help Groups linked with Banks. The beneficiaries of Micro Finance Institutions include farmers, housemaids, petty traders, artisans, diary workers and other low income segments. More than 90% of the beneficiaries are women. The approximate income Level of beneficiaries range between Rs.5000/- to Rs.7000/- per month. Cumulatively, till June 30 ,2013, NHB has sanctioned loans amount Rs.101.68 crore to 32 Micro Finance Institutions for financing 40,210 urban and rural housing/sanitation units.

156 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Findings • There is significant relationship between housing, housing finance and financial institutions. Financial institutions in housing sector mainly consist of banks and specialised housing finance companies. • Housing finance institutions are providing different types of home loans to suite the varying housing needs of people. • The share of banks in housing sector is increasing highly as they have extensive network, broad customer base and access to stable low-cost funds. In case of 26 PSBs, for the period of 2012 and 2013, it is clear that the total disbursement of housing loans is decreased 2.67%. The outstanding housing loans of PSBs show an increasing trend of 14.27% for the same. • The share of HFCs is also growing as they target the special customer segments, provide relatively superior customer services and significant growth plans. In case of 57 HFCs, for the period of 2012 and 2013, it is clear that the total disbursement of housing loans is increased 35.71%. The outstanding housing loans of HFCs show an increasing trend of 30.69% for the same period. • Besides, there are Co-operative financial institutions, Rural development institutions and Micro finance institutions which have their own role in providing housing finance assistance to the rural and weaker sections of our country. Suggestions All the housing finance institutions must give concentration to implement effective marketing strategies to face the competition involved in the housing finance sector. The competition between these institutions is likely to change the way these institutions approach and deal with their customers. CONCLUSION Every citizen of the country dreams of having his own house. A housing unit is the most valuable asset that most families possess. It needs finance in most cases. During the past decade, Indian housing finance sector has evolved and grown in multiple dimensions providing value and benefits to a wide variety of interested parties. A number of financial institutions have evolved to provide a variety of service in the housing finance sector. The setting up of National Housing Bank has strengthened the organization of housing finance system in our country. The major players in The Indian housing finance sector are banks and housing finance companies. The success of these institutions depends on the way in which they approach and deal with their customers. Co- operative financial institutions, rural development institutions and Micro finance institutions are there to provide housing finance assistance to the economically weaker sections of the society. References 1. Shashi.K.Gupta, Nisha Aggarwal and Neeti Gupta (2014), Financial Markets and Services, Kalyani Publishers. 2. V.A.Avadhani, Marketing of Financial Services, Himalaya Publishers. 3. P.P.Vora (2009), Indian Housing Finance System, NHB. 4. Report on Trend and Progress of Housing in India (2013), NHB.

157 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

“KINEMATICS” AND “ BIO-MECHANISM” IN THE ART OF MANAGING THE EMPLOYEES AND WORKFORCE

Dr. Abraham Sebastian Principal, Girideepam Institute of Advanced Learning , Bethany Hills, Vadavathoor P.O., Kottayam -6866010 e.mail: [email protected] Mob:- 9447415193

Shailesh Sreedharan Nair Associate Professor , Girideepam Institute of Advanced Learning Bethany Hills Vadavathoor P.O., Kottayam - 6866010 e.mail: [email protected] Mob: 9447355231

ABSTRACT The science of Physics or other disciplines are widely and carefully utilized in the many aspects of managements. The whole objective behind such experiments are to make the make an organization effective and efficient. The factors of production and the resources must not be wasted but on the contrary carefully and economically taken care off ,for the ultimate purpose of progress and prosperity Key words: Kinesis , Bio-mechanism ,Intramural , Extramural

The science of Physics in human development and progress , cannot be ignored . Furthermore the contribution of physics is far more greater than any other discipline . Physics is one of the three pillars of science , besides Biology and Chemistry . Modern Technology has been shaped and influenced by the contribution of this three discipline. The concept of ‘Energy’ is one of the core and absolutely indispensable discipline of physics and has greater influence on human life and nature, that has ever imagined . ‘Kinametic’ is a subject in physics that deals with energy and motion .The science of physics is not complete without mentioning the concept of “ENERGY”. The importance of Potential and Kinetic Energy may be considered as an alien topic in a management profession. But on the contrary , has a far reaching effect and influence in the management discipline. A careful analysis and in depth study can reveal that the significance and inevitable presence of such a science in ‘day to day of management affairs Modernization has been shaped by Science and Technology . Invention and discoveries 158 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 have been made to make life comfortable and easy , and it is so. But simultaneously human beings have lost the art of manual dexterity and skill , life has become dull and lazy, prone to innumerable diseases. When Machine started replacing humans, manual dexterity lost its importance and value, energy in human remained stagnant and dormant and has been inherited by generation after generation Today the youth pursue comfort and. moreover they are brought up in that atmosphere of comfort and leisure . They are alienated from hard work and manual labor .”Human energy is wastefully consumed in the disharmonies involved in the preventing contradiction in science , religion , national politics and the conduct of international affair” - C.Rajagopalachari Human energy has been exploited and misused . They lack direction and proper management . It is like , “ A blind leading another blind”. Organization sole aim is undoubtedly profit maximization. But at the same the organization must also acknowledge the fact that it is due the human labor , the organization are able to sustain and succeed. The popularity of a product is based on the rate of consumption ,and that is possible when the employees make a ‘quality product’ . When a product is helping the organization in revenue generation , obviously the success and credit has to be shared with the employees and labors. If the work force is utilized properly and wisely , the result will be positive and progressive. A feeling of job satisfaction begets and increases the proportion of ‘value’ on the product and ‘value’ weigh more than ‘price’. Human potential has not be systematically utilized and it is very much evident in the corporate sectors and in the affairs of HRM. Had it been used wisely , there would have been no conflict , disputes , strikes and poor quality products. Human potential energy ought to be directed through a proper channel and it has to be transformed productively and economically from the science of ‘kinesis’ into the science of ‘kinetic’. The Utilization of Scientific discipline in modern management can prove very constructive and effective . “ Bio-mechanics is the Science concerned with internal and external forces acting on human body and the effort produced by these force” “Kinematics is that branch of Bio-Mechanic that studies the trajectories of points and other geometric parts , and their differential properties such as velocity and acceleration. “Kinetics” is another branch of Bio-Mechanics concerned with what causes body to move the way it does. ‘Kinetic’ means ‘motion’ in Greek ; ‘ies’ means ‘putting it together’ in Latin Man by himself will not put his effort and energy into Action . The dormant and stagnant energy must be activated by applying external force . But nevertheless Human energy remains still and unproductive . It is because the “stimulus” to respond to the call fail . The reason may be attributed to exploitation and misuse of employees. A ‘proper push’ or a motivating stimuli can prove successful to activate the potential energy into the right direction to make it productive and result oriented. The ‘law of inertia’ is very much applicable to increase the catalytic effect and accelerate the momentum to achieve a desired goal. In the language of science ‘kinetic’ is concerned with the facts that causes a body to move. But in the HRM/Management terminology ,kinetic is ‘trigger’ or a ‘motivating factor’ that causes a person to work productively and satisfactorily .Kinematics studies the trajectories of points and geometric parts that supports kinetic. In other words the Job role and Job specification in an organization must clear and unambiguous .The accountability and responsibility of the job 159 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 and person must be stated very clearly . The process of balancing the work and its environment is known as ‘Ergonomics’. According to Merriam- Webster dictionary, Ergonomics can be defined as, “an applied science concerned with designing and arranging things people use so that the people and things interact most efficiently and safely —called also biotechnology, human engineering, human factors”. vThe infrastructure too shapes and influences , and affects positively or negatively in the movement and transformation of energy. Bio mechanic is the external and internal forces influencing the human body . The workers and employees are influenced and are motivated to work passionately and professionally in an environment that are conducive and favorable. It can be explained in three dimension. • Internal & External Factors or Intra-Mural(within the Organization) and Extra- mural(outside the Organization). • Financial and Non-Financial benefits. • Physical and Psychological environment .

1. Intra-Mural and Extra-mural

Intramural Facilities Extramural Facilities • Drinking water • Housing • Creches • Education facilities • Washing & bathing facilities • Maternity benefits • Toilet facilities for women • Transportation • • Rest shelters Sports facilities • • Uniforms Vocational training • • Protective clothes Picnic and tour • • Cooperative stores Reading room • • Employee insurance Canteens • Subsidized food • Medical aid

2. Financial and Non-Financial benefits.

Financial Non-Financial benefits • Salary • Job-Enlargement • Allowances • Job-Enrichment • Bonus • Job-Empowerment • Profit sharing • Reward and Reward • Commission • Respect and recognition • Wages(time and piece rate ) • Career Opportunity • Retirement benefits • Job Security etc., • Fringe benefits

160 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

3. Physical and Psychological Environment

Physical Psychological • Ergonomics • Management Philosophy • Infrastructure • Career Growth • Pollution free environment • Reward , Promotion • Safe working conditions. • Proper Guidance • Transportation • Training & Development program • Financial Incentives • Positive and progressive attitude of management. • Team spirit and Co-operation among the work force • Good Industrial relation • Industrial peace and democracy

These dimension can motivate and activate the dormant energy into a progressive and constructive kinetic energy. The potential or dormant energy can be rightfully transformed through proper channel to make the organization productive and profitable. A satisfied Employee or worker will work passionately ,thereby producing quality goods service leading to profit/revenue generation for the organization . The product will have high level of marketability. Growth and development will subsequently take place in three spheres.

“Employee seems to have a universal concern for fairness that transcends self” Deborah Rupp , Industrial-Organizational Psychologist . Reference • C.Rajagpalacharya “ Hinduisim Doctrine and way of life , “Bharathiya Vidhya Bhavan , Mumbai- 400007 • A.Hamblin, “Evaluation and Control of Training”, New York McGraw Hill,1990. • Blake, R. R. (1995) Memories of HRD. Training and Development, pp. 22-28 • Bass, B. M. (1985). Leadership and performance beyond expectation. New York: Free Press. • Bass, B. M. (1990). From transactional to transformational leadership: Learning to share the vision. Organizational Dynamics, (Winter): 19-31. 161 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

• Burns, J. M. (1978). Leadership. New York: Harper & Row • Chatterjee, S.R., & Pearson, C.A.L. (2000). Indian managers in transition: Orientations, work goals, values and ethics. Management International Review, 40(1), 81-95. • E.H.Schein, “Career Anchors Revisted”, Academy of Management Executive, 1996. • Harbison, F. and Myers, C. A. (1964) Education, manpower and economic growth: Strategies of human resource development. New York: McGraw-Hill • K.Dayal, Management Training in Organization”,Prentice Hall,New Delhi,1970 • K.Wesley and G.Latham, “Developing and Training Human Resources in organization”,Glenview II:Scott,Foresman,1981. • William Thomson Kelvin & Peter Guthrie Tait (1894). Elements of Natural Philosophy. Cambridge University Press. ISBN 1-57392-984-0.

162 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

ROLE OF NON BANKING FINANCIAL CORPORATIONS IN INCLUSIVE GROWTH

Anupa S. Assistant Professor (Commerce) A. J. Arts & Science College Thonnakkal, Trivandrum Dist. [email protected]

ABSTRACT Traditionally, India has had a bank-dominated financial sector. Even so, there have always been NBFCs. These were in early times that small family used to run businesses for deposits acceptance and lending activities. Even today, the sector may be “small as compared to banking sector with a total asset size of just around 14 percent of that of scheduled commercial banks (other than RRBs) but there is no denying that the sector has grown tremendously over the years in size, form and complexity, with some of the NBFCs operating as conglomerates having business interests spread to sectors like insurance, broking, mutual fund and real estate. Concomitant with the above, interconnectedness and systemic importance of the NBFC sector also have increased. The current paper looks an outlook about NBFCs, Role of NBFCs in inclusive growth and major services provided by NBFCs. This study is based on the secondary data and it conclude that NBFCs play an important role in Inclusive growth. Keywords: NBFCs, MSMEs, MFIs, KYC, Bridge financing.

INTRODUCTION NBFCs form an integral part of the Indian Financial System. They have been providing credit to retail customers in the underserved and unbanked areas. Their ability to innovate products in consonance to the needs of their clients is well established. They have played a key role in the development of important sectors like Road Transport and Infrastructure which are the life lines of our economy. This role has been well recognized and strongly advocated for, by all the Expert Committees and Taskforces setup till date, by Govt. of India & RBI. It is an established fact that many unbanked borrowers avail credit from NBFCs and over the years use their track record with NBFCs and mature to become bankable borrowers. Thus, NBFCs act as conduits and have furthered the Government’s agenda on Financial Inclusion NBFCs are today passing through a very crucial phase where RBI has issued a revised regulatory framework with the objective to harmonize it with banks and Financial Institutions and address regulatory gaps and arbitrage. While the regulations, specially, asset classification norms have been made more stringent so as to

163 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 be at par with banks, what is now required is to equip NBFCs with tools like coverage under SARFAESI Act to recover their dues and income tax benefits on provisions made against NPAs. This shall then bring the desired parity with banks and other financial institutions. Fund raising has increasingly become difficult and challenging, specially, for the large number of small and medium sized NBFCs. Review of Literature Thilakam and Saravanan (2014) writes on “CAMEL Analysis of NBFCs in Tamil Nadu” in ‘International Journal of Business and Administration Research Review”. Financial intermediation is a crucial function of Banks, Non Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs) and Development Financial Institutions (DFIs) the post reform period in India is characterized by phenomenal growth of NBFCs complementing the role of banks in mobilizing funds and making it available for investment purposes. During the last decade NBFCs have undergone wide volatility and change as an industry and have been witnessing considerable business upheaval over the last decade because of market dynamics, public sentiments and regulatory environment. To evaluate the soundness of NBFCs in Tamil Nadu over a decade, the authors made an attempt of CAMEL criteria for analysis of selected Companies. Based on findings the suggestions were offered to overcome the difficulties face by selected NBFCs in their development. Shail Shakya (2014) published a working paper entitled “Regulation of Non-banking Financial Companies in India: Some Visions & Revisions”. Non-Banking Financial Companies are pioneer in their cash deployment, accessibility to the markets and others to count. NBFCs are known for their higher risk taking capacity than the banks. Despite being an institution of attraction for the investors, NBFCs have played a significant role in the financial system. Many specialized services such as factoring, venture capital finance, and financing road transport were championed by these institutions. NBFC sector has more significantly seen a fair degree of consolidation, leading to the emergence of large companies with diversified activities. However, the recent financial crisis has highlighted the importance of widening the focus of NBFC regulations to take particular account of risks arising from the regulatory gaps, from arbitrage opportunities and from inter-connectedness of various activities and entities associated with the financial system. The regulatory regime is lighter and different than the banks. The steady increase in bank credit to NBFCs over the recent years means that the possibility of risks being transferred from more lightly regulated NBFC sector to the banking sector in India can’t be ruled out. Naresh Makhijani (2014) writes on “Non-Banking Finance Companies: Time to Introspect” in ‘Analytique’. Over the last few years the Non Banking Finance Companies (NBFC) sector has gained significant advantages over the banking system in supplying credit under-served and unbanked areas given their reach and niche business model. However, off late the Reserve Bank of India has introduced and suggested various changes in the existing regulatory norms governing NBFCs with a view to bring NBFCs regulations at par with the banks. The ongoing and proposed regulatory changes for the NBFCs in terms of increased capital adequacy, tougher provision norms, removal from priority sector status and changes in securitization guidelines could bring down the profitability and growth of the NBFC sector. NBFCs will need to introspect and rethink their business models as 164 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 they will now not only have to combat stringent regulatory norms but also have to face the challenge of rising cost of funds, scare capital and direct competition from banks. Amit Kumar and Anshika Agarwal (2014) published a paper entitled “Latest Trends in Non- banking Financial Institutions” in ‘Academicia: An International Multidisciplinary Research Journal’. In Indian Economy, there are two major Financial Institutions, one is banking and other is Non- Banking. The Non-Banking Financial Institutions plays an important role in our economy as they provide financial services on wide range, they also work to offer enhanced equity and risk-based products, along with this they also provide short to long term finance to different sectors of the economy, and many other functions. This paper examines the latest trends in Non Banking Financial Institutions. This paper analyzes the growth and enhanced prosperity of financial institutions in India. Taxmann’s (2013) published “Statutory Guide for Non-Banking Financial Companies” is published by Taxmann’s Publications, New Delhi. The book listed the laws relating to Non-Banking Financial Companies. The rules and laws governing the kinds of businesses undertaken by different types of NBFCs are also discussed. Shailendra Bhushan Sharma and Lokesh Goel (2012) write on “Functioning and Reforms in Non-Banking Financial Companies in India”. Non-Banking Financial Companies do offer all sorts of banking services, such as loans and credit facilities, retirement planning, money markets, underwriting and merger activities. These companies play an important role in providing credit to the unorganized sector and to the small borrowers at the local level. Hire purchase finance is by far the largest activity of NBFCs. The rapid growth of NBFCs has led to a gradual blurring of dividing lines between banks and NBFCs, with the exception of the exclusive privilege that commercial banks exercise in the issuance of cheques. This paper provides an exhaustive account of the functioning of and recent reforms pertaining to NBFCs in India. Objectives • To analyse the role of Non Banking Financial Corporations in Inclusive growth. • To list out the various services provided by NBFCs • To know about NBFCs satisfying credit needs of customers. Methodology: The study focused of extensive study of secondary data collected from Journals, Magazines, Publications, Reports, Books, Websites, Company Publications, Manuals and Booklets. Non Banking Financial Companies A Non-Banking Financial Company (NBFC) is a company registered under the companies Act,1956 and is engaged in the business of loans and advances, acquisition of shares/stock/bonds/ debentures/securities issued by Government or local authority or other securities of like marketable nature, leasing , hire-purchase, insurance business, chit business but does not include any institution whose principal business is that of agriculture activity, industrial activity, sale/purchase/construction of immovable property. These institutions provide banking services, but do not hold a banking license. Which are not allowed to take deposits from the public. Section 451 of the Reserve Bank

165 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 of India Act, 1934 defines “non-banking financial company” as. A financial institution which is a company and a non-banking institution which is a company and which has as its principal business the receiving of deposits, under any scheme or arrangement or in any other manner or lending in any manner Evolution of the Regulatory Frame Work for NBFCs In 1964, Chapter III B of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 was introduced to regulate NBFCs-D. Various expert committees – the most noteworthy being the Narasimham Committee and the Working Group on Financial Companies chaired by Dr. A. C. Shah – were formed to evaluate and provide their inputs on the role of NBFCs in the financial sector, their growth potential, and the regulatory changes that could be introduced to bridge the inefficiencies / gaps in the sector. Many of the recommendations of these committees were gradually interwoven into the fabric of the regulations for the NBFC sector. With NBFCs emerging as an important segment closely connected with other entities in the financial sector coupled with the failures of several large NBFCs, a more comprehensive and enhanced framework was put into place by the RBI by way of the introduction of prudential norms in 1996. In 2007, the RBI demarcated deposit accepting and non-deposit accepting NBFCs and separate prudential norms were issued. The NBFC sector in India has undergone a significant transformation over the past few years and has come to be recognized as a systemically important component of the financial system. NBFCs are now closely interconnected with entities in the financial sector and may be exposed to risks which could impact the NBFC sector as well as other participants in the financial sector. The NBFC segment has witnessed consolidation over the recent past (especially in the NBFC-ND-SI segment) as indicated by the total number of registered NBFCs with the RBI witnessing a consistent year on year decline against the overall growth in their assets over the same period. Types of NBFCs Originally, NBFCs registered with RBI were classified as: (i) Equipment leasing company: Means any company which is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business, the activity of leasing of equipment or the financing of such activity. (ii) Hire-purchase company- Means any company which is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business hire purchase transactions or the financing of such transactions. (iii) Loan company—means any company which is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business the providing of finance whether of making loans or advances or otherwise for any activity other then its own (iv) investment company- means any company which is a financial institution carrying on as its principal business the acquisition of securities Products and Services Offered by NBFCs Non Banking Financial Institutions play a vital role in fulfilling the gap of financial services that are not generally provided by the banking sector. The competition among NBFCs is increasing over the years, which is forcing them to diversify to a wider range of products and services and to provide innovative investment solutions. The products and services provided by NBFCs can be categorized as under. 166 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Accepting Deposits: As it has been said deposit products of NBFCs are usually of two types. Term loans : As NBFCs are not allowed to maintain checking account the main deposit product is of term loan. Maturities of these loans vary from one to five years. However maturity other than this is also available for many NBFCs. Deposit pension scheme ; Under this scheme deposits are accepted on a periodic basis with equal installment .The future value is payable at the end of the period in lump sum. Financing The following loan products are available: One of the most important products of NBFCs is leasing, which facilitate the use of a fixed asset without owing it in exchange of a series of a periodic payments. There are different types of leasing that a financial institution can provide. NBFCs usually provide capital lease , operating lease, leverage lease, sale and lease back, synthetic lease, etc. 1. Home loans and real estate financing : House loans and real estate financing is extend for purchase, construction, renovation and extension of apartments and house, purchase and construction of office space for professionals ,purchase and construction of commercial buildings, etc. These loans are mostly medium to long term nature. 2. Bridge Finance ; Bridge finance fills the gap between the need of fund and availability of fund in is extended in anticipation of immediate long term the near future. It financing such as public issue, private placement, loan syndication, etc. 3. Syndication of large loans : Some times amount of loan needed is so large that a single institution is not in a position to assume the entire risk. Under such circumstances , a number of financial institutions meet together to finance a huge project. Merchant Banking Apart from finance and leasing companies there are some NBFCs that are not involved in extending credit rather they are involved in assisting firms raise funds.They may be involved in the process as any or all of the following. Issue management: The Issue Management group is capable of devising innovative solution to corporate clients for rising capital –debt and equity through private and public placement from the market suiting the unique needs and constraints of the clients. Underwriting: Underwriting refers to the guarantee by the underwriters that in the event of under subscribed amount on pro-rata basis upon payment of price of that option. It is done by a group of underwriters. Portfolio Management: Merchant banks offer small investors to open investors account with merchant banks and provide for the support for the purchase and sale of share for the clients. Clients shall have absolute discretionary power to make investment decisions. Corporate Advising : Through corporate advising ,the merchant bank helps the issuer analyse its financing needs and suggest various ways to raise needed funds and terms and timing of issue. Security services Brokerage services : Members of stock exchanges are allowed to provide brokerage services 167 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 for trade execution, pre-IPO private placement. CDBL services as full service depository participant (DP ) : Apart from the brokerage services, security services also provide the services like BO (Beneficial Owner) accounts opening and maintenance, Dematerialization, Re-materialization, Transfers, etc. List of Major Products offered by NBFCS 1. Funding of commercial vehicles 2. Funding of infrastructure assets 3. Retail financing 4. Loan against shares 5. Funding of plant and machinery 6. Small and Medium Enterprises Financing 7. Financing of specialized equipment 8. Operating leases of cars Credit to MSMEs Statistics based on 4th Census on MSME sector revealed that only 5.18% of the units (both registered and un-registered) had availed finance through institutional sources. 2.05% got finance from non-institutional sources the majority of units say 92.77% had no finance or depended on self-finance. The fact that a large segment in the micro and small industries sector does not have access to formal credit provides a window of opportunity for the NBFCs to design suitable innovative products. Micro Finance Institutions NBFC-MFIs provide access to basic financial services such as loans, savings, money transfer services, micro-insurance etc. to poor people and attempt to fill the void left between the mainstream commercial banks and money lenders. Over the last few years NBFC-MFIs have emerged as fast growing enablers in providing the financial services to the poor people by providing capital inputs to poor which generates self-employment, and thereby promotes inclusive growth. MFIs, as per the Malegam committee recommendations, RBI has created separate category under NBFCs. As on date, around 33 MFIs To encourage have been registered with RBI. Monetization of Gold NBFCs provide loans against security of gold jewellery. Although banks are also involved in gold loan business, NBFCs’ gold loans witnessed phenomenal growth due to their customer friendly approaches like simplified sanction procedures, quick loan disbursement etc. Gold loan NBFCs help in monetization of idle gold stocks in the country and facilitate in creating productive resources. Branches of gold loan NBFCs increased significantly during the last couple of years mostly housed at semi-urban and rural centers of the country. Second Hand Vehicle Financing Apart from providing loan against property, NBFCs also engage in financing used/ second hand vehicles, reconditioned vehicle, three-wheelers, construction equipment besides secured /

168 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 unsecured working capital financing etc. Incidentally, in India except NBFCs no other financial sector player finance second hand vehicles; which are very popular with road transport operators essentially in the self-employed segment. Affordable Housing Another area where NBFCs are participating in the inclusive growth agenda is affordable housing. Large NBFCs are setting up units to extend small-ticket loans to home buyers targeting low-income customers across the country. Firms are offering loans of Rs. 2-6 lakh to borrowers with monthly income of Rs.6000 – 12000 who find it difficult to borrow from the commercial banks. Firms offer easier know-your customer (KYC) norms such as relaxation in documentation requirements to facilitate easy access to low-income borrowers. CONCLUSION Any attempt to expand financial inclusion is essentially a small step in a longer journey and India needs to travel on this journey to become a global player. Inclusive growth will act as a source of empowerment and allow people to participate more effectively in the economic and social process . NBFCs have emerged as a strong financial intermediary in making financial services accessible to a widest set of customer segments including SMEs. NBFCs have extended finance to SMEs by having a range of products that suit their needs in their portfolio. References 1. Bothra, N. & Sayeed, K. (n.d). An Overview of the Indian NBFC Sector Performance in 2010, prospects in 2011. Legal Updates, Vinod Kothari & Company 2. Kaur, H. & Tanghi, B.S. (Aug 2013). Non Banking Finance Companies: Role & Future Prospects. Global Research Analysis Vol. 2 Issue 8 3. Non Banking Finance Companies. Retrieved from www.indiabudget.nic.in 4. Role of NBFCs in Promoting Inclusive Growth. Retrieved from www.ficci.com 5. Non Banking Finance Companies (NBFCs). Retrieved from www.business-gov.in 6. www.investopedia.com 7. www.wikipedia.com 8. Carmichael, Jeffrey, and Michael Pomerleano. Development and Regulation of Non-Bank Financial Institutions. World Bank Publications, 2002, 12. 9. Jump up^ Non-Bank Financial Institutions:A Study of Five Sectors Jump up^ NZ Financial 10. Dictionary, http://www.anz.com/edna/dictionary.asp?action=content&content=non- bank_financial_institution 11. Jump up^ Legal Service Commission, Law Handbook Online, “Non-bank financial institutions” http:// www.lawhandbook.sa.gov.au/ch07s05s06s03.php 12. Jump up^ The World Bank GFDR Report 13. Jump up^ Carmichael, Jeffrey, and Michael Pomerleano. Development and Regulation of Non-Bank Financial Institutions. World Bank Publications, 2002, 19. 14. Jump up^ Non-Bank Financial Institutions: A Study of Five Sectors, http://osdbu.treas.gov/ cooply.html 15. World Bank GFDR Report 169 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

EFFECTS OF SUDARSHAN KRIYA, A UNIQUE BREATHING TECHNIQUE TO BRING THE MIND AND BODY INTO A RELAXED STATE

Nayana B.S. Research Scholar, Dept. of Commerce and Management Studies, Kannur University, Kerala

INTRODUCTION Yoga is interdisciplinary by nature as it touches physical, mental and spiritual levels. The word “yoga” is derived from the Sanskrit word “yuj” which means “to join” or “to unite”. That is the unity of body and soul. Yoga is originated in India before 5000 years or more since Gautama Buddha era and Indus Valley Civilization. Historical evidences of the existence of Yoga were seen in the pre-Vedic period (2700 B.C.), and thereafter till Patanjali’s period. Maharishi Patanjali is the ‘father of Yoga’ who compiled 195 Yoga Sutras that became the foundation of Yoga philosophy. The first Hindu teacher to actively advocate and disseminate aspects of yoga to a western audience, Swami Vivekananda, toured Europe and the United States in the 1890s. After Vivekanada, many other yoga experts like Paramahansa Yogananda, Yogendra Mastamani and many more has crossed the ocean to popularize yoga abroad. Yoga is not just a physical exercise but also is a tool for inner reconstruction. Yoga connects the mind, body, and spirit through body poses, controlled breathing, and meditation. Also, it is clinically proven that yoga acts as an effective treatment for various diseases like high blood pressure, respiratory issues, anxiety, depression etc. Many studies have tried to determine the effectiveness of yoga as a complementary intervention for cancer, schizophrenia, asthma, and heart disease. Yoga has got wide acceptance these days and that is the reason why yoga is included in curriculum and International yoga day is celebrated on June 21st declared by United Nations General Assembly (UNGA) on December 11, 2014 by adding a golden feather for India on her crown. This paper attempts to describe the effects of Sudarshan Kriya, a unique breathing technique. Sudarshan Kriya uses specific cyclical, rhythmic patterns of breath to bring the mind and body into a relaxed, yet energized state. Its effects have been studied in open and randomized trials, both in healthy and health compromised populations What is Sudarshan Kriya? Sudarshan Kriya is a powerful yet simple rhythmic breathing technique that incorporates specific natural rhythms of the breath, harmonizing the body mind and emotions. ‘Su’ means proper, ‘darshan’ means vision, and ‘Kriya’ is a purifying practice.The Sudarshan Kriya is therefore a purifying practice, whereby one receives a proper vision of one’s 170 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 true self. This unique breathing practice is a potent energizer. The rhythmic breathing pattern of Sudarshan Kriya harmonizes the rhythms of the body and emotions and brings them in tune with the rhythms of nature. The breath connects the body and mind. Sudarshan Kriya was introduced in 1982. It was contributed by Sri Sri Ravishankar. Founder of Art Of Living foundation. Sudarshan Kriya involves three stage rhythmic breathing stages which includes big, medium and short circle of breathing. Sudarshan Kriya cant be isolated or practiced individually. It is essentially a package which necessarily involves three stage pranayama, bhasthrika, pranava mantra and yoga nidra. Before starting Sudarshan Kriya, pranayam and bhasthrika is done in order to open up our lungs and to fill it with sufficient amount of oxygen. For Sudarshan Kriya, there is no need to take “ujjay breath” that is needed at the time of pranayama only. Normal inhale and exhale of breath is needed while doing Sudarshan Kriya. This is followed by chanting of pranava mantra. Pranava mantra can be any sound which have a combination of “AUM”. It can be either “OM”, “AMEEN” or “AMIN”. It can be chosen according to one’s religious practices/believes. The benefit of this mantra is effective in various parts of our body. The combination of sounds in pranavamantra include “A+U+M” where these indicates: first sound “aa” have an effect on our abdomen which open up our creative energy, then “uu” sound have an effect on our chest part which open up the beloved nature in us and finally,”mm” sound vibrates our forehead, exactly in between the centre of our eyebrow part. The three rhythmic circles of breathing is instructed by the word “soham” which is a combination of two word “sah” means he/that and “aham” means “I”. So the meaning of this word indicates that “that”(the nature/ultimate power) and “I” are one and the same.In general terms also, we can observe that when we take a long breath in, the sound comes as “soo” and when we exhale it sounds “hammm”. After completion of the three breathing circles around 40 minutes, then comes yoga nidra. Yoga nidra is a powerful technique to conserve and consolidate the energy within our body after the process. Just as a car engine needs to be turned off and allowed to cool down after a long drive, similarly, after doing yoga postures, pranayama and Sudarshan Kriya we need to cool our body with yoga nidra.In yoga nidra, the posture to be adopted is “shavasana”. It is a process of consciously taking our attention to different body parts which activates the nerves in those areas and helps to integrate the impact of the process done before. In yoga nidra, attention is given to various body parts starting from legs, thighs, hip, genital area, stomach, navel, Breath is the main source of prana - the vital life-force energy. Prana is the very basis of health and well-being for both, the body and mind. When the prana is high, one feels healthy, alert and energetic. Sudarshan Kriya elevates the prana by flushing out more than 90 percent toxins and accumulated stress, everyday. Sudarshan Kriya practitioners have reported better immunity, increased stamina and sustained high-energy levels. Being a part of nature, we have got a natural biological rhythm for our body. When stress or illness throws these biological rhythms out of order, we experience discomfort, discontent, and feel upset and unhappy. Sudarshan Kriya harmonizes the rhythms of the body, emotions and puts them back in tune with the rhythms of nature Nature have five elements known as “panchamahabhutas”.They are Earth, Water, Fire,

171 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Air and Space. Same as that, man also have five elements in him. Earth element (Bones and Muscles), Water element (Blood), Air element (Breath), Fire element (Heat), and Space element (Emptiness within). If any one element is taken out, body would collapse. If there is imbalance of earth element, diseases like Weakness, obesity, cholesterol, weight loss and weight gain, bones or muscular diseases etc. occurs. If imbalance occur at water level, cold, sinusitis, asthma, swellings, blood thinning or blood clotting, problem of urination, diseases of reproductive organs. Occur, if its about fire element, Coldness or fever, skin diseases, increased coldness or heat in body, loss of vital energy, acidity, diabetes, and mental disorders. Imbalance of air element result in Nervous disorders, blood pressure problems, lung disorders, physical pains/deformities, depression, and locomotors ataxia. And finally imbalance of space element can lead to Thyroid disorders, throat problems, speech disorders, epilepsy, madness, foolishness, ear diseases, etc. Sudarshan Kriya helps in balancing these five elements of human with five elements of nature and thus human beings can lead a holistic way of living CONCLUSION Sudarshana Kriya skillfully uses a person’s breath to transform one’s mental and physical attributes. It is a magical technique which helps in transforming the outlook of people towards life. Every day we breathe in and out. Sudarshan Kriya is a cost effective technique which skillfully use the breath to change the way we feel. Further studies are needed to assess the health benefits to be clinically proven. Sudarshan Kriya is a simple process where you don’t need any equipments or environment, but a person should complete the age of 18 to practice this. Each individual’s experience of the Sudarshan Kriya varies as it is a very personal experience. The benefits of sudarshan kriya are experienced by people around the globe from 154 countries and have touched the lives of over 370 million people. In today’s world with pollution and stress, Sudarshan Kriya can definitely act as a refresher to purify the body and minds of human beings. Reference • www.sudarshankriya.blogspot.in • www.artofliving.org • Hari Neelagiri, Jeevanakala – shasthravum samoohikathayum

172 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

CAPITAL STRUCTURE ANALYSIS OF OIL INDUSTRY- AN EMPIRICAL STUDY OF HPCL, IOCL & BPCL (INDIA)

Dr. Titto Varghese Associate Professor (Finance), Department of Management Studies, Mangalam College of Engineering Ettumanoor, Kottayam, Kerala-686631 (Affiliated to Mahatma Gandhi University) [email protected] [email protected] +919447661210 (M) 04829-256657 (R)

ABSTRACT Capital structure, or what is generally known as capital mix, is very important to control the overall cost of capital in order to improve the earnings per share of shareholders. After globalization and liberalization, various financial sector reforms were started by governments, such as reducing rates of interest, Sale of Shares of PSUs etc., which directly affected the capital structure planning of firms. Due to this situation, the fertilizer industry also reorganized their capital structure. The financing of a capital structure decision is a significant managerial decision. Initially, the company will have to plan its capital structure at the time of its promotion. Subsequently, whenever funds have to be raised for finance and investment, a capital structure decision is involved. In this research article, researchers try to evaluate the concept of capital structure, capital structure planning and patterns of capital structure in oil industry (HPCL, BPCL, IOCL). We found that BPCL, HPCL & IOCL using the maximum possible reserve fund and long-term debt in their capital structure planning. All the three units are issued equity share during the study period from 1999 to 2008, which directly affected capital structure and cost of capital in all the companies. During the study period, all the company has been raised their long-term funds; for development and expansion needs, because debt is a cheaper source of finance as compare to equity. In the present scenario rates of interest have been decreasing regularly in the Indian capital market. Keywords: Debt, Equity, Capital gearing, Financial leverage

INTRODUCTION Capital structure is the mix of debt and equity securities that are used to finance companies assets. It is defined as the amount of permanent short-term debt, preferred stock, and common

173 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 equity used to finance a firm. Financial structure is sometimes used as synonymous with capital structure. However, financial structure is more comprehensive in the sense that it refers to in aggregate; the amount of total current liabilities, long-term debt, preferred stock and common equity used to finance the firm. Therefore, capital structure is only a part of financial structure, which refers mainly to the permanent sources of the firms financing. Nonetheless, the present study considers the sources, which do not explicitly fall under the definition of capital structure. Decision on capital structure formulation or long term financing is influenced by multiple factors. Much of the focus, as laid in the research on the subject pertains to the target capital structure, which the firm believes the best in terms of the financial goals. Financial economics has made a significant progress in explaining the incentives that make companies choose particular financing policies .In the last two decades, a number of choices have been proposed to explain the variations in the debt equity ratio among firms. Increasingly the profession is moving beyond an examination of the basic leverage choice to the more detailed aspects of financing decisions. The term capital structure is used to represent the proportionate relationship between debt and equity. Equity includes paid up share capital, share premium, reserves and surplus (retained earnings). Debt includes debenture and long-term loans. The estimation of capital requirements for current and future needs is important for a firm and equally important is the determining of the capital mix. Equity and debt are the two principal sources of finance for a business. “The financing decisions have two components. First, to decide how much total funds are needed and second, to decide the source or their combinations to raise such funds. The total quantity of fund needed, however, depends upon the investment decision of the firm. Given that the firm has good estimates of how much capital funds are needed, the problem then remains one of determining the best mix of different sources to be used in raising the required funds. The process that leads to the final choice of the capital structure is referred to as the capital structure planning.” Appraisal of capital structure The capital structure of a company consists of debt and equity securities, which provide finance for a firm. An optimum capital structure is one that maximizes the market Valuation of the firm’s securities in order to minimize the cost of its capital. Justification of the study The financing of a capital structure decision is a significant managerial decision. The company will initially have to plan its capital structure at the time of its promotion. Subsequently, whenever funds have to be raised to finance investment, a capital structure decision is involved. “In order to run and manage a company funds are needed right from the promotional stage up to the end, finances play an important role in a company’s life. If funds are inadequate, the business suffers and if the funds are not properly managed, the entire organization suffers. It is, therefore, necessary that a correct estimate of the current and future need of capital be made to have an optimum capital structure, which will help an organization to run its work smoothly and without any stress.” Estimation of capital requirement is necessary, also the formation of a capital structure is important according to Gerstenbeg, “Capital structure of a company refers to the composition or make up of its capitalization and it includes all long term capital resources viz; loans reserves,

174 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 shares and bonds” The capital structure is made up of debt and equity securities and refers to the permanent financing of a firm. It is composed of long-term debt, preference share capital and shareholders funds. Keeping this background in view, an attempt has been made by the researchers to evaluate the ‘capital structure’ of HPCL, IOCL&BPCL, which are leading OIL refinery and Distributors in the public sector in India. Objectives of study This research study fulfils the following objectives: • To study the capital structure position of HPCL, IOCL and BPCL public sector companies. • To examine the performance of debt and equity among these sample companies. • To give suggestions for improvement of the capital structure position of sample companies. Limitations of the study (1). This study is based on an analysis of the financial statement for ten financial years i.e. 2004- 05 to 2013-14 of HPCL, IOCL & BPCL. (2). For the analysis of capital structure, only secondary data, which are derived from the annual reports, has been taken in this study. Company Profile Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited HPCL is one of the leading petrochemical companies in India. HPCL has two refineries, one west coast in Mumbai with a capacity of 7.36 million metric tones per annum, while the another is at Vishakhaptaman on the east coast has a capacity of 9.41 million metric tones per annum .The monitoring operations of HPCL are divided in three strategic business units retails, direct sales comprising lubes, and industrial and government sales. HPCL has a 31% market share of the lubricants in the country. The HPCL engine oil product range covers 300 brands oF lubricants, greases and other products which are related with the various engines HPCL invested various subsidiaries and joint ventures namely Guru Govind Singh Refineries Ltd., Mangalore Refineries Ltd. and or Petrol Chemical Limited, Petronet MHB Limited, South Asia LPG private Ltd., prize petroleum company Ltd, Hindustan Colons Limited Petronet India Ltd. and Hindustan Omen Petroleum Company Ltd. In 2014-15 revenue was Rs 217,061.11 Crores. Indian Oil Corporation Limited Beginning in 1959 as Indian Oil Company Ltd., Indian Oil Corporation Ltd. was formed in 1964 with the merger of Indian Refineries Ltd. (Estd. 1958). Indian Oil Corporation (IndianOil) is India’s largest commercial enterprise, with a sales turnover of Rs. 4,50,756 crore (US$ 73.7 billion) and profits of Rs. 5,273 crore for the year 2014-15. IndianOil is ranked 119th among the world’s largest corporates (and first among Indian enterprises) in the prestigious Fortune ‘Global 500’ listing for the year 2015.Indian Oil is India’s No.1 Company in Fortune’s prestigious listing of the world’s 500 largest corporations, ranked 189 for the year 2008 based on fiscal 2007 performance. It is also the 19th largest petroleum company in the world. Indian Oil has also been adjudged No.1 in petroleum trading among the national oil companies in the Asia-Pacific region, and is ranked 325th in the current Forbes’ “Global 500” listing of the largest public companies. 175 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Bharat Petroleum Corporation Limited: BPCL traces its history to 1928 when the Burma shell oil storage & distribution company of India was incorporated in England to enter the petroleum products business in India. To-day Bharat petroleum company is down stream oil refinery and marketing company with present revenue of Rs 2,63,936 crore. This company is India largest second Oil Company in terms of market share. Bharat petroleum network is spared all over India. From LPG and kerosene for domestic consumption, to automotive flies and lubricants for vehicles, to feedstock and flues for industrial applications. BPCL has 1205 LPG distributors catering to 8.03 million consumers LPG infrastructure includes 28 LPH bottling plants with a total capacity of 1032 TMTPA. BPCL was first in the industry to be awarded ISO 9002 accreditation. For an LPG bottling plant ,21 plants have been already received ISO9002 certification . Data and Research Methodology To analyze the capital structure of HPCL, IOCL, BPCL secondary data, collected from the annual reports of the company, was used along with other published material of the companies. For the analysis of capital structure, the annual reports from the year 2004-05 to 2013-14 used in this study. For an analysis of the capital structure of the company, the ratios of capital structure are used. Statistical techniques, such as mean, growth rate and coefficient of variation, are also used in relevant areas. To make calculation much easier and logical, the data are approximated in the relevant places. For the analysis of the capital structure of HPCL, the following ratios related to capital structure are used:”Debt equity Ratio, Funded debt to total capitalization Ratio, Proprietary Ratio, Solvency Ratio, Fixed asset to net worth Ratio, Fixed assets to long-term funds Ratio, Interest coverage Ratio, Capital gearing Ratio, Financial leverage Ratio” Appraisal of capital structure The capital structure of a company consists of debt and equity securities, which provide finance for a firm. An optimum capital structure is one that maximizes the market Valuation of the firm’s securities in order to minimize the cost of its capital. Findings with Detailed Discussion 1). Debt Equity Ratio (DER) The debt-equity ratio is calculated to measure the extent to which debt financing has been used in a business. The ratio indicates the proportionate claims of owners and outsiders against the firm’s assets. The purpose is to get an idea of the cash available to outsiders on the liquidation of the firm. As a general rule, there should be an approximate mix of owner’s funds and outsider’s funds in financing the firm’s assets. However, the Capital structure analysis of the oil industry owners want to carry on their business with a maximum of outsider’s funds in order to reduce the risk of their investments and to increase their earning per share by paying a lower fixed rate of interest to outsiders. On the other hand, outsiders want those Shareholders (owners) to invest and risk a proportionate share of their investments. Therefore, the interpretation of this ratio depends upon the financial policy of the firm and upon the firm’s nature of business. In case of HPCL, ratios are under control which is on an average 0.49 which shows the debt are 50% of the equity. But in case of IOCL, overall average is 1.04. Lowest ratio is 0.53 in the year 2009 and highest

176 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 ratio is 1.29 in the year that shows their debts are equal or more then equal to the equity. In case of BPCL, again it is under control and over all average is better then BPCL & IOCL. 2). Funded Debt to Total capitalization The ratio establishes a link between the long-term funds raised from outsiders and total long-term funds available in the business. Funded debts to total capitalization are also one of the important ratios that explain the capital structure position of a company. There is no rule of thumb but, still, the lesser the reliance on outsiders the better it will be. Also, the smaller the ratio the better it will be. That the portion of debt finance increases. It means that, in the study period, the company has taken long-term borrowing and ratio increases due to decreases in free reserves. When ever debt compared with total capitalization HPCL has better position as compare to IOCL and BPCL. In HPCL their over all average is 0.32 while in case of IOCL 0.48 and in BPCL it is 0.45. That shows in IOCL and BPCL both has more external liabilities as compare to HPCL. 3). Proprietary Ratio This ratio established the relationship between shareholders funds and the total assets of the firm. The components of this ratio are shareholder’s funds and total assets. As the proprietary ratio represents the relationship of owners funds to total assets, the higher the ratio (the share of the shareholders in the total capitalization of the company) the better is the long-term solvency and, from the capital structure point of view, this ratio indicates the extent to which the assets of the company can be lost without affecting the interest of the creditors of the company. In case of proprietary ratio HPCL and IOCL has better position as compare to BPCL .In HPCL ratio is always between 0.40 to 0.50 with over all 0.44 while in IOCL it is between 0.41 to 0.55 with over all average of 0.48 while in BPCL it is an average 0.32 that shows share holders are lower as compare to assets. 4). Solvency Ratio The ratio indicates the relationship between the total liabilities of outsiders to total assets of a firm. This ratio is a small variant of equity ratio and can be simply calculated as 100 – equity ratio. Generally, the lower the ratio of total liabilities to total assets, the more satisfactory or stable is the long-term solvency position of a firm. In case of HPCL their Solvency ratio is always between 0.95 to 0.61 with an over all average of 0.56 which shows better solvency position. While in IOCL there over all average is 0.52 its better for HPCL. But in case of BPCL it is always between 0.60 to 0.72 with over all average of 0.68 that shows their solvency position is weak as compare to other firms. 5). Fixed Assets Ratio The ratio establishes the relationship between fixed assets and shareholders fund. If the ratio is less than 100%, it implies that owner’s funds are more than total fixed assets and the shareholders provide a part of the working capital. When the ratio is more than 100%,it implies that owner’s funds are not sufficient to finance the fixed assets and the firm has to depend upon outsiders to finance the fixed assets. There is no ‘Rule of thumb’ to interpret this ratio but 60% to 65% is considered to be a satisfactory ratio in the case of an industrial undertaking. The ratio of fixed assets to net worth indicates the extent to shareholders funds is into fixed assets. As per

177 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 table I in case of HPCL their net worth is always more than the fixed assets except in the year 2008 ,that means their fixed assets are financed through net worth . In case of IOCL net worth is lower then fixed assets that means they are always financed through outsiders funds and their over all average is 1.08 similarly in case of BPCL it is always more than 1.30 with over all average of 1.34 that shows their fixed assets are fiancé through outsiders funds also. 6). Fixed Assets to long-term funds The ratio indicates the extent to which the total assets are financed by the long-term funds of the firm. Generally, the total of fixed assets should be equal to total long-term funds. But, where fixed assets exceed the total of long-terms funds it implies that the firm has been financing a part of the fixed assets out of liquid funds or working capital, which is not a good policy. And, if the total long-term funds are more than the total fixed assets, it mean that a part of the working capital requirements are being met out of the long-term funds of the firms. As per table I in case of HPCL position of fixed assets to long term funds are increasing gradually during the study period. It increases from 0.49 to 0.68 with over all average 0.61 that means long term funds are available for working capital point of view. Similarly in case of IOCL it increases from 0.48 to 0.65 with over all average of 0.53 but incase of BPCL it is 0.80 to 0.72 and the average is 0.72 that shows an uniform trends in oil industry and their funds are available for working capital point of view. 7).Interest coverage Ratio Net income to debt service ratio or simply debt service ratio is used to test the debt servicing capacity of a firm. The ratio is also known as interest coverage ratio or Coverage ratio or fixed changes cover or times interest earned. This ratio is calculated by dividing the net profit before interest and tax by fixed interest charges. It indicates the interest-paying capacity of a firm. As per table I, in case of HPCL their interest coverage ratio will be fluctuated during the study period, but average is 9.52 times that shows their sound interest paying capacity, but in case of IOCL their ratio increases regularly but lower and over all average is 5.20 times .while incase of BPCL their interest coverage will decline from 6.52 to 5.12 times with over all average of 5.69 times but still it is very satisfactory . It’s a normal trend in oil industry that during last five year their interest’s burden and interest liabilities are increasing but still position of HPCL is far better than others. 8).Capital Gearing ratio The term capital gearing is used to describe the relationship between equity share capital, including reserves and surpluses, and preference share capital and other fixed interest-bearing loans. If preference shares capital and other fixed interest-bearing loans exceed the equity share capital including reserves the firm is said to be highly geared. The firm is said to have a low gearing ratio if preference shares and other fixed interest-bearing loans are less than the equity capital and reserves. Table I shows capital gearing position of all the their units, incase of HPCL capital gearing position is almost near about the 2.00 with over all average of 2.24 times that shows HPCL will be lower geared company. On the other hand incase of IOCL over all average is 1.00 that manes equity and loans both are same during the study period. While in BPCL it is always more then one with over all average of 1.24 times that means BPCL is also lower geared company. 178 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

9). Financial leverage The term financial leverage refers to the use of fixed charges, such as a debenture, and the use of variable charges or securities, such as equity shares, in the financial structure and total assets of the firm. So, the financial leverage refers to the presence of a fixed charge in the income statement of the firm. This fixed charge is fixed in amount and does not vary with the changes in the EBIT, whereas the return available to the equity shareholders, which is a residual balance, is affected by the changes in EBIT. The position cost of HPCL has been increasing since 2005 to 2007 then after it has decreased up till 2009, IOCL having more financial cost as compare to HPCL and it has more fluctuation in financial cost. The financial cost have increased in year 2007 to 2010 and remaining year it is continually decreasing. While the position of BPCL also showed financial cost and it has been continuously increasing up to 2009 except the year of 2007and 2008. Analysis of Capital Structure of Oil Companies Capital structure of HPCL, IOCL and BPCL consist three main components they are equity share, Reserve Funds and secured loans including debentures. a). HPCL: A Capital structure of HPCL consists of three main components of i.e. share capital, reserve funds, loan capital. The position of share capital in total capitalization shows constant increasing trend till 2009 then after proportion of equity share capital has been continuously decreasing to 1.24% in the year 2014.In case of reserve fund has been increasing except in the year 2008, but then after proportion of reserve fund is also regularly dresses up to 37.38% in the last year of the study period. The position of loan capital also showed a decreasing trend except in the year of 2009 but then after contribution of loan of loan capital is continuously increases up to 61.38% in the year 2014. b). IOCL: In case of IOCL main components of capital structure are same as HPCL equity share contributed approx. 2% to 3% of the total capitalization in each year. Contribution of reserves funds are between 45-50 percent and they are the second largest sources in their capital structure but their proportion continuously increases specially after 2010 secured. Loan capital is also between 45to 50% of total capitalization but in the last five years, proportion of loan capital ia always less than 50 % of the total capitalization. c). BPCL: In BPCL contribution of equity share is varying between 3.20% to 1.35% in total capitalization especially in the last five years it is regularly decreases up to 1.35%. Contribution of reserve funds are regularly decreasing from 61% to 42.38% between 2005 to 2014 that shows utilization of reserve funds in other purpose during the study period. Contribution of loan capital is regularly increasing from 35.55% to 56.27%, which is a major change in their capital structure. That indicates that they are using maximum possible extent loan capital to enhance the value of shareholder. The major changes observed that in oil industry their equity contribution is only 3-4 % of total capitalization while reserve and funds are 45-50% and loans capital is between 45% to 50% As far as capitalization concern HPCL is better as compared to other companies because reserve funds are more and secured and unsecured loans are lower than others.

179 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Findings After the analysis of capital structure of oil industries especially BPCL, HPCL and IOCL it was revealed that all these companies are doing their businesses on trading on equity. The capital structure pattern of oil companies are share capital, reserves funds and loans. In the study period it was reveled that capital structure of HPCL have share capital constant but reserve fund is decreasing from 2005 to 2008 and then afterward it started increasing, secured loan has been continuously increasing upto 2008 afterwards it started deceasing and unsecured land has been increasing up to 2007 than after it decreased. The capital structure position of IOCL was constant through out the study period and reserve and surplus has been decreasing up to 2008 than after it started increasing. Secured loan and unsecured loans has been increasing up to 2009. The capital structure position of BPCL showed constant share capital during the study period, the reserves had been continually increasing up to 2009 but secured loans and unsecured loans has been till 2007 than after it started deceasing. In this study it was found that all these companies having debt more than equity in there capital structure. These companies belong to govt. sector and their intention is to support the economy. These companies enjoying debt capital in their business due to effective earning of these business enterprises. The position of HPCL, IOCL and BPCL indicate that rate of return are greater than the cost of capital. In this situation company enjoys by implementing of more and more debt capital in there business. The overall position of financial leverage shows that Capital Structure is satisfactory among these companies. But BPCL use of debt capital is very systematic and technical. As a result of it, debt capital has increased continuously and also their reserve funds has been increasing at a faster rate as compared to IOCL and HPCL. The comparative study among HPCL, IOCL, & BPCL showed a positive indication of its financial strategies. References (1). Engler, G.N. (Ed.) (1973) Managerial Finance: Cases and Readings, Inc, Dalla. (2). Guthmann, H.G. and Dougall, H.E. (1995) Corporate Financial Policy, 4th ed., Prentice Hallof India Pvt. Ltd, pp.84–85. (3). Hampton, J.J. (1998) Financial Decision-Making, Concepts, Problems and Cases, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi. (4). Pandey, I.M. (2000) Financial Management Theory and Practices, Vikas Publishing Company, New Delhi. (5). Jagdish, Prakesh, Rao and Shukla (1996) Administration of Public Enterprise in India, Himalaya Publishing Company, New Delhi. (6). Khan and Jain (1997) Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi. (7). Balwani, N. (2000) Accounting and Finance for Managers, Amexcel Publisher’s Private Ltd., p.772. (8). Rustagi, R.P. (2000) Financial Management, Theory, Concept and Problems, 2nd ed., Galgotia Publishing Company, New Delhi, p.860. (9). Banerjee, S.K. (2000) Financial Management, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi. (10) Walker, E.W. (1974) Essentials of Financial Management, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi. (11). Bhalla, V.K. (1997) Financial Management and Policy, 1st ed., Anmol Publications,New Delhi. (12). Wachowicz, V.H.J.C. (1998) Fundamental of Financial Management, 9th ed., Prentice Hall Inc, New Delhi. (13). Annual reports of HPCL, IOCL, and BPCL from 2005 to 2014

180 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Debt Equity Analysis of Oil Industries by Statistical Tool Table No. 1. Correlation of Debt & Equity of HPCL, IOCL & BPCL Name of the company Combination of correlation among Significant / non debt & equity significant HPCL r = + 0.24 Non significant IOCL r = + 0.42 Non significant BPCL r = + 0.997 Highly significant

Table 2 Capital Structure Ratio’s of HPCL. Year D/E FD/Tc PR SR FA/ FATO INT.COV C.G.R F.L NW LT FUND 2005 0.27 0.22 0.55 0.45 0.63 0.49 11.77 3.61 1.09 2006 0.5 0.33 0.44 0.56 0.97 0.65 9.47 1.99 1.12 2007 0.55 0.35 0.43 0.57 0.91 0.59 4.41 1.82 1.29 2008 0.73 0.42 0.39 0.6 1.1 0.63 5.17 1.36 1.24 2009 0.41 0.29 0.38 0.61 0.96 0.68 16.77 2.41 1.06 2010 0.22 0.18 0.82 0.18 0.85 3.87 54.21 4.55 1.01 2011 0.26 0.21 0.79 0.21 0.82 3.18 20.98 3.86 1.05 2012 0.76 0.43 0.57 0.43 0.84 1.1 2.62 1.31 1.62 Table2013 3 Capital 1.1 Structure 0.52 Ratio’s 0.48 of IOCL. 0.52 0.92 0.84 5.65 0.91 1.22 2014 1.59 0.61 0.39 0.61 1.13 0.71 2.4 0.63 1.72 Year D/E FD/Tc PR SR FA/ FATO INT.COV C.G.R F.L Average 0.639 0.356 0.524 0.474 0.913 1.274 13.345 2.245 1.242 NW LT Source: Compiled &calculated fromFUND Annual reports of HPCL ( 2005 -2014 ) 2005 0.81 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.88 0.48 3.27 1.22 1.44 2006 1.05 0.51 0.48 0.52 1.04 0.51 3.95 0.95 1.34 2007 1.29 0.56 0.44 0.56 1.1 0.48 2.77 0.77 1.57 2008 1.25 0.5 0.41 0.59 1.23 0.55 3.98 0.8 1.34 2009 0.77 0.39 0.51 0.49 1.14 0.65 12. 04 1.3 1.09 2010 0.53 0.31 0.58 0.42 0.96 0.64 22.39 1.89 1.05 2011 0.67 0.36 0.55 0.45 0.9 0.54 11.21 1.5 1.1 2012 0.9 0.44 0.49 0.51 0.85 0.45 7.56 1.11 1.15 2013 0.78 0.4 0.52 0.48 0.96 0.54 7.97 1.29 1.14 2014 0.86 0.43 0. 50 0.5 0.8 0.43 7.52 1.16 1.15 Average 0.891 0.435 0.5453 0.497 0.986 0.527 7.062 1.199 1.237 Source: Compiled &calculated from Annual reports of IOCL (2005 -2014)

181 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table 5 Analysis of Capital Structure of HPCL (Rs in crores) Share capital Reserve & funds Loan funds Total Year Amount % Amount % Amount % Amount 2005 226 3.5 4812 74.82 1394 21.68 6132 2006 339 3.90 5433 62.64 2902 66.54 8674 2007 339 3.36 6148 61.13 3570 35.51 10057 2008 339 3.73 5559 61.29 3172 34.98 9070 2009 339 4.21 6340 78.81 1366 16.98 8045 2010 339 3.59 7404 78.40 1701 18.01 9444 2011 339 3.19 8102 76.25 2185 20.56 10626 2012 339 2.20 8397 54.53 6664 43.27 15400 2013 339 1.69 9260 46.03 10518 52.28 20117 2014 340 1.24 10224 37.38 16787 61.38 27351 Source: Compiled and calculated from Annual Report of HPCL (2005-2014)

182 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table 6 Analysis of Capital Structure of IOCL (Rs in crores) Share capital Reserve & funds Loan funds Total Year Amount % Amount % Amount % Amount 2005 389 1.74 11879 53.19 10062 45.07 22330 2006 779 2.70 13286 46.16 14718 51.14 28783 2007 779 2.13 15192 41.50 20635 56.37 36606 2008 779 2.27 14532 42..27 19070 55.46 34381 2009 779 2.33 18149 54.30 14495 43.37. 33423 2010 1168 3.32 21879 52.11 12178 44.57 35225 2011 1168 2.70 24817 57.30 17320 40.00 43305 2012 1168 2.10 28135 5.50 26404 47.40 55707 2013 1168 1.88 33665 54.37 27083 43.75 61916 2014 1192 1.55 39894 52.07 35523 46.38 76609 Source: Compiled and calculated from Annual Report of IOCL (2005-2014)

Table 7 Analysis of Capital Structure of BPCL (Rs in crores) Share capital Reserve & funds Loan funds Year C.E Amount % Amount % Amount % 2005 150 3.20 2872.8 61.25 1667.2 35.55 4690.0 2006 150 2.46 3344.7 54.95 2592.7 42.59 6087.4 2007 300 3.64 3779.4 45.88 4158.1 50.48 8237.5 2008 300 3.82 3697.4 47.12 3848.7 49.06 7846.1 2009 300 3.80 3708.1 46.90 3898.2 49.30 7906.3 2010 300 3.51 5549.7 65.00 2689.7 31.49 8539.4 2011 300 2.92 6088.4 59.28 3881.7 37.80 10270.1 2012 361.5 2.06 8777.9 50.12 8373.6 47.82 17513.0 2013 361.5 1.71 9912.0 46.97 10829.3 51.32 21102.8 2014 361.5 1.35 11315.3 42.38 15022.4 56.27 26699.2 Source: Compiled and calculated from Annual Report of BPCL (2005-2014) Abbreviations D/E: Debt equity ratio, FD/TC: funded debt to total capitalization, P/R: Proprietary Ratio, S/R Solvency ratio, FA/ NW: Fixed assets to net worth ratio, FA/ LT fixed assets to long term fund, INT.COV: Interest coverage ratio: C.G.R: Capital Gearing ratio, F.L: financial leverage, C.E: Capital employed.

183 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

ROLE OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN THE EMERGING RETAIL SECTOR

Rijila P.T. Research Scholar, Department of Commerce, University of Kerala [email protected]

Dr. K.S Suresh Kumar Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce, University of Kerala. [email protected]

ABSTRACT The retail industry in India is the second largest employer with an estimated 40 million people engaged by the industry. After FDI policy, the opportunity of employment could be tremendous and major players would look for people with the right skills. In today’s competitive world in order to stand in the market every organization wants to satisfy their customers. As the retail organizations have direct link between the manufacturers and consumers, Organizations should employ right person for the right job. Only through the employees an organization can interact with its consumers. That’s why human resources are treated as the assets of the company. The present paper gives importance to identify the role and importance, challenges faced by HR in the retail sector, and also provides various remedial suggestions for improving the HR related problems in the retail organizations in India. Keywords: Retail Sector, Human Resource Management, Importance , Challenges

INTRODUCTION Human resources management is mainly concerned with people at work and with their relationship within the organization. Human resources can be treated as an asset like any other natural resources used for the development of the organization. Human resource management (HRM) practices are most effective when matched with strategic goals of organizations. HRM’s role in the company’s success is growing rapidly with the growth in many sectors in the present globalized era. Innovative HRM practices can play a crucial role in changing the attitude of the companies and its employees in order to facilitate the entry and growth in the markets. The HRM practices in service sector especially in the area of retailing have found significant importance in

184 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 the present scenario. The retailing is one of the service sectors where the need of qualitative human resources is highly expected. Retailing is an important element of business around the globe. Retailing consists of all activities that result in the offering for sale of merchandise to consumers for their own use. Objectives • To know the role and importance of human resources management in the retail sector • To identify the challenges faced by HR in the retail sector. • To understand what are the innovative human resource practices undertaken in the retail sector. Research Methodology: The methodology used for the study is descriptive one based on secondary data collected from books, Journals, thesis, Magazines, news paper, and various websites. Retail Industry in India an Overview Retail sector is one of the growing sector of our economy. Retailing contributes about 15% of India ‘s gross domestic product (GDP) and 8% of employment (Patibandla 2012). The size of India’s retail sector is currently estimated at around $450 billion and organized retail accounts for around 5% of the total market share. The sector is the largest source of employment after agriculture, and has deep penetration into rural India generating more than 10 per cent of India’s GDP. Indian retail sector is mainly classified into organized and unorganized retail sectors. Retail sector in India shows an unprecedented growth than ever because of the arrival of hypermarkets, supermarkets and various shopping malls. HRM in retailing Retail is one of the fast growing sectors in India and it provide a large number of employment opportunities. According to Edwin Flippo HRM is defined as “human resources management as ‘the planning, organizing, directing and controlling of the procurement, development, compensation integration, maintenance and reproduction of human resources to the end that individual, organizational and societal objectives are accomplished.” Human Resource Management activities are broadly classified into four categories. In order to expand the retail sector a huge number of employees are required, the HR department is focusing on recruiting and getting people on the floor on time. Due to unprecedented growth the sector is witnessing plenty of attractive job opportunities are opening, especially for front line sales. Human resources are needed in almost all aspects of activities in the retail sector like buying, inventory management, marketing, accounting, selling, training, packaging and finally dealing with the customers. If the human resources are not managed or coordinated effectively, adverse effects on all these functions can be noticeable. This will affect the firm’s image, turnover and profits, and also reduce goodwill, which is important for maintaining and increasing the retailing firm’s market share. HRM helps retailing to prove its ability, to stand efficiently before consumers, to create profitability, to provide better services, to help the economy to grow instantly, to improve the workforce and to be part of success of the organizations. Retailing Industry today is in the challenging mode. Being a labor intensive industry sector, workforce management has emerged as the single biggest task for human resources managers. Retail Companies are being challenged to 185 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 reorganize and adapt their employees to become more efficient. Role and importance of HRM in the retail sector Human resource management is important in retailing because employees play a major role in performing its critical business functions. In manufacturing firms, capital equipment (machinery, computer systems, robotics, etc.) often is used to perform the jobs employees once did. But retailing and other service businesses remain labor intensive. Retailers still rely on people to perform the basic retailing activities, such as buying and displaying merchandise and providing service to customers. HRM helps the retail organizations in gaining competitive advantage because of three reasons. First, labor costs account for a significant percentage of a retailer’s total expenses. Thus, the effective management of employees can produce a cost advantage. Second, the experience that most customers have with a retailer is determined by the activities of employees who select merchandise; provide information and assistance, and stock displays and shelves. Thus, employees can play a major role in differentiating a retailer’s offering from its competitor’s. Third, these potential advantages are difficult for competitors to duplicate Major Challenges faced by HR in the retail sector Human resources are the backbone of every organization. The success of retail business depends a lot upon the kind of human resource strategies it is following and how people employed in the retail organizations are managed. Because of increasing competition between organized retailers, the human resources employed in the retail industry are facing a number of challenges and hurdles. The major challenges faced by human resources working in the retail sector are as follows: (1). Stressful working environment: Employees working in the retail sector often find themselves in stress and burnout due to customer centric nature of the industry and employees are always expected to be on their toes to keep customers happy. (2). Long working Hours: In most of the cases employees are required to work for 10hours a day, six days a week, work on weekends, holidays and festive days. (3). Poor salary: The salary received by the employees working in the retail sector are very low. In Most of the organizations the salary ranges from Three thousand to five thousand only. (4). Less chance for promotion: Retail jobs are also not career builders in the short run. Not many of the front lines can grow to become departmental /stores head . (5). Lack of job security: When the competition is increasing day by day the organizations need more competent work force. So that is a big threat for the employees having less skills. Innovative HR practices After seeing the challenges faced by the employees in the retail sector some organizations have initiated measures to attract, motivate and retain talent. Nowadays most of the retail organizations provide to their employees a chance for promotion in accordance with the working experience. In-house training centers and capability development practices are used by many retailers as a drive to upgrade and progress the employees in their respective careers. Such internal training

186 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 academy helps employees in developing skills continuously and serves as a tool to manage their talent and skill sets needed. A lot of emphasis is placed on development of internal talent pool via development centers and assessment centers. Special emphasis is given on training newly recruited candidates. Companies have also started designing the strong rewards & recognition programs according to needs of different sections of the store and coming up with competitive incentive schemes. Retailers are doing much more to retain their existing talent for creating performance driven culture. Some of the initiatives include strong communication programs, annual employee engagement surveys, town halls held every quarter, clearly articulated values, transparent feedback mechanism, strong induction program, and incentive & promotion based on performance. Store locality and sales target play have strong impact on performance of an employee. Retailers are identifying low sales stores and are setting fixed sales target for the quarter. Entire retail set up works towards achieving the target instead of just that store’s employees. This has helped creating a team spirit and a feeling of collective responsibility among employees. CONCLUSION The success of the retail sector in today’s competitive world depends to a great extend upon the performance of the human resources employed in it. The Human resources practices are crucial for the growth and development of the retail sector. The retailers especially in the case of organized retailers are nowadays gives more importance on the HRM practices which includes recruitment, selection, performance appraisal, training and development, compensation, career planning etc. Successful implementation of HRM practices is crucial to the success of an organization in this era of globalization and service acceleration through competency and self development of employees at all levels.HRM practices in the retail industry needs greater attention in the near future to make it more competitive. References Books • David Gilbert “Retail marketing Management”,Pearson Publication, Prentice Hall,New Delhi. • Patrick M.Dunne,Robert F. Lusch, David A. Griffith, “Retailing”Thomson Asia Pvt.Ltd. • Tapomoy Deb, “Human Resource Development Theory and practice” Ane books India. Journals • Maheswara Reddy.D, Suresh Chandra C.H, “human resource management practices in organized retailing - a study of select retailers” international journal of multidisciplinary research Vol.1 Issue 8, December 2011, ISSN 2231 5780. • Bhaskar.Nalla,Varalaxmi.P, “human resource management practices in Organized retailing – a study of select retailers” Research paper IJBARR, ISSN No. 2347 – 856X. • Amarja Satish Nargunde, “Role of hr in retail sector in India” International Journal of Management, Volume 4, Issue 6, November - December (2013) Websites • http://www.ibef.in/industry/Retail.aspx • http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Retailing_in_india • www.deloitte.com/assets/Dcom-

187 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

RURAL WOMEN EMPOWERMENT THROUGH SELF HELP GROUPS IN CALICUT DISTRICT

Shiji. P Assistant professor on Contract, (Department of Business Administration) Providence Womens College, Calicut, Kerala e.mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT The empowerment of women is crucial for the development of the country. Bringing women into the main stream of development is major concern for the Government of India. Women’s empowerment is critical to the socio economic progress of the community and bringing women into the main stream of the national development has, therefore, been a major concern of the Government. Self Help Groups are becoming one of the important means for the empowerment of poor men in almost all the developing countries including India. Kerala is no exception as regards the role played by women collectives known by different names for emancipation and empowerment of poor women. The NGO’s who are in the field of socio economic development of the marginalized sections in the society for last four to five decades, had initially organized credit unions and Mahilasamajams for better participation of people in development initiatives and also for thrift and credit facilities. Since the emergence of SHG System, as per the initiatives of National Bank for Agriculture and Rural development(NABARD), and directives from RBI from the beginning of the 1990’s, most of these Mahilasamajams and credit unions have been converted into SHGs, linked them to financial institutions for better credit facilities. In Kerala since the middle of 1990’s, the State Government also took initiatives in organizing urban poor women into neighbourhood Groups (NHG’s). These NHGS are recognized as SHGs by NABARD, as far as SHG bank linkage and credit facilities are concerned. Women Self Help Groups, formed exclusively for rural women being an effective medium for community involvement in developmental activities, can be a powerful tool for alleviating rural poverty through the empowerment of women by freeing themselves from the clutches of moneylenders. Hence the present study attempts to assess the role of SHGs in improving the socio economic status of the rural women and to study the level of empowerment achieved by rural women through their participation in SHGs.

INTRODUCTION The role of woman in economic development is most intimately related to the goal of comprehensive socio economic development and is a strategic question for the development of all societies. Any development strategy which neglects the need for enhancing the role of woman

188 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 cannot lead to comprehensive socio economic development. Exposure and interactions with the outside world are instrumental in determining the possibilities available to women in daily life. The situation of women is affected by the degree of their autonomy or capacity to make decisions both inside and outside their own household. Indian Constitution in its fundamental rights has provisions for equality, social justice and protection of women. These goals are yet to be realized. Women continued to be discriminated, exploited and exposed to inequalities at various levels. So the concept of empowerment as a goal of development projects and programmes has been gaining wider acceptance. By women empowerment would be able to develop self esteem, confidence, realize their potential and enhance their collective bargaining power. Women’s empowerment can be viewed as a continuum of several interrelated and mutually reinforcing components. They are: Awareness building about women situation, discrimination and rights and opportunities as a step towards gender equality. Collective awareness building provides a sense of group identity and the power of working as a group. Capacity building and skill development, especially the ability to plan make decisions, organize, manage and carryout activities to deal with people and institutions in the world around them. Participation and greater control and decision making power in the home, community and society. Actions to bring about greater equality between men and women. Thus empowerment is a process of awareness and capacity building leading to greater participation, greater decision making power and control. The empowerment of women strengthen their innate ability through acquiring knowledge, power and experience. SHGs can act as empowerment resource centres for the women members, percolating the benefits to the society in general. Social evils like alcoholism, domestic violence against women and children abuse and exploitation, gender bias and social exclusion are some of the areas against which members can effectively organize and compact. The concept of SHGs was envisaged with the intent of using its potent as a powerful tool for rural poverty alleviation through rural women empowerment. It is to be specified that women empowerment was not sole motive. Statement of the problem Self-help groups (SHGs) or thrift and credit groups are mostly informal groups whose members pool savings and re-lend within the group on rotational or needs basis. These groups have a common perception of need and impulse towards collective action. Many of these groups got formed around specific production activity, promoted savings among members and use the pooled resources to meet emergent needs of members, including consumption needs. Women self help groups, formed exclusively for rural women, being an effective medium for community involvement in developmental activities, can be a powerful tool for alleviating rural poverty through the empowerment of women, by freeing themselves from the clutches of moneylenders. Hence the present study attempts to assess the role of self help groups in improving the socio-economic status of the rural women in Kerala and to study the level of empowerment achieved by rural women in Kerala through their participation in SHGs. The implementation of self employment programmes assumes due relevance. It is specifically against this setting that the present study was undertaken to critically evaluate the role-played by the SHGs in imparting social, economic, financial and personal empowerment to the rural women of Calicut.

189 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Objectives of the study The present study was undertaken with the following objectives: 1. To identify the level of personal, social, economic and financial empowerment achieved by the members of SHGs. 2. To identify the nature and extent of group-related and personal problems faced by the members of SHGs. Methodology of the study Exploratory research design is used for the study. The study was undertaken during the period of June 2013 to June 2014. Population for the study constitutes the women folk in one of the rural areas of Calicut district in Kerala, who are the members of self help groups. The sample respondents were selected by using convenience sampling technique. 10 self help groups were finally selected, on convenience sampling basis, as final sample groups. Sources of data The study predominantly depends on primary data. The data were collected from the sample of 100 members of 5 SHGs located within three villages of Parambil Bazar Village of Calicut District in Kerala. Tools for collection of data Primary data were collected by employing a structured interview schedule. Besides this, participative observation, and direct personal discussions were conducted with the members of various SHGs, in order to get a clearer picture of the real situation. Need and Significance of the Study Women participation in entrepreneurial activities is growing rapidly. It is evident that 50 percent of world populations do the 2/3 of world work hours receive 10 percent of world income and own less than 1 percent of the world property (ILO Report 1980). Women owned business are becoming increasingly important in the economies of almost all countries. To the U.S economy they contribute more than $250 million annually and create new business opportunities at 2 to 3 times the rate of their male counterparts. Similarly in India, women constitute nearly 50 percent of national population and a very important human resource for the nation’s development over the last few decades; women have come forward to establish their own enterprises. The development of women entrepreneurship, political and social empowerment of women is essential for reducing unemployment in the rural areas in India. The 1990s saw a proliferation of women SHG across India, particularly in the south. Without land or paid employment, many of the world’s poor turn to self employed activities to generate income. The poor are faced with the challenge of acquiring credit to take loans to engage in various productive activities, without necessary collateral (e.g. land) required by formal lending institutions. Micro credit institutions have become increasingly popular as a way to mobilize poor communities through the provision of loans through specialized financial institutions. Small groups are formed and loans are allocated to members based on group solidarity instead of formal collateral. Micro credit schemes through SHGs have been particularly targeted towards poor women, who are often discriminated against not only by institutions but also with their own households. The provision of loans to women may then serve the dual goals of 190 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 increasing household wealth and empowering females. So study about SHGs in the one of the rural areas of Calicut district assumes significance. The study is beneficial to a large number of rural people in Kerala. It also benefits the government to increase assistance to SHGs in Kerala and ultimately lead to the development of the state of Kerala. Analysis of Personal, Social, Economic And Financial Empowerment Personal empowerment of members Independence and acceptance among relatives/family was the personal empowerment attributes which was reported with highest level of empowerment (Table1). All other attributes like Self respect and mutual respect are also recorded high level of empowerment. The sense of achievement among the members in undertaking some activities related to the groups were evident. For instance, weekly deposits and personal loans taken from the group corpus necessitate weekly calculation of interest rates, which can be a demand for a rural woman. . Though the time taken for such calculations can gobble up substantial part of the meeting time, the sense of achievement and elation that the members - treasurer in particular – feel at the end is worth acknowledgement. To a larger extent, it has to be acknowledged that the society has come to accept the women’s organized movement as a part of the social establishment. When week-end evening meetings of the group is convened in any member’s home, the other family members – particularly male members – do show up very little resentment over the inconveniences so caused.

Table: 1 Personal Empowerment Personal Empowerment Level of personal empowerment Attribute Very high High Moderate Low Very low Confidence 12 24 36 20 8 Self respect 48 24 16 12 0 Independence 56 20 16 8 0 Mutual respect 24 48 12 16 0 Family respect 50 40 10 0 0 Relative acceptance 50 26 15 9 0 Average 40 30 18 11 1 Source: primary data

Social Empowerment of Members Rural women were generally found to be least participative in social programmes. Awareness on rights / social problems still was very low. Not limiting itself to the conduct of formalities of meetings and activities, the groups are expected to provide a very effective platform for women to discuss among themselves, their problems, solutions and aspirations. In many cases, it was found that the members themselves felt that the group meetings were proving to be vain grounds for empowering them form a social perspective. For instance, many members confided that they never discussed issues like dowry, alcoholism etc. within the group, though they personally felt the impressions of these vices in life is very marked and indelible. The group activities were found to be effective at low levels in spheres that were very closely tied to such activities – capacity to organizing activities, group cohesiveness, interactions and public speaking. This readily

191 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 points out to the fact that social empowerment (Table2) is an area where these groups and its activities poorly cater to. Members reported very low levels of participation in social programmes. There were reports of members involved in more than one group.

Table: 2 Social Empowerment Social Empowerment Attribute Level of social empowerment Very high High Moderate Low Very low Organisational skill 0 4 24 56 16 Group Cohesiveness 0 8 32 48 12 Interactive Skills 4 4 60 28 4 Public Speaking 0 4 16 12 68 Awareness On Rights And Social 0 8 16 32 44 Issues Acceptance In Society 0 2 12 56 30 Awareness On Social Problems 0 4 32 24 40 Participation In Social Problems 0 12 20 12 56 Membership In Other Organisations 0 20 36 12 32 Average 0 7 27 32 34 Source: primary data

Economic Empowerment of members There have been extensive discussions by experts and theorists on the potential of SHGs in creating employment opportunities to the members directly or indirectly.Groups that undertake commercial activities can provided direct employment, whereas others can create employment opportunities by providing some training on technical or entrepreneurial skills. On aspects of creating employment opportunities for the members, or in providing enhancements in technical or entrepreneurial skills, it was found that the groups are really empowered. Majority of them felt improvements in their employment opportunities and skills. Improvement in health was one area in which nearly high level of empowerment was achieved Table 3. In rural areas, primary health centres [PHCs] play a very vital role in catering to the basic health requirements of the society. In the wake of the Chikun Gunia [a disease found in rural coastal areas of Kerala] and its aftermath, significance of these centers have increased. Rural medical camps and awareness programmes conducted are usually well attended by the rural women folk. Often, SHGs act as facilitators for such programmes. It can be a reason for the reported empowerment in individual/family health. Economic empowerment results in women’s ability to influence or make decision, increased self confidence, better status and role in household etc. Micro finance is necessary to overcome exploitation, create confidence for economic self reliance of the rural poor, particularly among rural women who are mostly invisible in the social structure. Financial empowerment of members Nearly half of the members reported high levels of empowerment in income levels (Table 4) whereas it was by moderate improvement in savings. The only direct reason for reduced capacity for savings is seen to be higher level of increase in expenditure. Use of mobile phones was frequent. Many of the members admitted that their expenditures on mobile phones had gone

192 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table: 3 Economic Empowerment Economic Empowerment Attribute Level of Economic Empowerment Very high High Moderate Low Very low Employment Opportunity 50 20 10 12 8 Technical Skill 58 21 11 7 3 Entrepreneurial Skill 55 25 14 4 2 Individual/Family Health 52 22 16 5 5 Living Conditions 50 28 12 5 5 Economic Status 52 25 18 5 0 Social Security 48 36 10 3 3 Average 52 25 13 6 4 Source: primary data up considerably. Invariably, level of empowerment in financial management skills was very high. Personal belongings, represented good improvement. It is also been proved that the rural women had enrich themselves with a feeling of financial security through their association with SHGs.

Table: 4 Financial Empowerment Financial Empowerment Level of Financial Empowerment Attribute Very high High Moderate Low Very low Income 45 24 18 11 8 Saving 40 23 12 15 3 Expenditure 52 22 16 5 2 Financial management 55 25 14 4 5 Personal belongings 58 21 11 7 10 Financial security 50 20 10 12 2 Average 50 23 14 9 5

Source: primary data Group-related problems faced by members Various problems related to group was evaluated for existence. Barriers in activities, drop-outs, conflicts, non-transparency etc. can be examples. Group-related problems were reported to be low (Table 5). Among the problems that were existent, conflicts between members and absenteeism from meetings were reported by nearly 15% members. Irregular meetings, improper records, non-accessibility to records, no internal audit and pressure groups were testified at low level of existence. Personal problems faced by members Personal problems, in addition to group-related ones, faced by the SHG members were enquired into for existence Table 6. Family and job responsibilities can cause difficulties for active participation in group activities. Low levels of motivation and family support can also act as a restriction. Low economic status and poor benefits form group can avoid members from reaping the benefits of being in the group. Family responsibilities proved to be the major difficulty faced by the members in their group activities. Job responsibilities do not cause difficulties, due to the fact that majority are unemployed. Low economic status and low motivation were opined to be causing moderate problems. One very important reason faced as difficulty was low family support. Among

193 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table: 5 Group Related Problems Group related problems attribute Level of Group related problems Very high High Moderate Low Very low Non sustainability of future 0 2 0 3 95 activities Entry barriers 0 2 0 1 97 Operational barriers 1 2 0 2 95 Drop outs 0 6 1 0 93 Conflicts in group 2 14 1 1 82 absenteeism 1 14 3 2 80 Irregular meetings 0 1 0 28 71 Improper records 0 1 0 29 70 Non acceccability 0 1 2 24 73 No internal Audit 0 3 1 20 76 Pressure group 0 1 2 22 75 Non-transparent activities 0 0 3 16 81 Average 0 4 1 12 82 Source: primary data

Table: 6 Personal Problems Personal problems faced Personal problems faced Very high High Moderate Low Very low Family responsibilities 80 16 4 0 0 Job responsibilities 4 4 4 20 68 Low economic status 8 8 56 14 14 Low motivation 0 8 80 12 0 Lack of family support 10 28 48 14 0 Low benefits from group 4 8 24 44 20 Low general knowledge 0 4 20 20 56 Average 15 11 34 18 23 Source: primary data the respondents, a tall proportion of 38% experienced high/very high levels of poor family support. An overall perusal of problems faced by group members reveal that conflicts among members, absenteeism, family responsibilities and lack of family support were the major ones that can potentially impede the attainment of group objectives. Major findings Independence and accept among relatives/family were the personal empowerment attributes which was reported with highest level of empowerment. All other attributes like self respect and mutual respect also recorded high level of empowerment. The group activities were found to be effective at low levels in spheres that were very closely tied to such activities – capacity to organizing activities, group cohesiveness, interactions and public speaking. This readily points out to the fact that social empowerment is an area where these groups and its activities poorly caters to. Members reported very low levels of participation in social programmes. Very minimal number of members felt improvements in their employment opportunities and skills. 194 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Improvement in health was one area in which nearly high level of empowerment was achieved. Nearly three-fourth of the members reported moderate levels of empowerment in income levels whereas it was almost nearly offset by low improvement in savings. The only direct reason for reduced capacity for savings is seen to be higher level of increase in expenditure. Major among the problems faced were found to be absenteeism and conflicts among members. There existed few instances of drop-outs and lack of internal audit. There was a case reported of a SHG, which had to be wound up, on reasons of conflicts among the members and the resultant absenteeism and drop-outs. Family-related responsibilities were found to be most prevalent among the personal problems faced by the members. Next in importance was lack of family support. Though the male members in the family had ceased to be resistive towards their women folk being part of SHGs, they were never proactively supportive. Low economic status and low motivation along with low benefits from the group proved to be important problems. There is the need for the basic nature of SHG and its related activities for a re-think. It is time to realize where things have gone wrong, or if not, where things were not so right. Suggestions i. Intellectual empowerment is to be considered more important, or at least equally important to social, economic or financial empowerment so as that the members become more capacitated to think and act better – from blunt in thinking to sharp; and from thick in action to fine. ii. Self employed respondents were found more in Kudumbasree. This clearly indicates that the Kudumbasree was giving greater importance and support to its members for self- employment. iii. The absence of savings habit in the younger members, and the general dependence on informal savings methods are alarming, members younger members in particular, need to be taught on the importance of financial security. iv. Measures can be adopted to impart technical/professional training to members to enhance skills which can generate employment. Though it can be expensive, assistance of local authorities, professional/technical educational institutions etc. can be approached for assistance. v. Social activities of the groups are found to be very scanty. It is highly imperative that groups initiate participation in social activities more actively. SHGs can gain immensely by becoming a stakeholder in the society. vi. On an average 44% of the respondents had less awareness on legal rights relating to women and children. It clearly indicates that even the poor women in Kerala are not informed of their rights and duties. vii. Commercial activities undertaken by the groups in general are found to be very narrow. Typical marketing and processing activities are pursued. SHGs should think of looking at broader types of activities. viii. Lack of family support is still evidenced as a problem faced by members. The group by itself can collude the efforts of the members in coordinating activities aimed at ensuring better support from family members. 195 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 ix. However, majority of the respondents opined that there was no change in the attitude of men in helping women in their household work. This indicates that the women still were not able to influence men in sharing their daily household works and the need for sensitizing men in this aspect remains. CONCLUSION Empowerment of women has emerged as an important issue in our country. In India nearly half of the population consists of women and their work participation rate is less than half of men. But in Kerala more than half of the population is women. Role of women in the development of nation is very important nowadays. So women should be respected both in the society as well as in the family. To Increase the status of women, they must be empowered economically. It is evident from the study that SHGs has been playing a vital role in the empowerment of women. This is an important platform to improve the life of women on various social, political and economic aspects. The number of women inclined towards SHG is increasing which implies that women are aspiring for empowerment. It was found that the SHGs are helping in the economic empowerment of its members. Thus, we can conclude that the SHGs in Calicut District have not yet run its full course in attaining its objective of rural women empowerment. Further efforts in refining group characteristics and realigning group objectives can ensure furtherance of effectiveness of SHGs in transforming rural women into more powerful and efficient. References 1. Credit Union Promotion Committee. (1985). “Manuel for Credit Unions Organisers and Workers - New Delhi. 2. Economic Review. (2001).”Government of Kerala”. State Planning Board. Thiruvananthapuram. 3. Fernandez, A. P. (1995). “Self Help Groups - the Concept and theProcesses”. Paper Presented at the International Seminar on Development of Rural Poor through Self Help Groups”. (eds). Mumbai. NABARD. 4. Karl, Marilee. (1995). Women and Empowerment,ParticipationandDecisionMaking. London. Zed Books. 5. Sakuntala N (2005). Empowering Women: An Alternative Strategy from Rural India, Sage Publications, New Delhi. pp. 24-34. 6. Sudha N (2008). Women s Empowerment in South Asia, Navayug Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. pp. 63-67. 7. Susanta KP, Manas RP, Rama KD, Subash CM (2007). WSHG: A Vehicle for Women Self Reliance, Retrieved from www.iceg.net/2007/books on 30 June 2009.

196 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

MICRO SMALL AND MEDIUM ENTERPRISES – ISSUES AND CHALLENGES

Aneesha P. Chellappan Research Scholar, Department of Commerce, University of Kerala, Trivandrum, e-mail: [email protected]

Dr. K.S. Suresh Kumar Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce, University of Kerala, Trivandrum, e-mail: [email protected]

ABSTRACT The MSME sector acts as a nursery of entrepreneurship and encourages the creativity and innovation of the individual. The distinguishing characteristics of the MSME sector in India is its size, range of products and services produces and levels of technology employed. The sector have shown constant growth rate in recent years as compared to the large scale corporate sector. It shows a growth rate of 12% till 2010-11, 19% in 2011-12 and 14% in 2012-13. This sector contributes 30% of the country’s GDP in the service sector. MSMEs have been globally considered as the engine of economic growth and as key instruments for promoting equitable development. It represents more than 90 percent of total enterprises in most of the economies and is credited with generating the highest rates of employment growth and account for a major share of industrial production and exports. The present study tries to understand the importance of MSMEs and the major issues and challenges faced by this sector. Key words: MSMEs, National Manufacturing Policy, Entrepreneurship Development, Foreign Direct Investment.

INTRODUCTION Micro small and medium enterprises (MSMEs) have been treated as the engine of economic growth and development. The MSME sector acts as a nursery of entrepreneurship and encourages the creativity and innovation of the individual. The distinguishing characteristics of the MSME sector in India is its size, range of products and services produces and levels of technology employed. The sector have shown constant growth rate in recent years as compared to the large scale corporate sector. It shows a growth rate of 12% till 2010-11, 19% in 2011-12 and 14% in 2012-13. This sector contributes 30% of the country’s GDP in the service sector.

197 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

In Kerala MSME plays an important role to the socio-economic development of the state and the Kerala Government adopted a proactive approach to meet the challenges in the sector. It is a major income generating and employment providing sector with relatively low level of capital and also help in industrialization rural and backward areas, aiming various social groups like, women, SC/ST, youth, physically handicapped etc. So it reduces social and regional imbalances, assuring more equitable distribution of income and wealth. Objectives of the study 1. To understand the relevance of micro small and medium enterprises. 2. To identify the issues and challenges of micro small and medium enterprises. Methodology The present study is based on Secondary data. The secondary data were collected from various books and journals, annual reports of MSMEs & state planning board and web sites. MSMEs in India MSME sector consists of any enterprises, whether proprietorship, association of persons, Hindu Undivided Family, cooperative society, partnership or undertaking or any other legal entity, by whatever name called, engaged in production of goods pertaining to any industry specified in the first schedule of Industry Development and Regulation Act,1951 and other enterprises engaged in production and rendering services, subject to limiting factor of investment in plant and machinery and equipment. MSME is defined under Micro Small and Medium Enterprises Development Act, 2006 is: I. Manufacturing sector Under this sector, an enterprise is classified as: a) Micro enterprise, if investment in plant and machinery does not exceed twenty five lakh rupees; b) Small enterprise, if investment in plant and machinery is more than twenty five lakh rupees but does not exceed five crore rupees; or c) Medium enterprise, if investment in plant and machinery is more than five crore rupees but does not exceed ten crore rupees. II. Service sector The enterprise is engaged in providing or rendering of services, it is classified as: a) Micro enterprise, if investment in equipment does not exceed ten lakh rupees; b) Small enterprise, if investment in equipment is more than ten lakh rupees but does not exceed two crore rupees; or c) Medium enterprise, if investment in equipment is more than two crore rupees but does not exceed five crore rupees. MSMEs have been globally considered as the engine of economic growth and as key instruments for promoting equitable development. It represents more than 90 percent of total enterprises in most of the economies and is credited with generating the highest rates of employment

198 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 growth and account for a major share of industrial production and exports. The growth rate of MSME in India are increasing every year shows the relevance of micro and small units as per annual report of MSME (Table 1). Generally MSMEs are labour intensive; employment generation always follows the increase in the number of units. It generate employment about 6 crore persons spread over 2.6 crore enterprises and the labour intensity in the MSME sector is estimated to be approximately four times higher than the large enterprises. 45 percent of the total manufacturing output is contributed by MSMEs and around 50 percent of the total industrial production is constituted by MSMEs.

Table 1 - All India Annual Growth Rates of MSMEs Year Growth Rates 2007-08 to 2008-09 11.83 2008-09 to 2009-10 10.45 2009-10 to 2010-11 12.23 2010-11 to 2011-12 18.64 2011- 12 to 2012-13 13.89 Source: MSME Annual Report The major industries coming under MSME are: • Handicrafts • Food processing industry • Handloom • Garment making and textile industries • Industries related to coir, bamboo, wood, plastic, rubber, leather, clay products etc. Problems faced by MSME sector MSME sector play a critical role in innovation and the sector have the ability to experiment with new technologies on small scales, though they often suffer some problems. They are: 1. Lack of entrepreneurial spirit 2. Absence of adequate and timely banking finance 3. Limited capital and knowledge 4. Non-availability of suitable technology 5. Inability to take technology developments risks 6. Low production capacity 7. Identification of new markets 8. Ineffective marketing strategy 9. Difficulty of attracting skilled manpower at affordable cost 10. Lack of follow up with various government institutions.

199 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Challenges of MSME sector National manufacturing policy (NMP) The policy is framed by government of India which aims to achieve inclusive growth of the economy of our country. For the help of various policy instruments like creation of national investment and manufacturing zones, rationalization or simplification of business regulation, provision of exit mechanisms for sick units, creation of financial and institutional mechanisms for technology development, implementing industrial training and skill up gradation measures, providing incentives for Small and Medium Enterprises. The NMP aims at achieving the following objectives: 1. To increase the share of manufacturing in GDP to twenty five percent by 2022; 2. Ensure sustainable growth and development especially with regard to the environment including energy efficiency, restoration of damaged or degraded eco-system and optimal utilization of natural resources; 3. Create 100 million additional jobs by 2022; 4. Enhance domestic value addition and technological depth in the manufacturing sector; 5. Creation of appropriate skill sets among the rural migrant and urban poor to make growth inclusive; and 6. Increase global competitiveness of Indian manufacturing through appropriate policy support. Foreign Direct Investment and Retailing The emergence of retail sector is likely to have significant implications on the prospects of the MSME sector. The draft policy visualizes a retail policy insisting on 30 percent procurement from small enterprises. There is a need for subsector analysis of the opportunities and constraints, in order to arrive at reasonable policies. Consumer tastes and demand patterns have been fast changing all over the country both rural and urban areas. This is likely to lead a progressive decline of the manufacturing share of MSME units, as against services. Though manufacturing need to be promoted through policy initiatives, it is necessary to initiate serious efforts towards improving the quality of services. If the MSMEs fail out in this regard, multi-brand retailing would work against the interests of MSMEs. Challenges of entrepreneurship development There is no doubt to say that public policy encouraged entrepreneurship, particularly in a context of economic slows down would involve a phenomenon of pseudo entrepreneurship. The overall policy environment and developments in the economy would seriously affect business start ups, rather than existing businesses. The special provisions of the national manufacturing policy, such as incentives for capital gains re-investments and venture capital, can by no means help to improve the situation. An approach focused on entrepreneurship resource development, rather than support to growth, can yield better results of a sizable nature. Remember that generating confidence is the mantra of fighting economic slows down. Skill Gap and shortage of labour India faces the inconsistent situation of unemployment, on the one side and labour shortage on the other. In fact, this shortage need to be related to the particular growth phase of the 200 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016 economy, characterized by enhanced national and international migration. The traditional conceptualization of MSMEs as the breeding ground of skills is fast disappearing. Labour has become so impulsive that the process of skill generation has been seriously delayed, with horrible consequences on the process of development itself. CONCLUSION MSMEs play a very significant role in the socio- economic development of our country. Although the commendable contribution to the development of the nation’s economy MSME does not get the adequate support from the government agencies, financial institutions, corporate and banks. In fact this sector facing a number of problems. There should be an effective follow up mechanism with various government agencies for resolve the problems in this sector. The full potential of MSME sector is yet to be utilized; make use of the full potential of MSMEs through innovative and creative entrepreneurship. References 1. Annual Report of MSME 2012-13, government of India, Ministry of MSMEs 2. Annual Report, State Planning Board, Kerala 2013-14 3. Mathew, P.M. (2012), “The Relevance of MSMEs”, Yojana, Vol.56, Jan, pp 60-63. 4. International Finance Corporation, (2012), Micro Small and Medium Enterprise Finance in India: a Research study on Needs, Gaps and Way Forward; November. http:// msme.gov.in

201 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

A STUDY ON THE IMPACT OF WORKING CONDITION ON JOB SATISFACTTION WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO AUTHORISED CAR DEALERS IN MALAPPURAM DISTRICT

Pramod P. Assistant professor in commerce (FDP substitute), Govt. Arts and Science College Meenchanda, Calicut.

ABSTRACT The significance of the emotional assets is increasing day by day .Each and every movement within the firm has its own impact on the satisfaction level of the employees. But most probably the authorities are not able to realize the factors which affect the emotional level of the employees. By analyzing the collected data from car dealers in Malappuram district, it is found that the management is not able to identify and reward the employees who work hard for the institution.

INTRODUCTION In today’s competitive environment Human resources need more attention than any other assets because they are the emotional assets of the firm. Their values, attitudes, perception and behavior make them to fit to work hard through their entire work life. The working condition may be in the form of medical facility, infrastructure faccilities, recreation facilities, compensation packages; career enhancement e.tc.Job satisfaction is one’s attitude towards job- positive and negative. Management’s should take necessary steps to enhance employee’s job satisfaction by the way of positive work environment, increased morale and providing the resources need to accomplish both individual and organizational objectives. This study made an attempt to identify impact of working condition on job satisfaction of authorized car dealers in Malappuram district. Objectives • To identify the level of job satisfaction in car dealers in Malappuram. • To identify the impact of working condition on job satisfaction of employees. Research Methodology Research design The study is descriptive in nature which is based on both primary as well as secondary data. 202 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Sample design _ Sample size – 50 Sample frame Accounts – 10, HR- 15, SALES -10, SERVICE -15 Sources of data Primary data : Collected from the employees of car dealers in Malappuram district. Secondary data:Journals, newspaper, official records Tools for data collection: Questionnaires and direct interview with the employees

Analysis and Interpretation Table 1- Gender wise classification of Respondents Sl. No. Gender Respondents Percentage 1 Male 30 60 2 Female 20 40 Total 50 100 Inference: Out of the sample size majority of the respondents are male.

Table 2 - Medical Facilities Provided by the employer Response Sl. No. No. of Respondents Percentage Highly satisfied 1 5 10 Satisfied 2 40 80 Neutral 3 5 10 Dissatisfied 4 0 0 Highly dissatisfied 5 0 0 Total 50 100

Inference: Majority of the employees are satisfied with the medical facility provided by the organization

Table 3 - Infrastructure Facilities

Response Sl. No. No. of Respondents Percentage Highly satisfied 1 14 28 Satisfied 2 36 72 Neutral 3 5 10 Dissatisfied 4 0 0 Highly dissatisfied 5 0 0 Total 50 100

Inference : From the above table it is depicts that majority of employees are satisfied with the infrastructure facility and a meager is highly satisfied.

203 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Table 4 - Recreation & Entertainment Facility Response Sl. No. No. of Respondents Percentage Highly satisfied 1 0 0 Satisfied 2 15 30 Neutral 3 35 70 Dissatisfied 4 0 0 Highly dissatisfied 5 0 0 Total 50 100

Inference: Majority of the employees are not yet satisfied with the recreation facilities of the organization.

Table 5 - Reward For Quality Wor k Response Sl. No. No. of Respondents Percentage Satisfied 1 5 10 Average 2 36 72 Neutral 3 9 18 Dissatisfied 4 0 0 Highly dissatisfied 5 0 0 Total 50 100

Inference : The analyzed data in table 6 reveals that management is not able to identify and reward the hard work of the employees. Findings • The working environment and salary are almost satisfactory to their work. • Updating of compensation packages, promotion and recognition packages are the important motivational factors. • Employees are not all satisfied with the personal work accomplishment programmes of the organization. • They are totally unsatisfied about the reward quality reward programmes of the organization. Suggestions • Management tries to introduce proper packages for reward the hard work of employees. • To reduce the mental stress throughout the work life management should introduce recreation programmes, tour programmes etc. • Introduce such compensation packages to motivate them to work hard. • Introduce advanced training and development programmes to update their knowledge and skill. • Build a culture within the organization which makes to treat the employees an emotional asset than a physical asset.

204 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Conclusion By analyzing the data collected from authorized car dealer institutions of Malappuram it is clear that employees are the emotional assets of the organization. Each and every actions are taken within the organization has its own impact on the job attitude of employees. So authorities must introduce such programmes to increase the morale and job satisfaction of employees. Bibliography Human resource management – Aswathappa Organizational Behavior – Mc Shane ,Von Glinow, Sharma

205 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Call For Papers Next Issue : LUX MONTIS Vol.4, No.2, July 2016 Last date for submission of Research Papers : May 15, 2016 Address for Communication : Dr. A. Sebastian Aikara Chief Editor LUX MONTIS Girideepam Institute of Advanced Learning (GIAL) Bethany Hills, Vadavathoor P. O. Kottayam Dist. Kerala Mob: 09447415193 e.mail: [email protected]

206 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

DECLARATION FORM I (See Rule – 3) STATEMENT ABOUT OWNDERSHIP AND OTHER PARTICULARS OF THE JOURNAL 1. Title of the Newspaper Lux Montis 2. Language in which it is published English 3. Place of Publication Kottayam 4. Periodicity of the Publication Bi-annually 5. Printers Name Rev. Dr. Varghese Kaipanaduka (Whether citizen of India? Yes, Indian If foreign, state the country of origin) Address Director Girideepam Institute of Advanced Learning (GIAL) Vadavathoor P.O., Kottayam Dist. 7. Publisher’s Name Rev. Dr. Varghese Kaipanaduka Whether citizen of India? Yes 8. Chief Editor’s Name Dr. A. Sebastian Aikara Whether citizen of India? Yes 9. Name and address of individuals who Girideepam Institute of Advanced Learning (GIAL) own the Newspaper and partners and Vadavathoor P.O., Kottayam Dist. shareholders holding more than one Kerala percent of the total capital

I, Dr. A. Sebastian Aikara, hereby declare that the particulars given above are true.

Kottayam, (Sd/-) 05-12-2015. Dr. A. Sebastian Aikara (Chief Editor)

207 LUX MONTIS Vol. 4 No. 1 January 2016

Guidelines for submission of Research Paper 1. Manuscript should not exceed 5000 words (12-15 A-4 Size pages, typed 1.5 space, Font size 12, Font type - Times New Roman). 2. Language used - English. 3. An abstract of about 150 words should be included at the beginning of the paper. 4. The paper should not have already been published or submited elsewhere for possible publications. A certificate in this regard is to be submitted by authors while submitting the papers to the editor. 5. The authors can use figures, charts, tables and diagram. They may be black and white, and numbered using Roman numerals with a brief title. 6. All footnotes should be indicated by serial numbers in the text, and the literature cited should be detailed under Notes at the end of the paper bearing corresponding numbers, before the references. 7. Place the references at the end of the manuscript following the end notes. All references should note the complete list of journals and books with page numbers. 8. The References should be prepared in the following form: Books Abraham, K. (2001) Ethiopia: The Dynamics of Economic Reforms (Economic Liberalisation and Political Transformation), Addis Abada: EIIPD (Ethiopian International Instt. for Peace and Development). Edited Volume Aharoni, Y. (1991) “On Measuring the Success of Privatisation”, in Ramamurthi, R. and Vernon, R. (eds) Privatisation and Control of State Owned Enterprises. Washington, D.C.: World Bank. Journals Boardman, M. and Vining, D. (1989) “Ownership in Competitive Environments: A Comparison of the Performance of Mixed, Private and SOEs”, Journal of Law and Economics, April, No. 32. 9. Manuscripts not considered for publication will not be sent back. 10. Manuscripts, which do not confirm to these guidelines, will not be considered for publication. 11. No paper of the jounral will be reprinted without the prior permission of the Editor. 12. The journal is published bi-annually in July and January. Papers for publication should be addressed to-

The Chief Editor, LUX MONTIS Girideepam Institute of Advanced Learning Bethany Hills, Vadavathoor P.O., Kottayam, Kerala. e.mail: [email protected] Contact Number: +91 9447415193

208